Digital PDFs

AA-HD91A-TK

December 1986

495 pages

Original

17MB

Document:	VAXmate Users Guide Volume 1 Sep1986
Order Number:	AA-HD91A-TK
Revision:
Pages:	495
Original Filename:	http://bitsavers.org/pdf/dec/vaxmate/AA-HD91A-TK_VAXmate_Users_Guide_Volume_1_Sep1986.pdf

OCR Text

LIBRARY

DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORP.
550 KING ST., LITTLETON MA 01460-1289
LOCATION LKGl-2/J10
DTN 226-7066
TELEPHONE (617) 486-7066

mate
User's Guide
Volume 1

First Printing, September 1986
© Digital Equipment Corporation 1986. All Rights Reserved.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice and should not be
construed as a commitment by Digital Equipment Corporation. Digital EqUipment Corporation assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document.
The software described in this document is furnished under a license and may only be used
or copied in accordance with the terms of such license.
No responsibility is assumed for the use or reliability of software on equipment that is not
supplied by DIGITAL or its affiliated companies.
Several Program Information Files and device drivers are supplied for use with non-DIGITAL
products and referenced in this document. These are provided on an "AS IS" basis
without any warranty of any kind, either expressed or implied_
FCC Notice: This equipment generates, uses, and may emit radio frequency energy. The
equipment has been type tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A
computing device pursuant to Subpart] of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to
provide reasonable protection against such a commercial environment. Operation of this
equipment in a residential area may cause interference in which case, the user, at his own
expense, may be required to take measures to correct the interference.
MS-DOS and Multiplan are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
The following are trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation:

mamaamo

DEC
DECmate
DECsystem-IO
DECSYSTEM-20
DECUS
DECwriter
DIBOL

MASSBUS
PDP
PIOS
Professional
Rainbow
RSTS
RSX
UNIBUS

VAX
VAXmate
VMS
VT
VT220
VT240
Work Processor

The postage-paid READER'S COMMENTS form at the front of this document requests the
user's critical evaluation to assist usin preparing future documentation.
Documentation produced by the Personal Computer Systems Group, Littleton, MA. Book
production was done by Educational Services Media Communications Group in Bedford, MA.
Printed in U.S.A.

Contents

User's Guide Volume 1
Preface Volume 1
Before Reading This Guide ................................................................... xxxv
Conventions Used................................................................................. xxxvi
The Information System........................................................................ xxxvi
Guide Organization .............................................................................. xxxvii
Volume 1 .......................................................................................... xxxvii
Volume 2 ......................................................................................... xxxviii

Chapter 1

Getting Started With MS-Windows

Starting MS-Windows ................................................................................... 1-2
Initial Window ........................................................................................... 1-2
Working in MS-Windows ............................................................................. 1-2
Running an Application as an Icon .............................................................. 1-3
Using the Information System ..................................................................... 1-4
Scrolling ..................................................................................................... 1-5
Using Menus and Commands ....................................................................... 1-6
System Menu ........................................................................................... 1-6
Application Menus .................................................................................. 1-8
Using a Dialog Box ..................................................................................... 1-8
Finishing an Application ........................................................................... 1-13
Shrinking an Application to an Icon ...................................................... 1-14
Closing an Application .......................................................................... 1-14

11111

Contents

Chapter 2

Running Multiple Applications

Running Multiple Applications ................................................................... 2-2
Displaying Multiple Windows ..................................................................... 2-2
Displaying Icon Names ........................................................................... 2-3
Running Two Applications ...................................................................... 2-4
Running Three Applications .................................................................... 2-5
Switching Windows .................................................................................... 2-6
Moving Windows ........................................................................................ 2-6
Changing the Size of a Window .................................................................. 2-9
Making a Window Larger ......................................................................... 2-9
Using the Size Command .................................................................... 2-9
Using the Size Box ............................................................................ 2-11
Making a Window Smaller ..................................................................... 2-12
Using the Size Command .................................................................. 2-12
Using the Size Box ............................................................................ 2-12
Filling the Screen With a Window ............................... , ........................ 2-13
Using the Zoom Command ................................................................ 2-13
Using the Size Box ............................................................................ 2-14
Shrinking a Window to an Icon ............................................................. 2-14
Using the Icon Command ................................................................. 2-14
Using the Title Bar ............................................................................ 2-15
Transferring Information Between Windows .............................................. 2-16
Cutting and Pasting ............................................................................... 2-16
Receiving Messages From Another Application .......................................... 2-18

Chapter 3

Using the MS-DOS Executive Window

Defining the MS-DOS Executive Application ............................................... 3-1
MS-DOS Executive Window Components .................................................... 3-2
Using Menus and Commands ....................................................................... 3-4
System Menu ........................................................................................... 3-4
File Menu ............................................................................................... 3-5
View Menu ............................................................................................. 3-7
Special Menu .......................................................................................... 3-9
Loading an Application ......................................................................... 3-10
Using the Load Command ..................................................................... 3-1 0
Using the File Name ............................................................................. 3-11
Running an Application ............................................................................ 3-11
Using the Run Command ...................................................................... 3-12

Contents

IIIII

Using the File Name ............................................................................. 3-13
Using Temporary Files .......................................................................... 3-13
Running Batch Files .............................................................................. 3-13
Using MS·DOS Commands and Programs ............................................... 3-14
Running an MS·DOS Operating System Program .................................... 3-14
Finishing an MS·DOS Operating System Program ................................... 3-15
Finishing an MS·Windows Session ............................................................. 3-15

Chapter 4

Working With Files

Using Files .................................................................................................. 4-1
Selecting Files ............................................................................................ .4-2
Selecting a File ...................................................................................... .4-2
Selecting Multiple Files ......................................................................... .4-2
Using the File Menu Commands ................................................................. .4-4
Copying Files ......................................................................................... .4-4
Copying One File .............................................................................. .4-5
Copying More Than One File ............................................................. .4-6
Deleting Files ......................................................................................... 4-6
Deleting One File ............................................................................... 4-6
Deleting More Than One File .............................................................. 4-7
Printing a Text File ................................................................................ .4. 7
Using the Spooler .............................................................................. .4-8
Renaming a File .................................................................................... 4-12
Getting Information About Files ........................................................... .4-13

Chapter 5

Working With Directories and Disks

Working with Directories ........................................................................... .5-1
Changing Directories ............................................................................. .5-1
Using the Change Directory Command ................................................ 5-2
Using the Path Name ......................................................................... .5-3
Using the Word Char Key .................................................................. .5-3
Creating Directories ................................................................................ 5-4
Changing How File Names Are Listed ...................................................... 5-5
Displaying Multiple Directories .............................................................. 5-6
Printing a Directory Listing .................................................................... .5-6
Deleting a Directory .............................................................................. .5-7

vii

IIIII Contents
IIIII

Working With Disks and Diskettes ............................................................. .5-8
Preparing a Diskette ................................................................................ 5-8
Preparing a Data Diskette ........................................................................ 5-8
Preparing a System Diskette ................................................................... .5-9
Naming Disks ........................................................................................ 5-10
Displaying the Contents of Another Disk .............................................. .5-11

Chapter 6

Using the Keyboard

Keyboard Features ...................................................................................... 6-1
Using the Alt Key ........................................................................................ 6-3
Using Menus and Commands ....................................................................... 6-4
Selecting a Menu .................................................................................... 6-4
Selecting a Command From a Menu ........................................................ 6-4
Loading an Application ............................................................................... 6-6
Using the Load Command ...................................................................... 6-6
Using the File Name ............................................................................... 6-6
Running an Application .............................................................................. 6-6
Using the Icon Command ....................................................................... 6-7
Using the Move Command ...................................................................... 6-7
Using the Run Command ........................................................................ 6-8
Using the File Name ............................................................................... 6-8
Finishing an Application ............................................................................. 6-8
Shrinking an Application to an Icon ........................................................ 6-9
Closing an Application ............................................................................ 6-9
Using a Dialog Box ................................................................................... 6-1 0
Selecting Options in a Dialog Box ........................................................ 6-1 0
Selecting Command Buttons in a Dialog Box ......................................... 6-11
Closing a Dialog Box ............................................................................ 6-11
Scrolling a Window .................................................................................. 6-12
Working With Files ................................................................................... 6-14
Selecting Files ....................................................................................... 6-14
Selecting One File ............................................................................ 6-14
Canceling One Selected File ............................................................. 6-14
Selecting a Block of Files .................................................................. 6-15
Selecting Scattered Files .................................................................... 6-15

viii

Contents

IIIII

Using More Than One Window ................................................................. 6-16
Switching Windows .............................................................................. 6-16
Changing the Size of a Window ............................................................ 6-16
Making a Window Larger or Smaller .................................................. 6-16
Making a Window Fill the Entire Screen ........................................... 6-1 7
Moving a Window ................................................................................. 6-1 7
Receiving Messages From Another Application ...................................... 6-18
Printing Screen Images ............................................................................. 6-18

Chapter 7

Running Standard Applications

Working With Standard Applications ........................................................... 7-1
Using Program Information Files ............................................................. 7-2
Running a Standard Application .............................................................. 7-3
Shrinking a Window ................................................................................ 7-3
Closing a Window ................................................................................... 7-3
Scrolling a Window ................................................................................ 7-4
Finishing an MS-Windows Session ........................................................... 7-5
Running Multiple Standard Applications ................................................. 7-5
Running Standard Applications Outside a Window ...................................... 7-5
Starting an Application That Runs Outside a Window .............................. 7-6
Returning to MS-Windows ....................................................................... 7-6
Transferring Information ......................................................................... 7 -7
Marking Information to be Transferred ................................................ 7 -7
Copying Information to the Clipboard ................................................ 7-8
Pasting Information ............................................................................. 7-8
Using the Prt Sc Key ........................................................................... 7-9
Running Large Standard Applications ........................................................ 7 -10
Running Special Applications .................................................................... 7 -10

Chapter 8

Using the Control Panel

Running the Control PaneL ......................................................................... 8-1
Using the Control Panel Dialog Box ............................................................ 8-3
Changing the Time ................................................................................. 8-3
Changing the Date .................................................................................. 8-4
Changing the Cursor Blink Rate .............................................................. 8-5
Changing the Mouse Double-Click Rate .................................................. 8-5

11111 Contents

Using the Installation Menu ........................................................................ 8-6
Adding and Removing a New Printer ....................................................... 8-6
Adding an Existing Printer Driver File ................................................. 8-7
Adding a New Printer Driver File ........................................................ 8-9
Removing a Printer ............................................................................... 8-1 0
Adding a New Font ............................................................................... 8-11
Deleting a Font ..................................................................................... 8-13
Using the Setup Menu ............................................................................... 8-14
Changing Printer Connections .............................................................. 8-14
Changing the Default Printer ................................................................ 8-15
Changing the Communications Port ...................................................... 8-16
Selecting Network Terminal Services .................................................... 8-18
Using the Preferences Menu ............. ~ ........................................................ 8-20
Changing Screen Colors ........................................................................ 8-20
Changing Keyboard Settings .................................................................. 8-22
Changing Mouse Settings ...................................................................... 8-24
Changing Country Settings .................................................................... 8-25

Chapter 9 Using Terminal Emulators With Your
Workstation
Chapter 10

Using the VT220 Terminal Emulator

Starting the VT220 Emulator ..................................................................... 10-2
Using Multiple VT220 Emulators .......................................................... 10-2
Scrolling in the Emulator Window ............................................................ 10-3
Using the VT220 Emulator System Menu Commands ................................. 10-3
The Set·Up Command ....................................................................... 10-3
The Mark, Copy, and Paste Commands .............................................. l 0-4
The About Command ........................................................................ l 0-4
Leaving the VT220 Emulator ..................................................................... 10-4

Chapter 11

Using the VT220 Emulator Keyboard

The VT220 Emulator Keyboard ................................................................. 11-1
Labels ................................................................................................... 11-2
Top· Row Function Keys ........................................................................ 11-2

Contents

Chapter 12

IIIII

Using Set-Up With the VT220 Emulator

Entering Set-Up ......................................................................................... 12-1
Understanding the VT220 Set-Up Screens .............................................. 12-2
The VT220 Status Section ..................................................................... 12-4
Changing Settings in VT220 Set-Up ........................................................... 12-4
Using the Mouse in Set-Up .................................................................... 12-5
Exiting Set-Up ........................................................................................... 12-5
Using Set-Up Table Information ................................................................ 12-5
Actions Screen .......................................................................................... 12-6
Communications Screen ............................................................................ 12-9
Display Screen ........................................................................................ 12-12
General Screen ....................................................................................... 12 -14
Keyboard Screen ..................................................................................... 12 -17
Printer Screen ......................................................................................... 12-20
Tabs Screen ............................................................................................. 12-22
Setting VT220 Tabs Manually .............................................................. 12-23
Telephone Screen ................................................................................... 12-25

Chapter 13

Using VT220 Special Features

Using Configuration Files .......................................................................... 13-1
What the VT220 Emulator Does ................. : .......................................... 13-1
What You Can Do ................................................................................. 13-1
Specifying Set-Up Configuration Files on Startup ................................... 13-2
Saving and Recalling Set-Up Files .............................................................. 13-2
Saving VT220 Selection Settings ............................................................ 13 -2
Recalling VT220 Selection Settings ....................................................... 13 -3
Receiving Characters From the Host Into a File ......................................... 13-3
Autotyping Characters to the Host ............................................................. 13-4

Chapter 14

Using the VT240 Terminal Emulator

Starting the VT240 Emulator ..................................................................... 14-2
Using the Run Command to Start .......................................................... 14-2
Starting From the MS-DOS Operating System ......................................... 14-3
Exiting the VT240 Emulator ...................................................................... 14-4

III!! Contents
Chapter 15

Using the VT240 Emulator Keyboard

The VT240 Emulator Keyboard ................................................................. 15-1
Labels ................................................................................................... 15-1
Top-Row Function Keys ........................................................................ 15-2

Chapter 16

Using Set-Up With the VT240 Emulator

Entering Set-Up ......................................................................................... 16-1
Understanding the VT240 Set-Up Screens .............................................. 16-1
Using the Keyboard in VT240 Set-Up .................................................... 16-4
The Next and Prev Keys .................................................................... 16-4
The Select Key .................................................................................. 16-4
The Arrow Keys ................................................................................ 16-4
Changing Settings in VT240 Set-Up ........................................................... 16-5
Exiting Set-Up ........................................................................................... 16-5
Using Set-Up Table Information ................................................................ 16-6
Actions Screen .......................................................................................... 16-7
The VT240 Show Status ........................................................................ 16-9
Communications Screen .......................................................................... 16-1 0
Selecting a Network Terminal Service ................................................. 16-13
Display Screen ........................................................................................ 16-14
Using VT240 Video Modes .................................................................. 16-1 7
Displaying Line Attributes ................................................................... 16-1 7
Double Width Lines for Fast Text Only ........................................... 16-18
Double Height/Double Width Lines for Fast Text Only ................... 16-18
Displaying Character Attributes ........................................................... 16-18
General Screen ....................................................................................... 16-19
Keyboard Screen ..................................................................................... 16-2 2
Printer Screen ......................................................................................... 16-26
Tabs Screen ............................................................................................. 16-28
Setting VT240 Tabs Manually .............................................................. 16-29
Telephone Screen ................................................................................... 16-31

xii

Contents

Chapter 17

IIIII

Using VT240 Special Features

Using Configuration Files .......................................................................... 1 7-1
What the VT2 4 0 Emulator Does ............................................................ 17-1
What You Can Do ................................................................................. 1 7-1
Saving and Recalling Set-Up Files .............................................................. 17-2
Saving VT240 Selection Settings ............................................................ 1 7 -2
Recalling VT240 Selection Settings ....................................................... 17-3
Receiving Characters From the Host Into a File ......................................... 17-4
Autotyping Characters to the Host ............................................................. 17-5

Chapter 18

Using Notepad

Starting Notepad ....................................................................................... 18-1
Typing Text .............................................................................................. 18-2
Formatting Text ........................................................................................ 18-3
Scrolling ................................................................................................... 18-4
Editing in Notepad .................................................................................... 18-5
Moving the Insertion Point .........: ......................................................... 18-5
Selecting Text ....................................................................................... 18-6
Selecting Text With the Mouse or Keyboard ...................................... 18-6
Selecting Text with the Select All Command ..................................... 18-7
Canceling an Edit ................................................................................. 18-7
Deleting Text ........................................................................................ 18-7
Moving Text ......................................................................................... 18-8
Copying Text ........................................................................................ 18-8
Finding Text ......................................................................................... 18-9
Working With Notepad Files ................................................................... 18-1 0
File Size .............................................................................................. 18-1 0
Opening a File .................................................................................... 18-11
Opening a New File ........................................................................ 18-11
Opening an Existing File ................................................................ 18-11
Creating a Time Log File ................................................................. 18-13
Viewing Files in Other Directories ...................................................... 18-13
Saving a File ....................................................................................... 18-14
Saving a New File ........................................................................... 18-14
Saving Changes ............................................................................... 18-1 5
Printing a File ..................................................................................... 18-15
Deleting a File .................................................................................... 18-15

xiii

III II
Chapter 19

Using Cardfile

Starting Cardfile ........................................................................................ 19-1
Creating a Card File .................................................................................. 19-3
Index Line ............................................................................................ 19-3
Typing Text .......................................................................................... 19-4
Formatting Text .................................................................................... 19-4
Adding a Card ....................................................................................... 19-5
Moving Through a File .............................................................................. 19-5
Scrolling ............................................................................................... 19-6
Moving a Card to the Front ................................................................... 19-7
Changing the Index Line ....................................................................... 19-7
Editing Cards ............................................................................................ 19-8
Moving the Insertion Point ................................................................... 19-8
Selecting Text ....................................................................................... 19-9
Canceling an Edit ............................................................................... 19-1 0
Deleting Text ........................................... '" .................................... , ... 19-1 0
Moving Text ....................................................................................... 19-1 0
Moving Text Within the Same Card .. , .............................................. 19-10
Moving Text to Another Card .......................................................... 19-11
Copying Text ...................................................................................... 19-11
Copying Text to the Same Card ....................................................... 19-11
Copying Text to Another Card ........................................................ 19-11
Finding Text ....................................................................................... 19-12
Adding Information From Other Applications ...................................... 19-13
Restoring a Card ................................................................................. 19-13
Deleting a Card ................................................................................... 19-14
Copying a Card ................................................................................... 19-14
Working With Card Files ......................................................................... 19-14
File Size .............................................................................................. 19-14
Opening a File .................................................................................... 19-15
Opening a New File ........................................................................ 19-15
Opening an Existing File ................................................................ 19-15
Viewing Files in Other Directories ...................................................... 19-17

xiv

Contents 11111

Saving a File ....................................................................................... 19-18
Saving a New File ........................................................................... 19-18
Saving Changes ............................................................................... 19-19
Printing in Cardfile ............................................................................. 19-19
Printing a Card ............................................................................... 19-19
Printing an Entire File ..................................................................... 19-19
Deleting a File .................................................................................... 19-19
Merging Files ...................................................................................... 19-20
Viewing a File as a List ....................................................................... 19-20
Automatic Dialing ................................................................................... 19- 21

Chapter 20

Using Calendar

Starting Calendar ...................................................................................... 20-1
Editing the Day View ................................................................................ 20-3
Selecting a Time ................................................................................... 20-3
Entering an Appointment ...................................................................... 20-3
Selecting Text ....................................................................................... 20-4
Editing an Entry .................................................................................... 20-4
Copying an Entry .................................................................................. 20-4
Deleting an Entry .................................................................................. 20-5
Setting the Alarm ...................................................................................... 20-5
Turning On the Alarm ........................................................................... 20-5
Setting the Alarm for Sound .................................................................. 20-6
Setting the Alarm to Ring Early ............................................................. 20-6
Turning Off the Alarm .......................................................................... 20-6
Removing an Alarm ............................................................................... 20-7
Viewing Different Times or Dates ............................................................. 20-7
Viewing Different Times ....................................................................... 20-7
Viewing Different Dates ........................................................................ 20-8
Viewing Different Dates Using the Month View ..................................... 20-8
Viewing a Specific Date ........................................................................ 20-9
Customizing Your Calendar .................................................................... 20-10
Changing Day Settings ......................................................................... 20-10
Using Special Times ............................................................................ 20-11
Adding Special Times ...................................................................... 20-11
Deleting Special Times ................................................................... 20-11

IIIII Contents
Adding Notes ...................................................................................... 20-12
Marking Dates ... ..................... '" ......................................................... .20-12
Marking a Date ................................................................................ 20-12
Unmarking a Date ........................................................................... 20-13
Working With Calendar Files .................................................................. 20-13
Opening a File ........................ .......................................................... .. 20-13
Opening a New File ........................................................................ 2 0-13
Opening an Existing File ................................................................ 20-14
Viewing Files in Other Directories ...................................................... 20-15
Saving a File ....................................................................................... 20-15
Saving a New File .......................................................................... .20-16
Saving Changes ............................................................................... 20-17
Printing Appointments ........................................................................ 20-17
Removing Appointment Dates ............................................................. 20-18
Deleting a File .................................................................................... 20-18

Chapter 21

Using Calculator

Starting Calculator .................................................................................... 21-1
Using Calculator ....................................................................................... 21-3
Using the Memory ................................................................................. 21- 3
Using the Clipboard ........................ .................................................... .. 21-4
Copying to the Clipboard.; ............................................................... 21-4
Copying from the Clipboard ............................................................. 21-4

Chapter 22

Using Clock

Starting Clock ........................................................................................... 2 2-1
Setting the Clock ...................................................................................... 22-2

Chapter 23

Using Reversi

Starting Reversi ......................................................................................... 23-1
Rules of the Game .................................................................................... 23-2
Playing Reversi ......................................................................................... 23-3
Reversi Hints ............................................................................................ 23-3
Starting a New Game ................................................................................ 23-3

xvi

Contents 11111

Chapter 24

Introducing MS-Paint

Defining MS-Paint ..................................................................................... 24-1
Preliminaries ............................................................................................ 24-1
Definitions ................................................................................................ 2 4 -2

Chapter 25

MS-Paint Tools and Shapes Summary

Tools ........................................................................................................ 25-2
Shapes ...................................................................................................... 25-3

Chapter 26

Getting Started With MS-Paint

Starting MS-Paint ....................................................................................... 26-1
Drawing .................................................................................................... 26-2
Drawing With the Pencil. ...................................................................... 26-3
Drawing With the Brush ........................................................................ 26-4
Using the Eraser .................................................................................... 26-5
Saving a Canvas ......................................................................................... 26-6
Using MS-Paint's Palettes ........................................................................... 26-7
Printing a Canvas ...................................................................................... 26-8
Finishing MS-Paint .................................................................................... 26-8

Chapter 27

Creating a Drawing

Drawing a Box .......................................................................................... 27-1
Drawing Other Shapes .............................................................................. 2 7 -2
Adding Text .............................................................................................. 27-3
Adding Patterns ......................................................................................... 27-4
Drawing a Filled Box ............................................................................ 27-4
Filling a Shape ...................................................................................... 27-5
Editing a Selection .................................................................................... 27-6
Making a Selection ................................................................................ 27-6
Copying a Selection .............................................................................. 2 7 -7
Editing With Special Effects .................................................................. 27-7
Editing in Detail ................................................................................... 27-8
Scrolling the Canvas ............................................................................... 27-10

xvii

11111 Contents

Chapter 28 MS-Paint Command Summary
File Menu ................................................................................................. 28-1
Edit Menu ................................................................................................. 28-3
Font Menu ................................................................................................ 28-5
FontSize Menu .......................................................................................... 28-5
Style Menu ................................................................................................ 28-5
Palette Menu ............................................................................................. 28-8
Options Menu ........................................................................................... 28-9

Appendix A Creating Alternate Characters
Using Keys With Three or Four Legends ......................................................A-l
Using Compose Sequences ..........................................................................A-3
Using the Two-Key Compose Sequence ...................................................A-4
Using the Three-Key Compose Sequence .................................................A-5
Finishing or Restarting a Compose Sequence ..........................................A-6
AIt Numeric Pad Sequence ........................................................................A-ll

Appendix B Information About the WIN.INI File
Changing the WIN.INI File ..................................................................... B-3
Windows Section .................................................................................... B-4
Extensions Section .................................................................................. B-8
Colors Section ...................................................................................... B-l 0
PIF Section ........................................................................................... B-13
Ports Section ......................................................................................... B-16
International Section ............................................................................. B-18
DecLAT Section ..................................................................................... B-21
DecKeybd Section ................................................................................. B-22
Dec Info Section .................................................................................... B-24
Devices Section ..................................................................................... B-26
Fonts Section ........................................................................................ B-27

xviii

Contents 11111

Appendix C Program Information Files
Using Program Information Files ................................................................ C-l
Using the PIF Editor ................................................................................... C-3
Creating a PIF ........................................................................................ C-4
Editing PIFs ........................................................................................... C-S
Selecting PIF Options ................................................................................ C-S
Using Default Settings .............................................................................. C-13
Deciding What to Put in a PIF ................................................................. C-13
Changing PIFs .......................................................................................... C-lS
Giving Applications More Memory ........................................................... C-lS

Appendix D

Using a Keyboard With the VT220 Emulator

Appendix E Special Key Actions for MS-Paint
Using the Ctrl Key: Copying a Selection ..................................................... E-l
Using the Shift Key: Creating Multiple Copies ............................................ E-l
Using the Shift Key: Scrolling a Zoomed-In Canvas ..................................... E-l

Appendix FUsing MS-Paint With the Keyboard
Selecting Tools and Shapes ......................................................................... F-2
Drawing Lines and Shapes ........................................................................... F-2
Drawing Curves .......................................................................................... F-2
Drawing Polygons ....................................................................................... F-2
Using the Fill Tool. ..................................................................................... F-3
Making a Selection ...................................................................................... F-3
Moving a Selection ...................................................................................... F-3
Copying and Moving a Selection ................................................................. F-3
Making Multiple Copies .............................................................................. F-4
Scrolling ..................................................................................................... F-4
Using the Return Key .................................................................................. F-S
Zooming In ............................................................................................. F-S
Zooming Out .......................................................................................... F-S
Erasing .................................................................................................... F-S

xix

IIIII
0"" . . . .~.·.·
r V,,,,,r;:,,,,,~
__

User's Guide Volume 2
Chapter 29

Using MS-DOS With MS-Windows

Characteristics of Commands and Device Drivers ...................................... 29-1
Using External Commands With MS-Windows ........................................ 29-2
Using Internal Commands With MS-Windows ........................................ 29-3
Getting Help ............................................................................................. 29-4
Exiting from MS-Windows ......................................................................... 29-5

Chapter 30

Commands, Directories, Paths, and Files

General Command Format ........................................................................ 30-1
Information Common to All Commands .................................................... 30-2
Support Files ............................................................................................ 30-3
Directories ................................................................................................ 30-4
Hierarchical Directory Structure ........................................................... 30-4
Paths ......................................................................................................... 30-5
Paths With External Commands ............................................................. 30-7
Files ......................................................................................................... 30-7
Naming Files ......................................................................................... 30-7
Illegal File Names ................................................................................. 30-8
Wildcards ................................................................................................. 30-8
Question Mark ...................................................................................... 30-9
Asterisk ................................................................................. " .............. 30-9

Chapter 31

Using the Hard Disk

What Is a Hard Disk? ................................................................................ 31-1
Preparing Your Hard Disk ......................................................................... 31-1
Setting the Drive Type .......................................................................... 31-2
Initializing Your Hard Disk ................................................................... 31-6
Partitioning Your Hard Disk .................................................................. 31-6
Setting the Start-up Partition ................................................................. 31-8
Formatting Your Hard Disk ................................................................... 31-9
Copying Files to Your Hard Disk ............................................... ;............. 31-10
Repartitioning the Hard Disk .................................................................. 31-10

Contents

Chapter 32

IIIII

MS-DOS Operating System Commands

Conventions Used ..................................................................................... 32-2

Commands ................................................................................................ 32-2
ANSI ..................................................................................................... 32-6
APPEND ................................................................................................ 32-7
ASSIGN ................................................................................................. 32-9
ATIRIB ............................................................................................... 32-11
BACKUP .............................................................................................. 32-13
BREAK ................................................................................................32-17
CHDIR ................................................................................................ 32-18
CHKDSK ............................................................................................. 32-19
CLS ..................................................................................................... 32-21
COMMAND ......................................................................................... 32-22
COPY ................................................................................................. 32-24
To Copy Files ................................................................................. 32-24
To Append Files .............................................................................. 32-27
CTIY .................................................................................................. 32-31
DATE .................................................................................................. 32-32
DEL ..................................................................................................... 32-34
DIR ..................................................................................................... 32-35
DISKCOPy .......................................................................................... 32-37
ECHO ................................................................................................. 32-39
EDLIN ................................................................................................. 32-41
ERASE ................................................................................................. 32-42
EXE2BIN ............................................................................................. 32-43
EXIT ................................................................................................... 32-45
FC ...................................................................................................... 32-46
FDISK ................................................................................................. 32-49
FIND ................................................................................................... 32-50
FONT .................................................................................................. 32-53
FOR .................................................................................................... 32-56
FORMAT ............................................................................................. 32-58
GOTO ................................................................................................. 32-61
GRAFTABL .................. ......................................................................... 3 2-62

xxi

IIIII Contents
GRAPHICS ................... ...................................................................... . 32-63
IF ........................................................................................................32 -66
JOIN ................................................................................................... 32-68
KEYB ..................................................................................................32-70
LABEL ................................................................................................. 32-72
LCOUNTRY ......................................................................................... 32-74
MDRIVE .............................................................................................. 32-76
MKDIR ................................................................................................32-78
MODE .................................................................................................32-79
MORE ................................................................................................. 32-90
NET .................................................................................................... 32-92
PATH .................................................................................................. 32-93
PAUSE ................................................................................................. 32-95
PERMIT ............................................................................................... 32-97
PRINT ................................................................................................. 32-98
PROMPT ........................................................................................... 32-102
RECOVER ......................................................................................... 32-104
REM ..................................................................................................32-106
REN .................................................................................................. 32-107
RESTORE .......................................................................................... 32-108
RMDIR ..............................................................................................32-110
SELECT ............................................................................................. 32-111
SET ................................................................................................... 32-115
SHARE ...............................................................................................32-117
SHIFT ............................................................................................... 32-118
SORT ................................................................................................ 32-120
SUBST ............................................................................................... 32-123
SYS ................................................................................................... 32-125
TIME .................................................................................................32-127
TYPE .................................................................................................32-128
VER .................................................................................................. 32-130
VERIFY ............................................................................................. 32-131
VOL .................................................................................................. 32-132

xxii

Contents

Chapter 33

IIIII

Using the Network With MS-DOS

What Is a Network? ................................................................................... 33-2
What Is a Server? ...................................................................................... 33-3
Before Using the Network ......................................................................... 33-4
Getting Help ......................................................................................... 33-4
Connecting to the Network (NET START RDR) ...................................... 33-4
Specifying Device Names ...................................................................... 33-5
Connecting to a Resource (NET USE) ........................................................ 33-6
Connecting to a Directory (NET USE) ................................................... 33-7
Connecting to a Remote Printer (NET USE) .......................................... 33-7
Listing Remote Connections (NET USE) ................................................ 33-8
Using Resources ........................................................................................ 33-9
Changing to Another Drive ................................................................... 33-9
Printing a Remote File (NET PRINT) ..................................................... 33-9
Temporarily Disconnecting From Network Resources (NET PAUSE) .... 33-10
Restarting After a NET PAUSE Command (NET CONTINUE) ................ 33-11
Disconnecting From a Resource .............................................................. 33-12
Disconnecting From a Remote Directory ............................................. 33-12
Disconnecting From a Remote Printer ................................................. 33-12
Other Network Commands ...................................................................... 33-13
NET CLEAR ......................................................................................... 33-13
NET DEFINE ....................................................................................... 33-13
NET LIST ............................................................................................. 33-14
NET START LAT ................................................................................... 33-15
NET TEST ............................................................................................ 33-15
NET TIME ........................................................................................... 33-16
PERMIT ............................................................................................... 33-17

Chapter 34

Using Network File Transfer (NFT)

Running NFT ............................................................................................ 34-2
Using Access Control Information ............................................................. 34-3
Format for Access Control Information .................................................. 34-3
Storing Default Access Control Information ........................................... 34-3
Changing Default Access Control Information ....................................... 34-4
Specifying Remote Files ............................................................................ 34-5
Identifying Types of Files and Systems ...................................................... 34-6
Using NFT Commands ............................................................................... 34-8
Command Conventions ......................................................................... 34-9
Table of Commands ............................................................................ 34-10
APPEND .............................................................................................. 34-11

xxiii

IIIII Contents
11111

COpy ................................................................................................. 34-14
DELETE ............................................................................................... 34-20
DIRECTORY ........................................................................................ 34-21
EXIT .................................................................................................... 34-23
HELP ................................................................................................... 34-24
PRINT ................................................................................................. 34-25
SET ............... ; ..................................................................................... 34-26
SHOW ................................................................................................. 34-27
SUBMIT ............................................................................................... 34-28
TYPE ................................................................................................... 34-29

Chapter 35

Connecting to a Remote Host With SETHOST

Using SETHOST ......................................................................................... 35-1
Using the SETHOST Command .................................................................. 35-3
/ABORT ................................................................................................ 35-4
/CTERM ................................................................................................ 35-5
/EDIT ................................................................................................... 35-5
/EXIT ................................................................................................... 35-6
/HELP ................................................................................................... 35-7
/LOG .................................................................................................... 35-8
/SAVEDEFAULT ...................................................................................... 35-8
/SESSION .............................................................................................. 35-9
/SHOW ................................................................................................. 35-9
/TAKE ................................................................................................. 35-10
Using the SETHOST Menu ....................................................................... 35-11
Return Option .................................................................................... 35-11
(H)elp Option .................................................................................... 35-12
(L)og Option ...................................................................................... 35-12
(R)econnect Option ........................................................................... 35-12
(E)dit Option ..................................................................................... 35-12
(S)ession Option ................................................................................ 35-13
(A)bort Session Option ....................................................................... 35-13
(N)ew Session Option ........................................................................ 35-13
Using Your Workstation as a VTI02 Terminal ......................................... 35-14
Entering Set-Up Mode ......................................................................... 35-14
Selecting a Set-Up Menu ..................................................................... 35-16
Saving Set-Up Values ........................................................................... 35-16
Using Set-Up Values ............................................................................ 35-17
Recalling Set-Up Values ...................................................................... 35-17
Exiting From Set-Up Mode .................................................................. 35-17

xxiv

Contents 11111

Editing Text During a Remote Session ..................................................... 35-18
Disconnecting From a Host ..................................................................... 3 5 -18

Chapter 36

MS-DOS Editing and Function Keys

MS-DOS Editing Keys ................................................................................ 36-1
Example 1 ............................................................................................ 36-2
Example 2 ......................................................... '" ................................ 36-2
Control Character Functions ..................................................................... 36-3
The PrtSc Key ........................................................................................... 36-4
Industry Standard Compose Sequences ...................................................... 36-4

Chapter 37

Batch Processing

What Is Batch Processing? ......................................................................... 37-1
The REM and PAUSE Commands ............................................................ 37-1
Batch File Creation ............................................................................... 37-2
Batch File Execution ............................................................................. 37-2
Batch Files With Replacement Parameters ................................................. 37-3
Executing NEWFILE.BAT ....................................................................... 37-4
The AUTOEXEC.BAT File .......................................................................... 37-5
Creating an AUTOEXEC.BAT File ........................................................... 37-5

Chapter 38

Redirecting Input and Output

Redirecting Input ..................................................................................... 38-2
Redirecting Output ................................................................................... 38-2
Filters ....................................................................................................... 38-3
Pipes ........................................................................................................ 38-3

Chapter 39

DEBUG

DEBUG Program Headers .......................................................................... 39-1
Information Common to All DEBUG Commands ........................................ 39-1
ASSEMBLE ............................................................................................. 39-3
COMPARE ............................................................................................. 39-6
DUMP ................................................................................................... 39-8
ENTER ................................................................................................ 39-10
FILL .................................................................................................... 39-13

xxv

IIIII Contents
GO ..................................................................................................... 39-15
HEX ....................................................................................................39-17
INPUT .................................................................................................39-18
LOAD ..................................................................................................39-19
MOVE ................................................................................................. 39-21
NAME ..................................................................................................39-23
OUTPUT ................. .......................................................................... .. 39-26
PTRACE ....................... , .................................................................... .. 39-27
QUIT .................................................................................................. 39-29
REGISTER .............................................. ............................................ . 39-30
SEARCH .............................................................................................. 39-33
TRACE ................................................................................................ 39-35
UNASSEMBLE .......................................................................................39-37
WRITE ....... ........................................................................................ . 39-39

Chapter 40

Messages

Disk and Device Errors ............................................................................ .40-2
Messages ....................... ........................................................................... .40-3

Appendix G

International Features

International Country Codes ...................................................................... G-1
International Character Set Codes .............................................................. G-2
Country Keyboard Abbreviations ................................................................ G-2
Commands Providing International Support ............................................... G-3
The FONT Command ...................................... ....................................... G-3
The GRAFTABL Command ... ................................................................... G-3
The KEYB Command .............................................................................. G-3
The LCOUNTRY Command .................................................................... G-4
The SELECT Command ........................................................................... G-4
The SORT Command .............................................................................. G-4
Similarities Between FONT, GRAFTABL, KEYB, LCOUNTRY, SORT ......... G-4
How Support Files Work Together ................................. ............................ G-5
Country Keyboards .................................................................................... G-7

xxvi

Contents

Appendix H

IIIII

Using Diskettes on the VAXmate
Workstation

Using Diskettes .......................................................................................... H- 1
Formatting Diskettes .................................................................................. H- 1
Diskette ReadjWrite Compatibility ............................................................. H-2
DlSKCOPY and Diskette Types ................................................................... H-3

Appendix I

How to Configure Your System

What Is a CONFIG.SYS File? ....................................................................... I-I
Creating the CONFIG.SYS File ...................................................... .............. 1-2
CONFIG.SYS Commands ...................................................... ....................... 1-2
BREAK ...................................................... .............................................. 1-3
BUFFERS ...................................................... ........................................... 1-4
COUNTRy .................................................... .......................................... 1-5
DEViCE ................................................................................................... 1-6
FCBS ...................................................... ................................................. 1-7
FILES ...................................................... ................................................ 1-8
LASTDRIVE .. ...................................................................................... ...... 1-9
SHELL ...................................................... ............................................. 1-10
Sample CONFIG.SYS File .......................................................................... I-II

Appendix J VAXmate Options
Additional Memory ..................................................................................... J-l
Integral Modem (North America) ................................................................ J-l
Printers ....................................................................................................... J-2
80287 Math Coprocessor ............................................................................ J-2
Expansion Box with Hard Disk .................................................................... J-2

Appendix K

Vaxmate Workstation Specifications

VAXmate Workstation ................................................................................ K-l
System Unit ............................................................................................ K- 1
CPU ....................................................................................................... K-l
Power Supply ........................................................................................ K-2
Environment - Class A ........................................................................... K-2

xxvii

11111
I II I t

<"_ • • • • •

vUFlH;:nt~,-

Workstation System Expansion ................................................................... K-3
I/O Video Module ................................................................................. K-3
SI/4-Inch Flexible Disk Drive ................................................................. K-4
Keyboard ................................................................................................... K-4
Physical Description (Low-profile, Detachable) ..................................... K-4
Mouse ........................................................................................................ K-4
Physical Description .............................................................................. K-4
Electrical specifications ......................................................................... K-S

Index

Tables
Table 1-1 Mouse Techniques .................................................................... 1-3
Table 1-2 Scrolling With the Mouse .......................................................... 1-6
Table 1-3 System Menu Commands ........................................................... 1-7
Table 2-1 Cut, Copy, and Paste Commands ............................................. 2-17
Table 3-1 MS-DOS Executive Window Components ................................... 3-3
Table 3-2 File Menu Commands ................................................................ 3-6
Table 3-3 View Menu Commands .............................................................. 3-8
Table 3-4 Special Menu Commands .......................................................... 3-9
Table 6-1 MS-Windows Keys ..................................................................... 6-2
Table 6-2 Moving the Cursor in a Dialog Box ......................................... 6-10
Table 6-3 Keyboard Scrolling in the MS-DOS Executive Window ............ 6-12
Table 7-1 Scrolling Standard Applications That Run in a Window ............. 7-4
Table 8-1 Fonts on the Fonts Disk ........................................................... 8-13
Table 8-2 Fonts Not on the Fonts Disk .................................................... 8-13
Table 9-1 Workstation Emulator Comparison Table ................................... 9-2
Table 12-1 VT220 Set-Up Screens ........................................................... 12-3
Table 12-2 VT220 Actions Set-Up ........................................................... 12-7
Table 12-3 VT220 Communications Set-Up ........................................... 12-10
Table 12-4 VT220 Display Set-Up ......................................................... 12-12
Table 12-5 VT220 General Set-Up ........................................................ 12-15
Table 12-6 VT220 Keyboard Set-Up ...................................................... 12-18
Table 12-7 Printer Set-Up ..................................................................... 12-21
Table 12-8 VT220 Tab Set-Up ............................................................... 12-22
Table 12-9 VT220 Telephone Set-Up .................................................... 12-26
Table 16-1 VT240 Set-Up Screens ........................................................... 16-3
Table 16-2 VT240 Actions Set-Up ........................................................... 16-8
Table 16-3 VT240 Communications Set-Up ........................................... 16-11

xxviii

Contents

IIIII

Table 16-4 VT240 Display Set-Up ......................................................... 16-15
Table 16-5 VT240 General Set-Up ........................................................ 16-20
Table 16-6 VT240 Keyboard Set-Up ...................................................... 16-23
Table 16-7 VT240 Printer Set-Up .......................................................... 16-27
Table 16-8 VT240 Tab Set-Up ............................................................... 16-29
Table 16-9 Telephone Set-Up ................................................................ 16-32
Table 18-1 Replies for Opening a File .................................................. 18-11
Table 19-1 Replies for Opening a File .................................................. 19-15
Table 19-2 Autodial Options and Functions .......................................... 19-22
Table 20-1 Scrolling to View Different Times ......................................... 20-7
Table 20-2 Scrolling to View Different Dates .......................................... 20-8
Table 20-3 Moving in Month View With the Mouse ................................ 20-8
Table 20-4 Moving in Month View With the Keyboard ............................ 20-9
Table 20-5 Acceptable Entries for Dates ................................................ 20-1 0
Table 21-1 Using Memory With the Mouse and Keyboard ....................... 21-3
Table 27-1 Tools for Drawing Shapes and How to Use Them ................ 27-2
Table 28-1 File Menu Commands and Descriptions ................................. 28-2
Table 28-2 Edit Menu Commands and Descriptions ................................ 28-4
Table 28-3 Style Menu Commands and Descriptions ............................... 28-7
Table 28-4 Options Menu Commands and Descriptions ........................ 28-10
Table 29-1 Command Characteristics ...................................................... 29-2
Table 29-2 Equivalent MS-Windows Commands ...................................... 29-3
Table 30-1 Support Files and Usage ........................................................ 30-3
Table 32-1 Conventions .......................................................................... 3 2- 2
Table 32-2 MS-DOS Operating System Commands ................................... 32-3
Table 32-3 ATTRIB Command Examples ............................................... 32-12
Table 32-4 BACKUP File Specifications ................................................. 32-14
Table 32-5 DIR Command Equivalents .................................................. 32-36
Table 32-6 EDLIN Commands ............................................................... 32-41
Table 32-7 NET Command Options ....................................................... 32-92
Table 32-8 Prompt Characters ............................................................ 32-102
Table 32-9 System Prompt Examples .................................................. 32-103
Table 32-10 How SELECT Affects CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT ... 32-113
Table 33-1 Network Commands .............................................................. 33-1
Table 34-1 Operating Systems and File Specifications ............................. 34-5
Table 34-2 Copying or Appending Files From a Remote Node ................ 34-7
Table 34-3 Copying or Appending Files to a Remote Node ..................... 34-8
Table 34-4 Valid NFT Commands .......................................................... 34-10
Table 35-1 Options for the Edit Submenu ............................................. 35-13
Table 36-1 MS-DOS Editing Keys ............................................................. 36-1
Table 36-2 Control Character Functions ................................................. 36-3

xxix

1I111

Contents

Table 38-1 Options for Redirecting Input and Output.. .......................... 38-1
Table 39-1 DEBUG Commands ................................................................ 39-2
Table 39-2 Flags ................................................................................... 39-31
Table A-J Diacritical Mark in a Three-Key Sequence .................................A-5
Table A-2 Valid Compose Sequences ......................................................... A-6
Table B-1 Sections of the WIN.INI File ..................................................... B-2
Table D-l Keys and Their VT220 Emulator Functions .............................. D-l
Table G-l International Support .............................................................. G-3
Table G-2 Examples of International Commands ...................................... G-5
Table G-3 IBM Extended Character Set .................................................... G-5
Table G-4 DIGITAL Multinational Character Set ....................................... G-6
Table G-5 French 7 -Bit National Replacement Character Set .................... G-6
Table G-6 German 7-Bit National Replacement Character Set ................... G-6
Table G-7 International Standards Organization ....................................... G-6
Table 1-1 CONFIG.SYS Commands ............................................................ 1-2

Figures
Figure 1-1 System Menu Commands .......................................................... 1-6
Figure 1-2 Text Box ................................................................................ 1-10
Figure 1-3 List Box ................................................................................. 1-11
Figure 1-4 Option Buttons ...................................................................... 1-11
Figure 1-5 Check Box ............................................................................. 1-12
Figure 1-6 Command Buttons ................................................................. 1-12
Figure 2-1 Displaying the Icon Name ........................................................ 2-3
Figure 2-2 Message From Another Application ........................................ 2-18
Figure 3-1 System Menu Commands .......................................................... 3-4
Figure 3-2 File Menu Commands .............................................................. 3-5
Figure 3-3 View Menu Commands ............................................................ 3-7
Figure 3-4 Special Menu ........................................................................... 3-9
Figure 3-5 Load Dialog Box .................................................................... 3-10
Figure 3-6 Run Dialog Box ..................................................................... 3-12
Figure 4-1 File Menu Commands ............................................................. .4-4
Figure 4-2 Copy Command Dialog Box ..................................................... 4-5
Figure 4-3 Print Dialog Box ..................................................................... .4-7
Figure 4-4 Print Spooler Dialog Box ....................................................... ..4-8
Figure 4-5 Rename Dialog Box .............................................................. .4-12
Figure 4-6 Get Info Dialog Box .............................................................. .4-13
Figure 5 -1 Change Directory Dialog Box ................................................... 5 -2
Figure 5-2 Create Directory Dialog Box .................................................... 5-4

xxx

Contents

IIIII

Figure 5-3 Partial Dialog Box ................................................................... .5-5
Figure 5-4 Format Data Disk Dialog Box .................................................. .5-8
Figure 5-5 Set Volume Name Dialog Box ................................................ 5-1 0
Figure 6-1 Keys Used for Scrolling .......................................................... 6-13
Figure 8-1 Changing the Time .................................................................. 8-3
Figure 8-2 Changing the Date ................................................................... 8-4
Figure 8-3 Installation Menu Commands ................................................... 8-6
Figure 8-4 Add New Printer Dialog Box .................................................... 8-7
Figure 8-5 Delete Printer Dialog Box ...................................................... 8-1 0
Figure 8-6 Setup Menu Commands .......................................................... 8-14
Figure 8-7 Connections Dialog Box ........................................................ 8-15
Figure 8-8 Default Printer Dialog Box ..................................................... 8-16
Figure 8-9 Communications Settings Dialog Box ..................................... 8-1 7
Figure 8-10 Network Terminal Services Dialog Box ................................ 8-18
Figure 8-11 Preferences Menu Commands .............................................. 8-20
Figure 8-12 Screen Colors Dialog Box .................................................... 8-21
Figure 8-13 Keyboard Settings Dialog Box .............................................. 8- 2 3
Figure 8-14 Mouse Options Dialog Box .................................................. 8-24
Figure 8-15 Country Settings Dialog Box ................................................ 8-26
Figure 11-1 Workstation Keyboard .......................................................... 11-2
Figure 15-1 Workstation Keyboard .......................................................... 15-2
Figure 16-1 VT240 Set-Up Keys .............................................................. 16-4
Figure 18-1 Notepad Window ................................................................. 18-2
Figure 18-2 Formatting With the Return and the Tab Keys ...................... 18-3
Figure 18-3 Scrolling .............................................................................. 18-4
Figure 18-4 Selected Text ....................................................................... 18-6
Figure 18-5 Find Dialog Box ................................................................... 18-9
Figure 18-6 Open Dialog Box ............................................................... 18-12
Figure 18-7 Save As Dialog Box ............................................................ 18-14
Figure 19-1 Cardfile Window ................................................................. 19-2
Figure 19-2 Index Dialog Box ................................................................. 19-3
Figure 19-3 Formatting With the Return and Tab Keys ............................ 19-4
Figure 19-4 Scrolling Through a File ...................................................... 19-6
Figure 19-5 Go To Dialog Box ................................................................ 19-7
Figure 19-6 Selected Text.. ..................................................................... 19-9
Figure 19-7 Find Dialog Box ................................................................. 19-12
Figure 19-8 Open Dialog Box ............................................................... 19-16
Figure 19-9 Save As Dialog Box ............................................................ 19-18
Figure 19-10 Merge Dialog Box ............................................................ 19-20
Figure 19-11 Autodial Dialog Box ......................................................... 19-21
Figure 20-1 Calendar Window: Day View ................................................ 20-2

xxxi

IIIII Contents
IIIII

Figure 20-2 Day Settings Dialog Box ..................................................... 20-10
Figure 20-3 Open Dialog Box ............................................................... 20-14
Figure 20-4 Save As Dialog Box ............................................................ 20-16
Figure 20-5 Print Dialog Box .................. ; ............................................. 20-1 7
Figure 20-6 Remove Dialog Box ........................................................... 20-18
Figure 21-1 Calculator Window .............................................................. 21- 2
Figure 21- 2 Using Calculator With the Keyboard .................................... 21-3
Figure 22-1 Clock Window ..................................................................... 22-2
Figure 23-1 Reversi Window ................................................................... 23-2
Figure 24-1 MS-Paint Canvas ................................................................... 24-2
Figure 24-2 MS-Paint Window ................................................................. 24-3
Figure 26-1 Drawing With the Pencil ..................................................... 26-3
Figure 26-2 Drawing With the Brush ...................................................... 26-4
Figure 26-3 Using the Eraser ................................................................... 26-5
Figure 26-4 Save As Dialog Box .............................................................. 26-6
Figure 26-5 Patterns Palette .................................................................... 26-7
Figure 27-1 Box ...................................................................................... 27-2
Figure 27-2 Box with Text ...................................................................... 27-3
Figure 27-3 Filled Box ............................................................................ 27-4
Figure 27-4 Filling a Shape .................................................................... 27-5
Figure 27-5 Selection Rectangle ............................................................. 27-6
Figure 27-6 Results of the Flip Horizontal Command .............................. 27-8
Figure 27-7 Editing in Detail .................................................................. 27-9
Figure 27-8 Scrolling the Canvas .......................................................... 27-10
Figure 28-1 File Menu ............................................................................ 28-2
Figure 28-2 Edit Menu ............................................................................ 28-3
Figure 28-3 Style Menu ........................................................................... 28-6
Figure 28-4 Style Menu Typefaces ........................................................... 28-6
Figure 28-5 Example Align Commands ................................................... 28-7
Figure 28-6 Palette Menu ....................................................................... 28-8
Figure 28-7 Options Menu ...................................................................... 28-9
Figure 30-1 Command Line Format ......................................................... 30-1
Figure 30-2 Hierarchical Directory Structure .......................................... 30-4
Figure A-I Three Legend Key .................................................................... A-l
Figure G-! U. S./U. K. Keyboard .............................................................. G-7
Figure G- 2 Canadian/English Keyboard .................................................... G-7
Figure G-3 Danish Keyboard .................................................................... G-7
Figure G-4 Finnish Keyboard ................................................................... G-8
Figure G-5 French/Canadian Keyboard .................................................... G-8
Figure G-6 French Keyboard .................................................................... G-8
Figure G- 7 German/Austrian Keyboard ..................................................... G-9

xxxii

Contents

IIIII

Figure G-8 Hebrew Keyboard .................................................................. G-9
Figure G-9 Italian Keyboard ..................................................................... G-9
Figure G-I0 Norwegian Keyboard .......................................................... G-l 0
Figure G-ll Spanish Keyboard ............................................................... G-l 0
Figure G-12 Swedish Keyboard .............................................................. G-l 0
Figure G-13 Swiss/French Keyboard ...................................................... G-11
Figure G-14 Swiss/German Keyboard ..................................................... G-ll

Screens
Screen 1-1 Information System Application ............................................... 1-4
Screen 1-2 Dialog Box .............................................................................. 1-9
Screen 2-1 Displaying Two Windows ........................................................ 2-4
Screen 2-2 Displaying Three Windows ...................................................... 2-5
Screen 2-3 Moving the Clock Icon ............................................................ 2-7
Screen 2-4 Clock Window After a Move .................................................... 2-8
Screen 2-5 Defining the Larger Notepad Window .................................... 2-1 0
Screen 2-6 Larger Notepad Window ........................................................ 2-11
Screen 2-7 Window Filling the Entire Screen .......................................... 2-13
Screen 2-8 Shrinking a Window to an Icon ............................................. 2-15
Screen 3-1 MS-DOS Executive Window ..................................................... 3-2
Screen 4-1 Selecting Multiple Files ........................................................... 4-3
Screen 4-2 Print Spooler Window With Print Queue ................................. 4-9
Screen 8-1 Control Panel Window ............................................................ 8-2
Screen 12-1 VT220 Set-Up ...................................................................... 12-2
Screen 12-2 VT220 Actions ..................................................................... 12-6
Screen 12-3 VT220 Communications ...................................................... 12-9
Screen 12-4 VT220 Display ................................................................... 12-12
Screen 12-5 VT220 General .................................................................. 12-14
Screen 12 -6 VT220 Keyboard ............................................................... 12 -17
Screen 12-7 VT220 Printer ................................................................... 12-20
Screen 12-8 VT220 Tabs ....................................................................... 12-22
Screen 12-9 Manually Setting VT220 Tabs ............................................. 12-23
Screen 12-10 VT220 Telephone ............................................................ 12-25
Screen 16-1 VT240 Set-Up ..................................................................... 16-2
Screen 16-2 VT240 Actions ..................................................................... 16-7
Screen 16-3 VT240 Communications .................................................... 16-10
Screen 16-4 VT240 Display ................................................................... 16-14
Screen 16-5 VT240 General .................................................................. 16-19
Screen 16-6 VT240 Keyboard ............................................................... 16-22

xxxiii

IIIII rontents
Screen 16-7 VT240 Printer ................................................................... 16-26
Screen 16-8 VT240 Tabs ....................................................................... 16-28
Screen 16-9 Manually Setting VT240 Tabs ............................................. 16-30
Screen 16-10 Telephone Set-Up ............................................................ 16-31
Screen C-1 Program Information Editor Window ...................................... C-4

xxxiv

Preface
Volume 1

Welcome to the VAXmate User's Guide. This guide explains how to use the
following VAXmate system software:
• MS-Windows
• VT220 and VT240 terminal emulators
• Desktop applications
• MS-Paint
• MS-DOS operating system
This software and your VAXmate workstation create a powerful tool for you
to use to perform your everyday tasks quickly and efficiently.

Before Reading This Guide
You should read the VAXmate System Handbook that comes with your
VAXmate workstation before reading this guide. Besides describing some of
the terminology used in this guide, the VAXmate System Handbook also
tells you how to set up your VAXmate workstation and use:
• Your key diskette
• MS-Windows
• The mouse
• The Information System

xxxv

IIIII Preface Volume 1
IIIII

Conventions Used
Follow these conventions while using this guide:
• In examples of dialog between you and the VAXmate workstation, what
is displayed on the screen is shown in black type; what you type from
the keyboard is shown in color.
• Make sure you type all spaces and punctuation marks exactly as they are
printed.
• A key sequence such as AIt/Tab means to hold down the AIt key while
you press the Tab key.
• A key sequence such as AIt/Shift/Tab means while you hold down both
the AIt key and the Shift key, press the Tab key.
• Wherever you see the term workstation, it means your VAXmate
workstation.

The Information System
Your VAXmate system software includes an Information System. This information, found on-line, is similar to the information found in this guide. It
differs only in that it is organized for easy access and is presented in a different format.
The Information System is available to you as an icon when you are using
MS-Windows on your VAXmate workstation. This rneans you can use it as a
learning aid while you are becoming familiar with MS-Windows and the rest
of the VAXmate system software.
Both the VAXmate System Handbook and the MS-Windows part of this guide
explain how to start the Information System.

xxxvi

Preface Volume 1 11111

Guide Organization
The VAXmate User's Guide is divided into two volumes. The following sections describe the parts in each volume. Appendixes that refer to an individual part are found at the back of the appropriate volume.

Volume 1
MS-Windows
MS-Windows is your interface to the VAX mate workstation. It is the common
connection between you and your VAXmate system software. You can use
applications by dividing the VAXmate screen into areas called windows.
The chapters in this part describe what a window is, how to create and size
windows, and how to start, run, and close applications using a mouse or the
keyboard. They also explain how to run applications outside of a window.
Other chapters describe how to use menus and commands, files, disks, and
directories and how to use the Control Panel to change MS-Windows features.
Appendixes A, B, and C explain how to create alternate characters, how to
use the WIN.lNI file, and how to use Program Information Files for your
applications.

Terminal Emulators
Terminal emulators are DIGITAL applications that allow you to use your
VAXmate workstation as either a DIGITAL VT220 or VT240 video terminal.
The terminal emulators are started from MS-Windows. The VT240 terminal
emulator can also be started from the MS-DOS operating system. These applications are for users who are familiar with the VT220 and VT240 terminals
and want to use the DIGITAL applications designed for those terminals.
The chapters in this part include a description of the Set-Up utility and
explain some special Set-Up features. These features let you create and save
multiple Set-Up files to configure your VAXmate workstation or to use with
various applications. You can also send or receive characters to and from the
host.
Appendix D explains how to use the keyboard with the VT220 terminal
emulator.

xxxvii

IIIII Preface Volume 1
Desktop Applications

This part describes a collection of individual MS-Windows applications.
These applications are:
Notepad

Used to write memos

Cardfile

Used to sort information

Calendar

Used to keep track of appointments

Calculator

Used to perform arithmetic calculations

Clock

Used for keeping time

Reversi

A game you can play

MS-Paint

MS-Paint is an MS-Windows drawing application for users who want to learn
how to draw using the mouse.
Appendix E describes special key actions used to modify certain MS-Paint
operations. Appendix F explains how to use the keyboard with MS-Paint.

Volume 2
The second volume of the VAXmate User's Guide contains the following
parts.
MS-DOS

MS-DOS is the operating system used by your VAXmate workstation. The
information in this part is for the experienced MS-DOS user.
The first few chapters cover everything you need to know about the operating system, from creating files, directories, and paths to preparing the hard
disk; from using command formats to using internal and external commands.
The commands are also listed alphabetically.

xxxviii

Preface Volume 1

IIIII

In addition, a description is provided for the MS-DOS editing and function
keys, use of industry standard compose sequences, batch processing, and
DEBUG.
Other chapters in this part explain networking, the Network File Transfer
(NFT) commands, and the SETHOST command. The SETHOST command creates an emulator session using the DEC net network software under the
MS-DOS operating system.
Appendixes G, H, and I explain international features (including country
keyboard layouts), reading diskettes, and configuring your system.
Messages
The Messages section contains help on messages, other than informational
ones, that may be displayed on your screen while you use the VAXmate
system software described in this guide. The messages are listed
alphabetically.
AppendiX J describes additional options you can order for your VAXmate
workstation. AppendiX K contains the system specifications for your VAXmate
workstation.

xxxix

Chapter 1
Getting Started
With MS- Windows

MS-Windows lets you work visually by organizing your tasks in windows.
With MS-Windows, you can have more than one window on your screen, each
running a different application. Thus, you can simultaneously work on several tasks, such as writing a memo, updating a project status report, and
organizing data for a monthly report.
With MS-Windows, you switch from one application to another by clicking
the mouse button or pressing keys. Because you never have to stop running
an application, you can continue in any application where you left off.
With MS-Windows, you do not have to memorize formats or type many commands. Each application has all the necessary commands contained in a series
of menus; you select a command from a menu.
MS-Windows lets you transfer information between your MS-Windows applications. For example, you can copy information from a project status report to
a monthly report while running both in the work area of your screen.
This chapter describes how to:
• Start MS-Windows
• Work in MS-Windows
• Run an application
• Use the Information System
• Scroll a window
• Use menus and commands
• Use a dialog box
• Finish an application

1-1

IIIII GETTING STARTED WITH MS- Windows
Starting MS-Windows
Information on starting MS-Windows and other introductory MS-Windows
material, including definitions for terms such as icon, work area, and mouse,
is contained in your handbook. If you have not read the handbook, do so
before continuing.

Initial Window
The first window you see when you start MS-Windows depends upon how
MS-Windows is installed on your workstation. When MS-Windows is installed
on your workstation, you can:
• Run a specific application automatically in the work area each time you
start MS-Windows
• Load specific applications as icons
This is desirable if you consistently use several applications.
• Open the MS-DOS Executive window
If you run and load applications when MS-Windows is installed, the first
window you see is the application that is set up to run automatically. You
also see the icons for the applications in the icon area at the bottom of the
screen. For information about running and loading applications, see
Chapter 3.
If you do not run or load applications when MS-Windows is installed, the

first window you see is the MS-DOS Executive window. You can load applications into the icon area.

Working in MS-Windows
You work in MS-Windows by using the mouse or the keyboard to select and
perform commands. You will probably use the mouse most often because
you can enter most commands by pointing the mouse to the command and
clicking the left mouse button. In general, this guide describes how to enter
MS-Windows commands, using the mouse. For information on using the keyboard to enter commands, see Chapter 6.
If you unplug your mouse and plug it back in, the mouse will not work. To

get your mouse to work again, exit and restart MS-Windows.

1-2

Getting Started With MS- Windows

IIIII

Table 1-1 lists the terms and actions you need to know to use the mouse.
(These are introduced in the VAXmate System Handbook.)
Table 1-1

Mouse Techniques

Term

Action

Point to an object

Move the mouse until the tip of the pointer rests on
the desired object.

Click the left mouse button

Press and release the left mouse button.

Click on an object

Point to an object and click.

Double-click on an object

Point to an object and click twice in rapid succession.

Drag an object

Three-step action:
1. Point to an object.
2. Press and hold down the left mouse button, and
move the mouse to drag the object.
3. At the desired location, re1.ease the mouse button.

Select a command

Three-step action:
1. Point to a menu.
2. Press and hold down the left mouse button.
The menu commands are displayed in a dropdown menu. The menu is highlighted where the
mouse points.
3. Drag the highlight to the command you want and
release the mouse button.

Running an Application as an Icon
To work with an application, it must run in a window in the work area. If
the application does not display in your work area when you open
MS-Windows and you did not automatically load it as an icon, you should
load it as an icon.
An icon is a graphic representation of an application. To turn an icon into a

window in the work area, you expand it.
To expand an icon, drag the icon from the icon area to the center of the
work area.

1-3

IIIII (letttng :-,'tartea With MS- Winaows
IIIII

To expand an icon, you can also double-click on the icon in the icon area. If
the icon does not expand, try double-clicking the left mouse button faster,
keeping the mouse steady.
The newly selected application shares the work area with those windows and
is displayed immediately above the icon area. However, the new window
does not replace any windows already displayed in the work area.
Expanding an icon is not the only way to run an application. For information
on using the MS-DOS Executive window to run applications in windows, see
Chapter 3.

Using the Information System
The Information System provides you with information about MS-Windows
and your workstation. The Information System is represented by an icon in
the icon area that you expand. Screen 1-1 shows the Information System
application after it has been expanded.

I nfot·matlon System
Booklilark lOPY Help
Ma n Menu
Weicolile to the Infol·lIlation Systelil. New users should read the t'II,IRa!"e
Sys!"en Hdndbook and then select the first topic frolll the lIlenu below.

Find

GoBack

1>0"';· He f';

For He. Users:
I> Getting Started With Your UAXlilate ilol·kstation
General Topics:
L:> Desktop Applications
I> MS-Windows
I> Notes FI·OIll Yom· Systelll Adlilinistratol·
~> Standard Applications
~> UT220 Terlilinal Elilulator
~~
UT240 Terlilinal Elilulator
Aduanced Topics:
l1li Disks and Diskettes
~> MS-DOS Operating Systelll
I> MS-DOS Operating Systelll COllllllands
~>
UAXlilate Network
Trouble Shooting:
I> Systelll Messages

Screen 1-1

1-4

Information System Application

IIIII

Getting Started With MS- Windows

In the window of the Information System you see:
• The main menu of topics displayed in the work area
• A group of menu names displayed in the menu bar
To select a topic from the Information System's main menu, click on the
topic you want to select.
The highlight moves as you move the cursor up and down the menu; do not
press any mouse buttons.
Information about the topic you selected is displayed in the window. Some
topics, such as MS-Windows, display additional menus. In this case, select a
topic from these menus as you selected a topic in the main menu.
To get additional help on using the Information System, select the Help
menu.

Scrolling
Some applications have more information than fits in the window at one
time. By using the scroll bars, you can move and display all the information.
A window can have one or two scroll bars:
• One is on the right side of the application window.
• One is on the bottom of the application window.
Either or both of the scroll bars can be used by an application, depending on
where the additional information is:
• If a scroll bar is on the right side of the application window, you can

scroll up and down. For example, you can scroll this way when you run
a word processing application with a long text file.
• If a scroll bar is on the bottom of the application window, you can

scroll to the right or left. For example, you may scroll this way when
you run a spreadsheet application.

1-5

IIIII
II til Getting Started With MS- Windows
Table 1-2 shows the procedures for scrolling with the mouse.
Table 1-2 Scrolling With the Mouse
To scroll ...

Do this ...

One line

Click on the scroll arrows at either end of the scroll bar. Each
time you click the left mouse button, the window scrolls one
line in the direction you selected. If you hold down the left
mouse button, the window scrolls faster.

One window

Click on the shaded area on either side of the small white box
(the scroll box) in the scroll bar.

To a general location rapidly

Drag the scroll box to a position in the scroll bar corresponding
to the general location you want (beginning, middle, or end of
the file).

Using Menus and Commands
System Menu
The System menu contains commands for manipulating windows and is common to most applications. It is represented by a box with three lines inside,
located in the upper-left corner of the window.
The commands in the System menu are displayed in a drop-down menu.
Figure I-I shows the System menu commands.

Size
Moue

Icon
Zoom
Close

About ...
Figure 1-1

1-6

System Menu Commands

IIIII

Getting Started With MS· Windows

Table 1-3 describes the commands in the System menu.
Table 1-3

System Menu Commands

Command

Description

Size

Changes the size of a window when you have two or more
windows in the work area. With this command, you can
make the window larger or smaller.

Move

Moves a window to another position you select in the work
area, when you have two or more windows in the work
area.
This command also expands an icon into a window in the
work area. and shrinks a window to an icon in the icon
area.

Icon

Shrinks a window to an icon in the icon area.
This command also expands an icon into a window in the
work area.

Zoom

Enlarges a window to fill the entire screen. Selecting this
command a second time returns the window to its original
size and pOSition.

Closes the window of the application, stops running the
application, and removes the application from system
memory. However, the application remains in your
MS-Windows directory and on your disk.

About

Displays information about the application running in the
active (current) window. The About command is not a part
of all applications. Also, some applications may use other
commands, such as Help or Info, instead of the About
command.
NOTE

Some applications may show additional commands in the System
menu. See your application manuals for details on these
commands. For more information on additional commands for
these applications, see Chapter 7.

1-7

IIIII Getting Started With MS· Windows
IIIII

Application Menus
Each application also has its own set of menus and commands. These menus
are displayed in the menu bar at the top of the window below the application title bar. As with the System menu, each menu in the menu bar has a
drop-down menu for displaying the list of menu commands. (Sometimes, the
menu name is also the only command in the menu. In this case, there is no
drop-down menu.) Some applications do not have any menus in the menu
bar; they only have a System menu.
You select a menu to display the menu commands in a drop-down menu. To
execute an action, you must select a command from a menu. You can drag
the highlight up and down the menu as long as you hold down the left
mouse button.
When you release the left mouse button, the MS-Windows application executes the highlighted command. However, if you release the left mouse button before you drag the highlight into the menu, the drop-down menu is
removed from the display.
NOTE

Some commands in a menu are displayed in a lighter shade than
the other commands. You cannot select them because they are
disabled. For example, if you have only one window in the work
area, the Size command is disabled (displayed in a lighter shade),
because you cannot change the size of a window if it is the only
window in the work area. However, when you have more than one
window displayed in the work area, the Size command is not
disabled, and you can change the size of the windows.

Using a Dialog Box
When you select a command, MS-Windows often needs additional information
before it can execute the command. When MS-Windows needs additional
information, it displays a dialog box. Screen 1-2 shows a typical dialog box.
After you provide the needed information in the dialog box, MS-Windows
executes the command.

1-8

Getting Started With MS- Windows

11111

Open
Can
Cle
Cancel
Mow
Pla~~~~~~==~-.~________~
Sche u e uacatlon
Read "War and Peace"
C
C
Write Grandllla
Buy present for Martha
B
Talk to Fred
B
Take out garbage
B
Call piano tuner
C

Screen 1-2

Dialog Box

A dialog box is a rectangle, resembling a window, which overlays a portion
of the screen in which you select a command. If you display several windows
in the work area, the dialog box can overlay portions of more than one
window, depending on the size of the windows and the dialog box.
The dialog box contains areas where you either type the information
required by MS-Windows or select options to supply the needed information.
Often, a dialog box is displayed with some information already in it, showing
what you have selected on the screen or options you selected earlier. Also,
some options may be disabled.
After you enter information or select an option, you execute the action by
selecting a command button in the dialog box.

1-9

IIIII r;PTTlNr; STA RTED WITH MS- Windows
The following sections describe the components of a dialog box.
Text Box

A text box is where you type information needed to carry out a command.
Figure 1-2 shows a text box.

Fi 1e name: t.!ll:II!!!!!!!'~:t!:!'_ _ _ _ _ _ _--.J
Figure 1-2

Text Box

What you type is displayed to the left of the blinking vertical line, called the
insertion point. To position the insertion point in the text box, click where
you want the insertion point moved. As you type, the insertion point moves
to the right.
To correct typing mistakes, press the Word Char key. Each time you press it,
one character to the left of the insertion point is deleted.
The text box can:
• Be blank when the dialog box is displayed
• Contain text if you already selected something applicable for the
command
• Contain a default option
If information is already present in the text box, you can type new information. When you press the first key, any information already present is
removed. You can also press the Word Char key to delete information already
in the text box.
List Box

A list box lists the choices you can select for a command. Figure 1-3 shows a
list box.

1-10

GETTING STARTED WITH MS-Windows

11111

File nallle: Il!-!!!!!'!!:!"!!'_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _...I
C:\WIH\PCAPP

Figure 1-3

(

Open

)

(

Cancel

)

List Box

You can distinguish between files, drives, and directories listed in a dialog
box. For example, in the list box shown in Figure 1-3:
MYFILE

Is the name of the file, MYFILE.

[-A-]

Represents drive A. Brackets and hyphens surround the name
of a drive.

[ .. ]

Represents the parent directory (one level up).

[MYDIR]

Represents directory MYDIR. Brackets surround the name of a
directory.

To select an item in the list box, click on it.

Option Buttons
Option buttons let you select one option from a group. They are labeled to
describe their functions. Figure 1-4 shows the option buttons for controlling
the keyclick volume.

Keyclick uolume

a tio sound
aSoft
@ Intet'"mediate
aloud

Figure 1-4

Option Buttons

To select an option from a group, click on it.

1-11

IIIII Getting Startl'd With MS- 1f indows
7

Check Boxes

Check boxes represent options that you can turn ON or OFF. They are
labeled to describe the functions of the options. When an X is displayed in
the check box, the option is ON. Click on X again to turn the option OFF.
You can 1Select as many check boxes as needed. Figure 1-5 shows a check
box for a mouse option.

Mouse Options
~left/~ight ~ouse
Figure 1-5

buttons swapped

Check Box

To select a check box, click on it.
Command Buttons
Command buttons are large rectangular buttons (with rounded corners) that
are labeled to describe how thay affect the command you selected. Figure
1-6 shows sample command buttons.

C~ancel)

( Ok )
Figure 1-6

Command Buttons

To select a command button, click on it.

1-12

Getting Started With MS· Windows

11111

When you select a command button, MS-Windows executes the action immediately. Command buttons you see in MS-Windows include:
• Ok or Yes
The command is executed. Sometimes, the button that executes the
command is labeled to describe the selected command, such as Open or
Save.
• Cancel or No
The selected command is canceled.
• Reset
Anything you entered or changed in the dialog box is ignored. Settings
are reset to their values before the dialog box was displayed.
The default command button has bold borders. Usually, it is the Ok command button.

Finishing an Application
When you finish using an application and want to remove it from the work
area, you can do either of the following:
• Shrink the application to an icon in the icon area.
The application continues running.
• Close the application.
When you close an application, it:
- Stops running
Remains in the MS-Windows directory but does not take any space in
the work area

1-13

IIIII
IIIII Getting Started With MS· Windows
Shrinking an Application to an Icon
To shrink an application to an icon, you can:
• Double-click on the title bar of the application you want to shrink.
• Point to the title bar and drag the icon into the icon area.
• Select the Icon command from the System menu.
When you release the left mouse button, MS-Windows executes the Icon
command,and the application runs in the icon area as an icon. The
application runs in the icon area as an icon.

Closing an Application
To close an application, you can:
• Select the Close command from the System menu.
When you release the left mouse button, MS-Windows executes the
Close command, and the window for the application closes.
• Double-click on the System menu box of the application you want to
close.
NOTE

When you close an application in which you opened a data file
and made changes, a dialog box is usually displayed asking you to
either save the changes you entered or confirm that you want to
close the application.

1-14

Chapter 2
Running Multiple
Applications

This chapter describes how to:
• Run multiple applications
• Switch and move windows
• Change the size of a window
• Shrink an application to an icon
• Share information between two windows
• Receive messages from another application
When you use MS-Windows, you can run more than one application at the
same time, with each application in its own window. This chapter describes
how to work successfully with multiple applications.
The procedures described in the chapter tell you how to run two and three
windows at one time. As examples, this part uses three applications:
• Notepad
• Clock
• Information System
You can use any three applications or more, because the techniques are the
same for all applications. However, you must use at least three applications
to follow the examples.
With MS-Windows, you can also display more than one window for the same
application. For example, two windows can display the Notepad application,
with each window containing a text file. One Notepad window can contain
your monthly report, while another Notepad window can contain a memo.

2-1

IIIII Running Muitipie Appltcations
IIIII

Running Multiple Applications
You can run as many applications as you want with MS-Windows, depending
on your workstation's memory capacity.
When you have a small amount of memory, MS-Windows can excessively load
data from your disk. (Your workstation runs slower than usual.) If this
occurs, close any applications you do not need. This gives MS-Windows more
memory for your remaining applications.
If you try to run an application and no memory is available, MS-Windows

displays the message "Not enough memory to run." Use the Close command
to stop running any unwanted applications, and try to run the application
again.

Displaying Multiple Windows
You do not have to change the size of any window to make sure all windows
fit in the work area. As you add or subtract each new window, the existing
windows are automatically made smaller or larger to accommodate the number of windows in the work area. This process is called automatic tiling.
MS-Windows follows these general automatic tiling rules when you expand
an icon to a window:
• If there are no windows in the work area, the icon expands to a window

that fills the entire work area.
• If you place the icon within an existing window, the icon replaces the

existing window. The existing window shrinks to an icon in the icon
area.
• If you place the icon on the border between two existing windows, the

new window expands between the existing windows.
• If you place the icon on a vertical or horizontal border of the screen,
the new window expands between the border and any existing window.
For example, if you place the icon on the left vertical border of the
screen, the new window expands between the left vertical border of the
work area and any existing window.

2-2

IIIII

Running Multiple Applications

• When you expand an icon by double-clicking on it:
- If there are no windows in the work area, the icon expands to a

window that fills the entire work area.
- If there are other windows in the work area, the newly selected

application is displayed directly above the icon area and below the
existing windows.

Displaying Icon Names
Although icons are unique for each application, you can have more than one
icon for the same application, such as Notepad, each containing a different
text file. Because all Notepad icons look alike, you need to display the names
of the applications the icons represent to identify which file you want.
To display an icon name:
1. Point to the icon.
2. Press and hold down the Shift key.
The icon name is displayed above the icon. Figure 2-1 shows an icon
with the icon name.

Figure 2-1

Displaying the Icon Name

For the Notepad icon, the icon name is displayed with the name of its text
file. The icon name displayed above the icon is the same as the icon name
displayed in the title bar when the application runs in a window. The icon
name remains as long as you hold down the Shift key and point to the icon.
To display the name of another application, continue to hold down the Shift
key.

2-3

11111

IIIII Running Multiple Applications

Running Two Applications
Open the Information System window and display Notepad as an icon.
To expand the Notepad icon and display it as a second window, drag the
Notepad icon to the left border in the work area.
When you hold down the left mouse button, you can drag the icon anywhere
on the screen. When you release the left mouse button in the work area, the
icon expands to a window.
The Notepad window is now in the left half of the work area, and the Information System window is in the right half. Screen 2-1 shows both windows.

Information System
nei '. Bookmark

•

Main Menu
Welcome to the Information System. New
Sys~eR Handbook and then select the fil

For He. Users:
[>

Getting Started Ihth YoU!' UANmate

General Topics:
[>.

I>
C.>
[>

C::>
C>

Desktop Applications
t"S-lhndows
Notes FI'om YOUI' System Administl'at
Standal'd Applications
UT220 Tel'minal EmulatOi'
UT240 Terminal EmulatOl"

Advanced Topics:
[>[>
[>

~isks

and ~iskettes
I1S-00S Opel"ating Systelll
I1S-00S Operating Systelll Commands
UAXmate Netwol'k

Trouble Shooting:

Screen 2-1

2-4

Displaying Two Windows

IIIII

Running Multiple Applications

Running Three Applications
To expand the Clock icon and display it as a third window, drag the Clock
icon to the right border of the Information System window.
The Clock icon changes to a blank rectangle when you drag it.
The Clock window is displayed in the right quarter of the work area. Screen
2-2 shows the Notepad, Information System, and Clock windows.

%:jlfu% ~,®~Hotepad - (unhtled) !¥.~f '". :..

Ilnforlllatlon 81/5'.

•

ff------ •
•

•

Screen 2-2

•

Displaying Three Windows

2-5

IIIII
IIIII

RtmTliTl/!, Iviuitipie Applications

Switching Windows
Although you can run several windows simultaneously in the work area, you
can only work in one window at a time. The window in which you work is
called the active window. Only the active window is affected by commands
and any other information you enter with the mouse or the keyboard.
To make another window the active window, you switch to it. Each time you
switch, you leave a window and the application running in it, and resume
another where you left off.
To switch to another window, click inside the window to which you want to
switch.
The window you selected becomes the active window. Its title bar is highlighted. You can now work in this window.

Moving Windows
You can rearrange your windows in the work area. For example, you can
move the the Clock window below the Notepad window to make the Information System window wider and easier to use.
To move the Clock window:
1. Point to the middle of the Clock window title bar.
When you click on the title bar, the cursor changes to the Clock icon (a
blank rectangle).

2-6

Running Multiple Applications

IIIII

2. Drag the icon down and to the left until the icon is on the lower border
between the Notepad window and the icon area. Screen 2-3 shows moving the Clock icon.

•

•
•

Screen 2-3

•

Moving the Clock Icon

2-7

IIIII
IIIII Running Multiple Applications
3. Release the left mouse button.
The Clock window is below the Notepad window. Screen 2-4 shows the
new location of the Clock window.

I nfo,'matlon System
c,o,,,,,, Rei'!:; Bookmark

•

Main Men.u
Welcome to the Information System, New
.fyst:elll Handbook and then select the fi'

For He. Users:
[>

Getting Sta,'ted With YoU!' UAXmate

General Topics:

•

•
•

•

Screen 2-4

2-8

~>
~>
~>

•

Desktop Applications
MS-flindows
Notes From You,' System Administ,'at
~>
Standard Applications
[>. UT220 Tet'filinal El1lulator
I>· UT240 Tet'filinal El1lulator
Aduanced Topics:
[> Disks and Diskettes
1111 MS-DOS Operating ~stem
[> MS-DOS Ope,'ating Sjh;tem Commands
~>
UAXmate Netwo,'k

Trouble Shooting:

Clock Window After a Move

Running Multiple Applications

IIIII

Changing the Size of a Window
When you have more than one window in the work area, you can change
some of the windows' sizes to better use the work area. Using the System
menu commands and other components of a window, you can make a
window:
• Larger
• Smaller
• Fill the entire screen (zoom)

Making a Window Larger
To make a window larger, use:
• The Size command from the System menu
• The Size box in the title bar

Using the Size Command
To make the Notepad window larger by using the Size command:
1. Select the Size command from the System menu of the Notepad
window.
The cursor changes to a small box, called the size box.
2. Move the size box beyond the Notepad window borders until the window is the size you want. You do not need to hold down the left mouse
button to move the size box.
Nothing happens until the size box moves beyond the borders of the
window. After you cross the borders, a pair of lines, one vertical and
one horizontal, show the new size of the window.

2-9

IIIII Running Multiple Applications
IIIII

Screen 2-5 shows the new size for the Notepad window.

(
Welcome t

the Infoo·mation System.

He"

Sys<en Handbook and then select the fio

For He. Users:

Gett:~ng

Started Iii th Your UAXmate

General Topics:

t>
t>,

•
•
•

[>.

•

I .
•
'

•

Desktop ApplIcations
11S-ll:i.ndo"s
Hotes From Your System Administo·at
Stanolard Applications
UT22fJ Terminal Emulator
UT24fJ Teo·minal Emulatoo·

Aduanced1Topics:

[>Ois~ and Diskettes
[>. 11S-Dl)'"S Operating System
[> ~lS-DOS Opeo·ating System Commands
[>, UAXmdte Het"oo·k

Trouble Shooting:

Screen 2-5

2-10

Defining the Larger Notepad Window

Running Multiple Applications 11111

3. When the window is the size you want, click the left mouse button.
MS-Windows widens the Notepad window and adjusts the size of any
adjacent windows. Screen 2-6 shows the larger Notepad window.

Notepad - (untitled)
earch

•

~ysrePl

Sys
Handbook and then sele!

For He. Users:
[>

Getting Sta,·ted With Your

General Topics:
[:.>

Desktop Applications

I> MS-Ihndows
[>
[>
~>

Notes From Your System Ad
Standard Applications
UT220 Terminal Emulator
UT240 Terminal Emulato,'

~1I1I1I1I1I1I~iI~~III1I1i1111111111i1[J uanced Topics:
t~

1---

Disks and Diskettes
MS-DOS Ope"ating System
1'1S·-OOS Operating System C
UAXIIlate Het~lol'k

Trouble Shooting:

Screen 2-6

Larger Notepad Window

Using the Size Box
Some windows have a size box in their upper- or lower-right corner.
To make a window larger using the size box:
1. Point to the size box of the window you want to change.
2. Drag the size box beyond the window borders.
3. When the window is the size you want, release the left mouse button.
MS-Windows makes the window larger and adjusts the size of the other
windows in the work area.

2-11

IIIII

IIIII Running Multiple Applications
Making a Window Smaller
To make a window smaller, use:
• The Size command from the System menu
• The Size box in the title bar
Using the Size Command
To make a window smaller by using the Size command:
1. Select the Size command from the System menu in the window you
want to make smaller.
The cursor changes to the size box.
2. Move the size box beyond the window borders and back within the
borders.
A pair of lines, one vertical and one horizontal, shows where the borders of the new window are located.
3. When the window is the size you want, click the left mouse button.
MS-Windows makes the window smaller and adjusts the size of the other
windows in the work area.
Using the Size Box
To make a window smaller using the size box:
1. Point to the size box of the window you want to change.
2. Drag the size box beyond the window borders and back within the
borders.
3. When the window is the size you want, release the left mouse button.
MS-Windows makes the window smaller and adjusts the size of the other
windows in the work area.

2-12

Running Multiple Applications 11111

Filling the Screen With a Window
When you are working with more than one window, you can enlarge one
window temporarily to fill the entire screen, without moving the other windows to the icon area. This process is called zooming.
To fill the screen with a window, use:
• The Zoom command from the System menu
• The size box
Using the Zoom Command

To zoom the Information System window, select the Zoom command from
the System menu of the Information System window. The window enlarges to
fill the entire screen, including the icon area. Screen 2-7 shows an Information System window that has been zoomed.

Find

GoBack

i" G',', ~,""

Infot'lllat10n Systelll
Bookllla"k Copy Help

Main Menu
Welcollle to the Info"lllation Systelll, Hew users should "ead the (11l,I'nJte
Syst:ePl Handbook and then select the fi,'st topic frolll the Illenu below,

For Hew Users:
[>

Getting Sta,'ted l-lith Your UAXlllate Workstation

Gel{,-,.ral Topics:
[> \\ Desktop Applications
MS-Windows
Hotes F,'olll YoU!' Systelll Adlllinist,'ato,'
Standa"d Applications
[> UT220 Terlllinal Elllulator
[> UT240 Te"lllinal Elllulator

I>
I>
I>

Advanced Topics:
[>
\:-..>
~>

Disks and Diskettes
MS-DOS Operating Systelll
MS-DOS Operating Systelll COllllllands
UAXlllate Network

Trouble Shooting:

l> Systelll t1essages

Screen 2-7

Window Filling the Entire Screen

To restore the window to its former size, select the Zoom command again.

2-13

!!! !! Running Multtple Applications
Using the Size Box
To use the size box to zoom, double-click on the size box.
The window enlarges to fill the entire screen, including the icon area.
To restore the window to its former size, double-click on the size box again.

Shrinking a Window to an Icon
You can free space in the work area by shrinking a window into an icon. For
example, you can shrink the Information System to an icon if you are finished using it but want it available for later use. It still runs in memory but
does not take up space in the work area.
To shrink a window to an icon, use:
• The Icon command
• The title bar
Using the Icon Command
To shrink the Information System window into an icon using the Icon command, select the Icon command from the System menu of the Information
System window.
The Information System shrinks to an icon, and the other windows adjust to
fill the work area. Screen 2-8 shows an example of shrinking a window to an
icon.

2-14

Running Multiple Applications

IIIII

Hotepad - (unt1tled)
File

Edit

Sea~ch

•
•

•

Screen 2-8

•

Lr
,I

•
•
•

•

Shrinking a Window to an Icon

Using the Title Bar
To shrink the Information System window to an icon using the title bar, you
can:
1. Point to the middle of the Information System title bar.
Press the left mouse button. The cursor changes to the application icon.
Drag the Information System icon to the icon area and release the left
mouse button.
2. Double-click on the middle of the title bar of the window you want to
shrink.

2-15

11111

IIIII Running Multiple Applications

Transferring Information Between Windows
You can transfer information within a window or between windows. You can
move or copy information:
• From one place in a window to another
For example, you can move text in a report as you edit.
• From one window to another window when both windows are running
the same application
For example, you can transfer information from one report being prepared by a word processing application into another report being prepared by the same word processing application.
• From one window to another window when the windows are running
different applications
For example, you can transfer numbers from a spreadsheet application
into a report being prepared with a word processing application.
To move information, you can:
• Retype information in a window
• Cut or copy information from one area, then paste it into another area

Cutting and Pasting
To transfer larger quantities of information, use the cut (or copy) and paste
features of MS-Windows.
To cut and paste information, MS-Windows uses the Clipboard to hold information. The Clipboard is a temporary storage area that holds the information
while you move it from its original location to its destination. The Clipboard
is always available when you run MS-Windows. You do not need to run any
program to use the Clipboard.
Each time you cut or copy information to the Clipboard, anything already
stored there is overwritten (the previously stored information is deleted.)

2-16

Running Multiple Applications

IIIII

To transfer information to the Clipboard, use the Cut command or the Copy
command procedure of your application. To insert information from the
Clipboard to your application, use your application's Paste command procedure. Although your application may have different names for these commands, the commands should work as described in Table 2-1.
Table 2-1

Cut, Copy, and Paste Commands

Command

Description

Cut

Deletes the selected information from the window and places it on
the Clipboard.

Copy

Copies the selected information and places it on the Clipboard. The
selected information remains intact in its original location.

Paste

Inserts information from the Clipboard into a selected location in a
window. You can paste the same information from the Clipboard as
many times as you want as long as it occurs in one operation. When
you put new information into the Clipboard, the previous information is deleted.
If you move the cursor in the window, the information is inserted
and displayed to the left of the cursor.
If you have marked text for selection in the receiving document,
the information from the Clipboard replaces the selected text. For
more information on marking text, see Chapter 7.

Generally, ASCII text and data are stored on the Clipboard, but formatting
commands for your text or data are not. However, this may vary with your
application.
Some standard applications (applications that run on your workstation) have
commands similar to Cut, Copy, and Paste, although they do not necessarily
use the MS-Windows Clipboard to transfer information.

2-17

11111
IIIII

Running Muiripie Appitcattons

Receiving Messages From Another Application
When another application sends you status or error information, you hear a
beep, and the application sending you the message flashes its title bar or
icon. To display the message in a dialog box, switch to the flashing window
or icon by clicking on it.
Figure 2-2 shows an example of a message an application sends you. In this
example, the Calendar application reminds you of an appointment.

Please re~e~ber ...
eetlng

(

)
••••••••••••••••••••••••

Figure 2-2

2-18

Message From Another Application

Chapter 3
Using the MS-DOS
Executive Window

This chapter describes the MS-DOS Executive window and its components
and tells you how to:
• Use menus and commands
• Load an application
• Run an application
• Run MS-DOS commands and programs
• Finish your MS-DOS Windows session
Chapter 4 discusses using the MS-DOS Executive window to work with files.
Using the MS-DOS Executive window to work with directories and disks is
discussed in Chapter 5.

Defining the MS-DOS Executive Application
You use the MS-DOS Executive application, an MS-Windows application, to
control or manage your MS-Windows session. The MS-DOS Executive application runs when MS-Windows runs, either as a window or as an icon. (Chapter
7 describes an exception to this rule, associated with running certain kinds
of applications.)
With the MS-DOS Executive application, you can perform most of the functions that you do by entering MS-DOS commands.
If your key diskette is set up so that an application runs automatically in a
window, the MS-DOS Executive application is an icon, resembling a diskette,
in the icon area. To use this application, expand its icon into the work area.

3-1

IIIII
IIIII

Using the MS· DOS Executive Window

If an application is not set up to run automatically, the first window you see
is the MS·DOS Executive window. You use this window to run any application not already loaded as an icon and to load any application into the icon
area.

MS-DOS Executive Window Components
Screen 3-1 identifies the components of the MS-DOS Executive window.
Table 3-1 describes these components.
System menu \box
Menu bar
Drive icons -AI
I ci
Highlight +-t;]UM':'
CALC .EXE
CALENDAR .EXE
CARDFILE .EXE
CllPBRD .EXE
Directory
listing

Cu rsor

Title bar

Path name

I D

~~~~:ot:~XE

DOTHIS. TXT
HSDOS .EXE
NOTEPAD .EXE
PAINT .EXE
REUERS I •EXE
SPOOLER .EXE
UT220.EXE

Work
area

Icons

Screen 3-1

3-2

Size box

MS-DOS Executive Window

IIIII

Using the MS-DOS Executive Window

Table 3-1

MS-DOS Executive Window Components

Component

Description

System menu box

Contains the commands, such as Move, Zoom, and Close,
you use to manipulate the window. This menu is common
to most MS-Windows applications.

Menu bar

Contains the three menus of the MS-DOS Executive
application: File, View, and Special.

Title bar

Displays the name of the MS-DOS Executive application.

Size box

Changes the size of a window.

Cursor

Is the mouse cursor you use to point to an object.

Work area

Is the expanded window.

Scroll bar

Displays in the window when there is more information
than can be displayed in one screen.

Drive icons

Represent the disk drives of your workstation. The current
drive is highlighted.

Highlight

Shows the file name or menu command that is currently
selected.

Path

A hierarchy of directories. Consists of the drive letter, the
volume name (if there is one), the directory and
subdirectory names, then the current directory name. Each
directory is separated by a backslash (\).

Current directory

The directory you are in now. In the path name, the
current directory is the one at the right.

Directory listing

Lists the file names in the current directory. A directory is
a group of files stored on a disk.

3-3

IIIII

IIIII Using the MS-DOS Executive Window

Using Menus and Commands
The MS-DOS Executive has four menus from which you can display and
select commands:
• System menu
• File menu
• View menu
• Special menu
The System menu is represented by the System menu box. The other three
menus are in the Menu bar. When you select a menu, a drop-down menu is
displayed, containing the menu's commands.

System Menu
The System menu contains commands for manipulating the windows and is
common to most applications. Figure 3-1 shows the System menu commands.

I Size

· Moue
Icon

ZOOIll

Close
About ...
Figure 3-1

System Menu Commands

When you select the About command in the MS-DOS Executive window,
MS-Windows displays a dialog box, showing the amount of disk space and
memory space available on your workstation.

3-4

Using the MS-DOS Executive Window

IIIII

File Menu
The File menu contains commands that let you act on the files displayed in
the MS-DOS Executive window. When you select any of these commands,
except for the Get Info command, MS-Windows displays a dialog box in the
window. In the dialog box, you enter additional information needed by the
command before MS-Windows executes the command.
Figure 3-2 shows the File Menu. Table 3-2 describes the File menu commands. For more information on using the File menu commands, see
Chapter 4.

Uiew
Run .••
Load .. .
Copy . . .

Get Info
Delete .. .
Print .. .
Rename .••
Figure 3-2

File Menu Commands

3-5

IIIII
IIIII Using the MS-DOS Executive Window
Table 3-2

File Menu Commands

Command

Description

Run

Runs the application in the window. Select the Run
command to run an application not in the current
directory listing and to enter a program parameter for the
selected application.
Using the Run command is the preferred method of
running an application.

Load

Loads the application as an icon in the icon area. Select the
Load command to load an application not in the current
directory listing and to enter a program parameter for the
application.

Copy

Copies the files to a different directory or disk, or to a
different file name in the same directory.

Get Info

Displays the file names, file extensions, size in bytes, and
the date and time the file was created or most recently
changed for the selected files.

Delete

Deletes the selected files from the directory and the disk.

Prints the selected files or directory listing on your printer.

Rename

Changes the name of the selected files.

3-6

Using the MS-DOS Executive Window

IIIII

View Menu
The View menu contains commands that let you list the directory files. The
commands are divided into three groups. Only one command from each
group can be active at a time. The active command in each group is preceded by a check mark.
By selecting the commands you want, you can list the directory files in the
way you want. The commands you select from the View menu affect any
directory you display in the MS-DOS Executive window.
Figure 3-3 shows the View menu. Table 3-3 describes the View menu commands, according to each group .
• I~

Special

.J Short

long

Group 1

..JAIl

Partial ...
Programs

Group 2

..JOy Name

By Date
By Size

Group 3

By Kind
Figure 3-3

View Menu Commands

3-7

IIIII
IIIII

TT'

.,~ -~~

•..

uSIng IOf! iVl~-UU~ l:'.xecutlve

Table 3-3

Win ow

View Menu Commands

Command

Description

Group 1:

Lets you select how much information is displayed for each
file.

Short
(default
setting)

Displays a directory listing by file name only.

Long

Displays a directory listing by file name, file extension, size in
bytes, and date and time last changed for each file listed. The
key information by which the files are sorted (name, date, size,
or type) is displayed in boldface.

Directory names are displayed in bold letters.

Directory names are listed in one column, with <DIR> to the
right of each directory name.

Group 2:

Lets you select which files are listed.

All
(default
setting)

Lists all the files in a directory.

Partial

Lists all files with the specified file specification.
For example, if you type' .TXT in the displaying dialog box,
only files having the file extension .TXT are displayed.

Programs

Group 3:

3-8

Lists all files that can run as programs, such as files having the
file extension .EXE, .BAT, and .COM.

Lets you select the key information by which the files are
sorted and displayed. If you select the Long command from
Group 1, the key information is displayed in boldface.

By Name
(default
setting)

Sorts a directory alphabetically by file name.

By Date

Sorts a directory by the date and time each file was created or
most recently changed. MS-Windows lists the most recent date
and time first.

By Size

Sorts a directory according to the size of each file in bytes.
MS-Windows lists the files from largest to smallest.

By Kind

Sorts a directory alphabetically by file extension. MS-Windows
sorts files with the same file extension alphabetically by name.

Using the MS-DOS Executive Window

11111

Special Menu
The Special menu contains commands that let you:
• Finish the MS-Windows session
• Work with disks
• Work with directories
Figure 3-4 shows the Special menu. Table 3-4 describes the Special menu
commands. For more information about the commands that let you work with
disks and directories, see Chapter 5.

Special

End Session
Create Directory .. .
Change Directory .. .
For~at Data Disk .. .
Make Syste~ Disk .. .
Set Uolu~e Na~e .. .
Figure 3-4

Table 3-4

Special Menu

Special Menu Commands

Command

Description

End Session

Finishes your MS-Windows session.

Create Directory

Creates a new directory.

Change Directory

Changes directories.

Format Data Disk

Formats a data diskette.

Make System Disk

Creates a diskette containing the MS-DOS operating system
files.

Set Volume Name

Assigns the name you enter to a disk (also called a volume).
This command can also change the name of an existing
volume.

3-9

11111

IIIII Using the MS· DOS Executive Window

Loading an Application
Use the MS·DOS Executive window to load an application as an icon in the
icon area.
To load an application into the icon area, use:
• The Load command from the File menu
• The file name

Using the Load Command
Use the Load command from the File menu to:
• Load an application into memory
• Run the application as an icon
• Display the application icon in the icon area
From your default directory, you can use the Load command to load any
application, which is in your path. The default directory becomes the current
directory for the application you are running.
The Load command is also useful for entering a program parameter or a
command line argument when you start the program. For example, when
loading Notepad, you can specify a text file to edit.
To load an application:
1. Select the Load command from the File menu.

The MS·DOS Executive window displays the Load dialog box. Figure 3·5
shows the Load dialog box.

load:

I____________

11o.:..1_ _

(

)

Figure 3-5

3·10

[Cancel)
Load Dialog Box

--J

Using the MS-DOS Executive Window 11111

2. In the dialog box, type the file name of the application you want to
run.
If the application is not in the path, include the drive and directory of

the application you want to run.
Also type any additional information that the application needs, such as
a command line argument.
3. Click on the Ok command button.
The application you selected loads into memory. If the application has
an icon, it runs in the icon area, and its icon is displayed. Otherwise, it
may display as a pop-up window.
If you have an application in the current directory, you can highlight the file

name of the application before you select the Load command from the File
menu. This name is displayed in the dialog box, and you can add any program parameters necessary for your application.

Using the File Name
To load an application from the current directory into the icon area:
1. Press and hold down the Shift key.
2. Double-click on the file name of the application you want to load as an
icon.
The application you selected from the current directory loads into memory. It runs in the icon area, and its icon is displayed.

Running an Application
To run an application in a window, using the MS-DOS Executive window,
you can use:
• The Run command from the File menu
• The file name

3-11

"IIIII Using the MS-DOS Executive Window
Using the Run Command
The Run command gives you more capabilities for running an application
than when you run a program using other methods. From your default directory. you can use the Run command to run any application, which is in your
path. The default directory becomes the current directory for the application
you are running.
The Run command is also useful for entering a program parameter and command line arguments when you start the program. For example, when running Notepad, you can include the name of a text file you want to edit.
To run an application:
1. Select the Run command from the File menu.
The MS-DOS Executive window displays the Run dialog box. Figure 3-6
shows the Run dialog box.

Run: ~II______I______________________~

(

)

Figure 3-6

(Cancel)
Run Dialog Box

2. In the dialog box, type the file name of the application you want to
run.
If the application is not in the path, include the drive and the directory

of the application you want to run.
Also type any additional information that the application needs, such as
a command line argument.
3. Click on the Ok command button.
The application you selected replaces the MS-DOS Executive application
in the window. The MS-DOS Executive application changes to an icon.
If you have an application in the current directory, you can highlight the file

name of the application before you select the Run command from the File
menu. This name is displayed automatically in the dialog box, and you can
add any program parameters necessary for your application.

3-12

Using the MS-DUS Executive Window

IIIII

Using the File Name
To run an application in your default directory, double-click on the file
name of the application you want to run.
The file name is highlighted.
The cursor temporarily changes to an hourglass, indicating that MS-Windows
is loading the application into memory.
The application you selected replaces the MS-DOS Executive application in
the window. The MS-DOS Executive application changes to an icon.

Using Temporary Files
Some applications that run with MS-Windows create temporary files with the
file extension .TMP to store your work.
The file names for temporary files begin with a tilde character and letters
indicating the application name. For example, a temporary file for MS-Paint
has the file name -MSP*.TMP.
You can create a special directory on your local hard disk drive to hold
temporary files. To send temporary files to a directory, put the SET TEMP
command in your AUTOEXEC.BAT file.
Do not delete these files while MS-Windows is running, because an application may be using them_ You can delete them after quitting your
MS-Windows session.

Running Batch Files
You run batch files only from the MS-DOS Executive window. If you run a
standard application from a batch file, you should create a PIF for the batch
file. For more information about PIFs, see Appendix C.
Set options in the batch file's PIF to be the same as the application's PIF.
However, set the Memory Required and Memory Desired options for the
batch file's PIF to 32K, regardless of the memory requirements for the
application.

3-13

11111

Using the MS-DOS Fypr1Jti!!t? Window

Using MS-DOS Commands and Programs
MS-DOS commands are divided into three groups:
• Commands you cannot use from MS-Windows
• Commands you run from MS-Windows with COMMAND.COM
• Commands you run from the MS-DOS Executive window
Those commands that you cannot run from MS-Windows, you can run from
the MS-DOS operating system prompt. Or, you can put these commands in
your AUTOEXEC.BAT file, which runs automatically before MS-Windows
starts. For more information on MS-DOS commands and programs, see Volume
2 of this guide.
The MS-DOS commands you should not run from MS-Windows are:
APPEND
ASSIGN
CHKDSK
CITY
FONT

GRAFTABL
GRAPHICS
JOIN
KEYB
LCOUNTRY

MODE
NET START
PRINT
RECOVER
SELECT'

The MS-DOS commands you can run in MS-Windows from the Command window are:
BREAK
CHDIR'
CLS
COPY'
DATE'
DEL'
DIR'

ECHO
ERASE'
EXIT
FOR
GOTO
IF
MKDIR'

MORE
PATH
PAUSE
PROMPT
REM
REN'
RMDIR'

SET
SHIFT
TIME'
TYPE
VER'
VERIFY
VOL'

The MS-DOS commands you can run from the MS-DOS Executive window are:
ATTRIB
BACKUP
COMMAND
DEBUG
DISKCOPY

EDLIN
EXE2BIN
FC
FDISK
FIND

FORMAT'
LABEL
LINK
NET
PERMIT

• These commands have an MS-Windows equivalent.

3-14

RESTORE
SORT
SUBST
SYS'

Using the MS-DOS Executive Window

IIIII

Running an MS-DOS Operating System Program
To run an MS-DOS command in MS-Windows with COMMAND.COM:
1. Select the RUN command from the File menu in the MS-DOS Executive
window.
2. In the dialog box, type:

COMMAND
3. Click on the Ok command button.

The MS-DOS command processor starts in a window titled "Command."

4. Type the MS-DOS command and command arguments you want at the
MS-DOS prompt.
5. To stop using COMMAND.COM, type:

EXIT
The window title is now enclosed in parentheses.

6. Close the window.
To run an MS-DOS command from the MS-DOS Executive window:
1. Select the RUN command from the File menu.
2. Type the command name and its arguments in the dialog box.

3. Close the window.
If the application does not stop automatically, type the Exit command

and then close the window.

Finishing an MS-Windows Session
To finish an MS-Windows session:
1. Save all files you have worked on.

2. Exit from any standard application still running in a window or as an

icon.

3-15

IIIII Using the MS-DOS Executive Window
3. From the MS-DOS Executive window, end your MS-Windows session
by using one of the following methods:
• Double-click on the System menu box.
• Select the Close command from the System menu.
• Select the End Session command from the Special menu.
With any method, a dialog box is displayed, indicating that this action
ends your MS-Windows session.
4. Click on the Ok command button.
MS-Windows closes, and the MS-DOS operating system prompt is displayed on the screen.
NOTE

You can now enter MS-DOS commands. To restart MS-Windows
from the MS-DOS operating system prompt, type:
WIN
Press the Return key. The DIGITAL logo is displayed, followed by
MS-Windows.
5. Turn off your workstation.
6. Remove your key diskette if you do not want anyone else to access your
files.
If you try to close MS-Windows while an MS-Windows application such as
Notepad is still running, MS-Windows displays a dialog box and lets you save
the updated data file.
If you try to close MS-Windows while a standard application is still running,

MS-Windows displays a dialog box indicating an application is still running.
The name of the active application is displayed in the title bar of the dialog
box. Close the identified application, then close MS-Windows again.

3-16

Chapter 4
Working With Files

This chapter describes how to use the MS-DOS Executive window to:
• Use files
• Select files
• Copy files
• Delete files
• Print files
• Rename files
• Get information about files
This chapter describes how to work with the file names listed in the MS-DOS
Executive window.

Using Files
Your workstation stores information on a disk in files. Each file has a name,
usually assigned by you. A file can contain a document, an application, a
program you have written, or coded information for use by an application.
Files in MS-Windows use MS-DOS file-naming conventions. For more information, see Chapter 30.

4-1

IIIII Working With Files
IIIII

Selecting Files
When you work with MS-Windows, you must select the file that the next
command or action affects. The selected file is highlighted.
With MS-Windows you can select:
• One file
• Multiple files

Selecting a File
To select a file, click on the file name you want.
To cancel the selected file:
1. Press and hold down the Shift key.
2. Click on the highlighted file name.
The highlight is removed from the file name.

Selecting Multiple Files
To select multiple files:
1. Click on the first file name you want to select.
2. Hold down the Shift key.
3. Click on each additional file name you want to select.
If you select a file name by mistake, you can cancel the selection by
clicking on it again while still holding down the Shift key.

4-2

Working With Files

IIIII

4. After you select all the files you want, release the Shift key.
If you release the Shift key and click on a file name, the file name you
selected is highlighted, and all the highlighted files are no longer
selected.

Screen 4-1 shows a group of selected files.

MS-DOS ExecutIve
File

•

Uiew Special

CALC .EXE
CALENDAR .EXE
CARDFILLEXE
CLIP8RD.EXE
CLOCK.EXE
CONTROL.EXE

!lI11I11""t:t~

MSDOS .EXE '.
NOTEPAD.EXE
PAINT.EXE
REUERSI.EXE
SPOOLER.EXE
UT220.EXE

Screen 4-1

Selecting Multiple Files

4·3

11111

Working With Files

11111

Using the File Menu Commands
The File menu of the MS·DOS Executive window contains commands that
affect a file. The Run and Load commands are described in Chapter 3. Figure
4·1 shows the Fiie menu commands.

Run •..
Load ...
Copy •••

Get Info
Delete ...
PI":i nt •••
Figure 4·1

File Menu Commands

Copying Files
To copy an existing file, use the Copy command. You can use this command
to copy:
• An existing file into another directory

• A file with a new name
You can copy both single and multiple files.

4·4

Working With Files

IIIII

Copying One File
To copy one file:
1. Click on the file name you want to copy.
The file name is highlighted.
2. Select the Copy command from the File menu.
MS-Windows displays the Copy dialog box. Figure 4-2 shows the Copy
Command dialog box.

Copy: IDOTHIS. TXT

To: ~II____________________________~

(

Figure 4-2

)

(Cancel)

Copy Command Dialog Box

The file name you selected is in the Copy text box, indicating that the
file is the source file you want to copy from.
3. In the To text box, type the new file name, including the new drive and
directory if applicable.
4. Click on the Ok command button.
A message is displayed at the bottom of the Copy dialog box, indicating
that the file you selected is being copied.
MS-Windows takes a few seconds to create the new file with the
specified name. Mter MS-Windows creates the new file, the dialog box
is removed from the window.
The MS-DOS Executive window then displays a new list of file names,
including the new file you created.

4-5

IIIII Working With Files
11111

Copying More Than One File
To copy several files at the same time to another directory or drive:
1. Select all the file names you want to copy.
2. Select the Copy command from the File menu.
MS-Windows displays the Copy dialog box, containing all the selected
file names.
If the file name is not listed in the dialog box, type the correct one,

including any file extension.
3. In the To text box, type the drive and directory to which you want the
files copied.
NOTE

You cannot copy more than one file to a single file. (Use the
MS-DOS operating system to concatenate files.) However, you can
copy multiple files to a drive or an existing directory.
4. Click on the Ok command button.

Deleting Files
To delete files that are no longer useful to make space for other files, select
the Delete command. When you delete a file, MS-Windows removes it from
the disk permanently.

Deleting One File
To delete a file from the File menu:
1. Click on the file name you want to delete.

2. Select the Delete command from the File menu.
MS-Windows displays the Delete dialog box, containing the name of the
selected file.
If the file name is not the one you want to delete, type the correct file

name over the one displayed. You must type the entire file name,
including any file extension.
3. Click on the Ok command button.

4-6

IIIII

Working With Files

Deleting More Than One File

To delete more than one file at a time, select all the files you want to delete,
then follow steps 2 and 3 in the previous section.

Printing a Text File
To print text files, select the Print command from the File menu. With the
Print command, you can print any files you can display on your screen.
NOTE

Most applications have a command that prints files you create with
that application. You should use the application command when
possible.
To print a file:
1. Click on the file name of the text file you want to print.
The file name you selected is highlighted.
2. Select the Print command from the File menu.
MS-Windows displays the Print dialog box. Figure 4-3 shows the Print
dialog box.

Print: Hllillil~,.t.'ti

(

)

Figure 4-3

(Cancel)
Print Dialog Box

If the file name is not the one you want to print, type the correct file

name over the one displayed. You must type the entire file name,
including any file extension.

4-7

IIIII Working With Files
3. Click on the Ok command button.
The MS-DOS Executive window displays the Print Spooler dialog box,
telling you the file is being sent to the Spooler for the default printer.
Figure 4-4 shows the Print Spooler dialog box.

fitS-DOS Executl ue

Sending

D01HIS.1)(1
to p~int spoole~.
(Cancel)
Figure 4-4

Print Spooler Dialog Box

NOTE

Printing does not start until the file has been sent to the Print
Spooler. The length of the delay before the printer starts depends
on the complexity and length of the file you are printing.
For more information about the default printer and how to select it, see
Chapter 8.
To cancel the print request, click on the Cancel command button.

Using the Spooler
The MS-Windows Spooler is an application that stores files waiting to be
printed. When you execute the Print command from the MS-DOS Executive
or from a Desktop application:
• The Spooler application statts.
• The Spooler icon is displayed in the icon area.
• A file is sent to the Spooler application.
• The Spooler statts to print the file on your printer, if no other files are
printing.

4-8

Working With Files

11111

The Spooler application works in the background; therefore, you do not have
to wait while your file prints. You can perform another task or work with
another application while the Spooler prints your file.
If you expand the Spooler icon in the work area, the Spooler window lists:

• The file names in the order they are to be printed
This listing is called a print queue. The first file name in the print
queue is the one that is currently printing.
The Spooler prints the files one at a time, in the order they are listed. If
the listing scrolls off the bottom of your window, use the vertical scroll
bar to see the entire list.
• The printers installed on the workstation
Screen 4-2 shows the Spooler window.

Spoo]Pt·

priorit~

•

Controls

README.TXT
DOTHIS.TXT
LPT2 [Actiue]: Digital LHH3
LPT3 [Actiue]: Digital LASH

Screen 4-2

Print Spooler Window With Print Queue

4-9

11111

IIIII Working With Files
The Spooler application has two menus:
• Priority
• Control
Priority Menu Commands

The Priority menu commands specify how fast you want to print your work.
These commands change the rate of data transfer from the Spooler to the
printer ports.
To specify how fast to print:
1. To print faster, select the High command from the Priority menu.

This setting uses more resources of your workstation for printing. The
system slows down, and other applications you are using run more
slowly.
2. To print slower, select the Low command from the Priority menu.
This setting allows the other applications you are working with more
resources of your workstation.
The check mark in the menu shows the current setting. Low is the
default setting.

4-10

Working With Files

IIIII

Control Menu Commands

The Control menu commands interrupt or cancel a print job.
To interrupt a print job (to change a ribbon, for example):
1. Select the Pause command to interrupt printing.
The status of the printer changes to Paused in the Spooler window, and
the printer stops printing.
2. To continue printing the file, select the Resume command.
To cancel a print job:
1. In the Spooler window, click on the file name of the job you want to
cancel.
2. Select the Terminate command.
MS-Windows displays the Terminate dialog box.
3. Confirm the cancellation.
4. Click on the Ok command button.
The file name you selected is removed from the print queue.
WARNING
If you cancel a job while it is printing in graphics mode, you may
need to reset your printer to ensure the buffer is cleared. For more
information on resetting your buffer, see your printer
documentation.

The Spooler application sometimes displays information about the status of
your printing jobs. For example, the printer may be out of paper. If the
Spooler needs to display information, but the window or icon is not selected,
the title bar or icon flashes. Select the Spooler window or icon to display the
message.

4-11

I"IIIIIII Working With Files
Renaming a File
To change the name of a file, use the Rename command.
To rename a file:
1. Click on the file name you want to rename.
2. Select the Rename command from the File menu.
MS-Windows displays the Rename dialog box. Figure 4-5 shows the
Rename dialog box.

Renallle: IDOTHIS. 1):1

To: ~II________________________~

)

(Cancel)

Figure 4-5

Rename Dialog Box

(

If the file name is not the one you want to rename, type the correct file

name over the one displayed. You must type the entire file name,
including any file extension.
3. In the To text box, type the new file name.
4. Click on the Ok command button.

4-12

Working With Files

IIIII

Getting Information About Files
To get more information about a particular file or group of files, use the Get
Info command.
To get information about a file:
1. Click on the file names for which you want information.
2. Select the Get Info command from the File menu.
MS-Windows displays the Get Info dialog box, containing the file
names, size in bytes, and the date and time it was created or last
changed. (You may need to scroll to see all the information in the
dialog box.) Figure 4-6 shows the Get Info dialog box.

Get Info

CALC
.EXE
CALEHDAR .EXE
CARDFILE .EXE
CLIPBRD .EXE
.EXE
CLOCK

24992 1/11/85
37368 9/11/85
36528 14/11/85
9696 23/11/85
7921 5/11185

Figure 4-6

1:54PM
2:12PM
12:48PM
4:29PM
11:18AM

Get Info Dialog Box

3. After you finish looking at the Get Info dialog box, close it by either of
the following:
• Select the Close command from the System menu.
• Double-click on the System menu box.

4-13

Chapter 5
Working With
Directories and Disks

This chapter describes how to use the MS-DOS Executive window to:
• Work with directories
• Work with disks

Working With Directories
A directory lists a group of files stored on a disk. Each directory also briefly
catalogs the group of files it contains. A directory contains information, such
as the name, size, type of file, and date of entry, of all its files. You can also
have subdirectories within directories.
Directory names are displayed at the beginning of the directory listing in the
MS-DOS Executive window.
When the listing is in the short form, directory names are displayed in bold
letters. When the listing is in the long form, directory names are listed with
<DIR> to the right of each directory name.
The name of the current directory (the one you are in now) is the directory
name farthest to the right in the path name at the top of the MS-DOS Executive window.
For more information about directory structures, path names, and disks, see
Chapter 30.

Changing Directories
You can change directories or subdirectories to see what is in another directory and to work with the files in another directory. The path name at the
top of the MS-DOS Executive window always shows your location in the
directory structure.

5-1

IIIII
IIIII Working With Directories and Disks
To change directories, us~:
• The Change Directory command
• The path name
• The Word Char key
Using the Change Directory Command
To change directories:
1. Select the Change Directory command from the Special menu.
MS-Windows displays the Change Directory dialog box. Figure 5-1
shows the Change Directory dialog box.

Change To: I'-h_:_\_de_c_a...::...p.:....:pl~_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _----I

(

Figure 5-1

(Cancel)
Change Directory Dialog Box

2. Type the path name of the directory to which you want to change.
3. Click on the Ok command button.
The directory you selected is displayed in the MS-DOS Executive
window.

5-2

Working With Directories and Disks 11111

Using the Path Name

To change directories:
1. Click on the directory in the path name to which you want to change.
MS-Windows displays the Change Directory dialog box. The path name
of the directory you selected is displayed in the text box.
2. To change to a directory other than the one displayed in the text box,
type the path name of the directory to which you want to change.
3. Click on the Ok command button.
The directory you selected is displayed in the MS-DOS Executive
window.
Using the Word Char Key

To change directories only when you want to go to the next higher directory
(the directory immediately to the left of the current directory in the path
name), press the Word Char key.
With this method, no matter where you are or what you have selected in the
MS-DOS Executive window, the next higher directory (if one exists) is displayed in the MS-DOS Executive window.

5-3

11111

IIIII Working With Directories and Disks

Creating Directories
To create a new directory or subdirectory to organize files, use the Create
Directory command. You must create a directory before you can put files
in it.
To create a new directory:
1. Select the Create Directory command from the Special menu.
MS-Windows displays the Create Directory dialog box. Figure 5-2 shows
the Create Directory dialog box.

Create Directory: I~I______________________~

(

Figure 5-2

)

(Cancel)

Create Directory Dialog Box

2. Type the name of the new directory or subdirectory.
3. Click on the Ok command button.
A new directory, with the name you entered, is created. The new
directory name is displayed in the MS-DOS Executive window.
Mter you create a directory, you can copy files into it by using the Copy
command from the File menu. You can also use an application to create new
files for the directory.

5-4

Working With Directories and Disks

IIIII

Changing How File Names Are Listed
The View menu commands change how file names are listed in the MS-DOS
Executive window.
When you first start MS-Windows, the files in the MS-DOS Executive window
are listed in alphabetical order. The directory names are at the top of the list.
However, you can list files in a different order, such as by size or by the date
they were created or changed. You can also list files having the same file
extension.
To see only files having the same file extension, you must specify the file
extension. To specify the type of files you want to view, use the Partial
command.
To view a partial list of files:
1. Select the Partial command from the View menu.
MS-Windows displays the Partial dialog box. Figure 5-3 shows the Partial dialog box.

Partial: ~II________

....J

( Ok

)

(Cancel)

Figure 5-3

Partial Dialog Box

2. In the text box, type the file names you want to see.
Use wildcard characters (* or ?) to tell MS-Windows which kind of file
to display. For example, to display all file names with the file extension
.EXE, type *.EXE in the text box.
3. Click on the Ok command button.

5-5

IIIII WorkinK With Directories and Disks
Displaying Multiple Directories
You can display more than one MS-DOS Executive window at a time. This is
useful for displaying two different directories at the same time, one directory
in each MS-DOS Executive window.
To display a second MS-DOS Executive window:
1. Use the Run command to open the second MS-DOS Executive window.
The file name is MSDOS.EXE.
2. In the new MS-DOS Executive window, double-click on the directory
path name you want to display.
The selected directory is displayed in the second MS-DOS Executive
window. Two different directories are displayed, one directory in each
MS-DOS Executive window.
If you display the same directory in multiple windows, only the directory in
the active window is updated when you create, delete, rename, or copy a
file. To update the listing in an inactive window, move the mouse to that
window and click on the highlighted drive icon.

Printing a Directory Listing
To print a directory listing, use the Print command. The directory listing is
printed as it is displayed in the MS-DOS Executive window.
To print a directory listing:
1. Click on the directory name.
2. Select the Print command from the File menu.
MS-Windows displays the Print dialog box.
3. Click on the Ok command button.
The listing of the selected directory is printed.

5-6

Working With Directories and Disks

IIIII

To print the current directory or a directory that is not currently listed:
1. Select the Print command from the File menu.
MS-Windows displays the Print dialog box.
2. In the text box, type the directory specification.
3. Click on the Ok command button.
The listing of the specified directory is printed.

Deleting a Directory
To delete a directory, use the Delete command. Before you can delete a
directory permanently from the disk, you must first delete all files in the
directory. MS-Windows does not allow you to delete a directory containing
files. This precaution protects you from losing files should you unintentionally try to delete a directory that is not empty.
To delete a directory:
1. Make the directory to be deleted the current directory.
2. Select all the file names in the directory.
3. Select the Delete command from the File menu to delete them.
4. Move to the parent directory.
5. Select the directory name and select the Delete command from the File
menu.
The selected directory is deleted permanently from the disk.

5-7

IIIII
IIIII Working With Directories and Disks
Working With Disks and Diskettes
You can use the MS·DOS Executive window to:
• Prepare diskettes
• Name a diskette
• Display the contents of a disk

Preparing a Diskette
Before you can use a diskette, you must prepare it as a data diskette or a
system diskette. A data diskette is a blank formatted diskette for storing data.
A system diskette contains the files necessary for starting MS·DOS. You cannot
format hard disks with MS·Windows. For more information on formatting a
hard disk, see Chapter 29.
To prepare a diskette so it can be used on your workstation, use the Format
Data Disk command.

Preparing a Data Diskette
To make a data diskette:
1. Insert the new diskette in the disk drive of your workstation.
2. Select the Format Data Disk command from the Special menu.
MS·Windows displays the Format Data Disk dialog box. Figure 5·4 shows
the Format Data Disk dialog box.

Select drive to for~at
(!> A

( Ok )
Figure 5-4

5·8

r'. Cancel).

Format Data Disk Dialog Box

Working With Directories and Disks 11111

3. Click on the option button of the disk drive containing the new
diskette.
4. Click on the Ok command button.
The system displays a warning that any data on the diskette in the drive
will be destroyed.
5. Click on the Ok command button to continue or click on the Cancel
command button to stop.

Preparing a System Diskette
A system diskette contains the files necessary for starting the MS-DOS operating system.
To prepare a system diskette:
1. Prepare a diskette by using the Format Data Disk command.
2. Ensure the new diskette is in the disk drive to which you want to copy.
3. Select as your current drive a drive that contains the system files.
4. Select the Make System Disk command from the Special menu.
MS-Windows displays the Make System Disk dialog box.
5. Click on the option button of the disk drive to which the MS-DOS system files are to be copied.
6. Click on the Ok command button.
Copying starts when you click on the Ok command button. While the
MS-DOS system files are being copied, the dialog box remains on the
screen and the arrow changes to an hourglass.
When complete, the dialog box is removed from the screen, and the
hourglass changes to the arrow.

5-9

IIIII Working With nirprt()ries and Disks
Naming Disks
To assign a name (a volume name) to a diskette, use the Set Volume Name
command. The volume name identifies the contents of the disk.
To name a disk:
1. Click on the symbol of the disk drive containing the disk you want to
name.
2. Select the Set Volume Name command from the Special menu.
MS-Windows displays the Volume Name dialog box, containing the current name if any exists. Figure 5-5 shows the Volume Name dialog box.

UolulTle lialTle: '"'""_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _---'

(

)

Figure 5-5

(Cancel)

Set Volume Name Dialog Box

3. In the text box, type a name.
Only the first twelve characters are accepted.
4. Click on the Ok command button.
The new volume name for the disk is displayed to the right of the drive
letter in the path name.

5-10

Working With Directories and Disks

IIIII

Displaying the Contents of Another Disk
To display the contents of another disk, click on the symbol of the disk drive
you want to display.
The file names of the selected drive are listed in the MS-DOS Executive window. You can change the default directory by selecting a new directory on
the drive.
WARNING
When you display the contents of another directory or drive, you
change the default directory or drive. When you run an
application, its default drive and directory become the default
drive and directory of the MS-DOS Executive window from which
you invoked it. If the new default drive is read-only, you cannot
save files, and your application cannot write temporary files to it.

Each copy of the MS-DOS Executive window acts independently of the other,
so you can display and work with different directories and drives in each
window.

5-11

Chapter 6
Using the Keyboard

This chapter describes how to use the keyboard to:
• Select menus and commands
• Load an application
• Run an application
• Finish an application
• Scroll a window
• Work with files
• Use more than one window
• Print screen images

Keyboard Features
In the previous chapters, you used the mouse to perform the actions available to you in MS-Windows. This chapter describes how to use the keyboard
to perform those same actions. Because details about the MS-Windows functions are given in previous chapters, they are not repeated here.
Table 6-1 lists the keys you use most often with MS-Windows. Look at your
keyboard and identify the keys listed in Table 6-1.

6-1

11111

IIIII Using the Keyboard
Table 6-1

MS-Windows Keys

Keys

MS-Windows Function

Alt

Lets MS-Windows know you want to select a command using
the keyboard. If you reiease the Alt key before you press
another key, nothing happens. It also modifies the meaning of
certain keys used with MS-Windows.

Arrow

Moves the highlight in the menus and in the MS-DOS Executive window in the same direction as the arrow: up, down,
right, left.

Alphabet (A-Z)

Moves the highlight in the menus and in the MS-DOS Executive window. For example, when you are in the MS-DOS
Executive window and you press the C key, the highlight
moves to the first file name beginning with the letter C. If you
press the C key again, the highlight moves to the next file
name beginning with the letter C, and so on.

Ctrl/Arrow

Moves the cursor without making any selections, such as
moving the highlight over the file names in the MS-DOS Executive window.

Ctrl/Break

Selects the Cancel command button in a dialog box.

Return

Runs the selected (highlighted) application file name, or
executes the highlighted command in menu.
Selects the default command button in a dialog box. (See
Spacebar)

Esc

Cancels a command if you press it before you press the Return
key, or before you click on the Ok command button in a
dialog box.
Removes a menu or a dialog box from a window. The Esc key
is equivalent to the Cancel command button in most dialog
boxes.

Spacebar

Selects and cancels selected check boxes. (Toggles check
boxes on and off.)
Selects the underscored command button in a dialog box. (See
Return)

Alt/spacebar
Shift
Shift/Tab

6-2

With the Alt key, the spacebar displays the commands in the
System menu.
Used with the Tab key, the Alt/Tab keys, the arrow keys, or the
Return key to change their function, as follows:
Used with the Tab key, Shift changes the direction of the
cursor movement in a dialog box from left-to-right and top-tobottom to right-to-Ieft and bottom-to-top.

Using the Keyboard 11111

Table 6-1

MS-Windows Keys (cont.)

Keys

MS-Windows Function

Alt/Shift/Tab

Used with the Alt/Tab keys, Shift changes the direction of win·
dow and icon selection from left-to-right and top-to-bottom to
right-to-Ieft and bottom-to-top.

Shift/arrow

Used with the arrow keys, Shift allows multiple selection of
file names in the MS-DOS Executive window.

Shift/Return

Used with the Return key, Shift loads into memory the application represented by the highlighted file name in the MS-DOS
Executive window and displays its icon in the icon area.
Moves the cursor between items in a dialog box.

Tab

Selects an icon, a window, or a dialog box when used with the
Alt key.
Word Char

When used in a text box, deletes a character to the left of the
insertion point each time it is pressed.
When used in the MS-DOS Executive window, changes the
current directory to the next higher directory.

Using the Alt Key
The Alt key lets MS-Windows know you want to select a command. You can
use the Alt key in several ways:
• If you press the Alt key and release it before you press another key,

nothing happens .
• If you hold down the Alt key, select a menu, then release the Alt key

before highlighting a command, the menu remains displayed. You can
then highlight a command and press the Return key (or the Alt key) to
execute the command. To close the menu, press the Esc key.
• If you hold down the Alt key, select a menu, highlight a command, then

release the Alt key, MS-Windows executes the command immediately.
The next sections shows specific examples of using the Alt key when working with menus.

6-3

IIIII
11111 Using tbe Keyboard
Using Menus and Commands
Using the keyboard, you can select menus and commands.

Selecting a Menu
To select a menu with the keyboard:
1. Press and hold down the Alt key.
2. Press the spacebar.
MS-Windows displays the System menu.
3. Release the Alt key.
4. To select another menu, press the right arrow key until the menu you
want is selected.
Each time you press the right arrow key, the next menu to the right is
selected, and its commands are displayed. Similarly, if you press the left
arrow key, the next menu to the left is selected, and its commands are
displayed.
To select a menu, you can also:
1. Press and hold the Alt key.
2. To display a menu, press the initial letter of the menu name you want.
To display the System menu, press the spacebar.
If more than one menu starts with the same initial letter, use the right

or left arrow keys to move from the highlighted menu to the menu you
want.

Selecting a Command From a Menu
To select a command from a menu:
1. Press and hold down the Alt key.
2. Press the spacebar.
MS-Windows displays the System menu.

6-4

IIIII

Using the Keyboard

3. Release the Alt key.
4. To display the commands of another menu, press the right or the left
arrow key until the menu you want is displayed.
5. Press the initial letter of the command you want, or press the down
arrow key until the highlight moves to the command you want.
When you press the initial letter of the command, the highlight moves
to the first command with the initial letter you pressed. If two commands start with the same letter, press the letter twice to move the
highlight to the second command.
The highlighted command is selected.
6. Press the Return key.
The command you selected is executed.
You can cancel a command or remove a menu by pressing the Esc key.
However, you must do this before you press the Return key.
To select a command from a menu, you can also:
1. Press and hold down the Alt key.
2. Press the initial letter of the menu you want to select (to display the
System menu, press the spacebar). Continue to hold down the Alt key.
3. Press the initial letter of the command you want.
When you press the initial letter of the command, the highlight moves
to the first command with the initial letter you pressed. If two commands start with the same letter, press the letter twice to move the
highlight to the second command.
The highlighted command is selected.
4. Release the Alt key.
The command you selected is executed.
You can cancel a command or remove a menu by pressing the Esc key.
However, you must do this before you release the Alt key.

6-5

IIIII

11111 Using the Keyboard

Loading an Application
To load an application as an icon using the keyboard, use:
• The Load command
• The file name

Using the Load Command
To load an application using the Load command:
1. Select the Load command from the File menu.
MS-Windows displays the Load dialog box.
2. In the dialog box, type the file name of the application you want to
load.
Also type any additional information needed, such as path name or program parameters.
3. Select the Ok command button by pressing the Return key.
The application you select loads as an icon.

Using the File Name
To load an application using the file name:
1. Press the up arrow or down arrow key until the file name of the application you want is highlighted.
2. Press and hold down the Shift key.
3. Press the Return key.
The selected application loads as an icon.

Running an Application
To run an application in a window using the keyboard, use:
• The Icon command
• The Move command
• The Run command
• The file name

6-6

Using the Keyboard

IIIII

Using the Icon Command
To expand an icon into the work area using the Icon command:
1. Press and hold down the Alt key.
2. Press the Tab key until the icon you want is highlighted. The name of
the application is displayed above the highlighted icon.
3. Press the spacebar.
4. Release the Alt key.
5. Select the Icon command from the System menu, and press the Return
key. The icon you selected expands into a window in the work area.
When you use the Icon command, you have little control over exactly where
the icon expands into a window in the work area. Where it expands depends
on how many windows are already in the work area and the arrangement of
those windows. To control where the icon expands into a window in the
work area, use the Move command.

Using the Move Command
The Move command provides more control over where the icon expands into
the work area.
To expand an icon into the work area using the Move command:
1. Press and hold down the Alt key.
2. Press the Tab key until the icon you want is highlighted, indicating it is
selected.
3. Press the spacebar.
4. Release the Alt key.
5. Select the Move command from the System menu, and press the Return
key. The icon you selected is displayed in the work area above the icon
area.
6. Press the arrow keys until the icon is where you want the window to be
displayed.
7. To complete the move, press the Return key. The window expands
where you positioned its icon.

6-7

IIIII
IIIII

Using tbe Keyboard

Using the Run Command
To run an application using the Run command:
1. Select the Run command from the File menu.
MS-Windows displays the Run dialog box.
2. In the dialog box, type the file name of the application you want to
run.
Also type any additional information needed, such as path name or command line argument.
3. Select the Ok command button by pressing the Return key.
The application you select runs in a window.

Using the File Name
To run an application using the file name in the MS-DOS Executive window:
1. Press the up arrow or down arrow key until the application's file name
is highlighted.
2. Press the Return key.
The selected application is displayed in the work area, replacing the
MS-DOS Executive window.

Finishing an Application
When you finish using an application in the work area, you can remove it by
using the Icon command or the Close command. If you use the Icon command, the application continues to run, but it is in the icon area. However, if
you use the Close command, the application is removed from the work area,
stops running, and is removed from memory.

6-8

Using the Keyboard 1111

Shrinking an Application to an Icon
To remove an application temporarily from the work area, use the Icon command to shrink the application to an icon in the icon area.
To shrink an application to an icon:
1. Press and hold down the Alt key.
2. Press the Tab key until the application you want is highlighted.
3. Press the spacebar, but continue to hold down the AIt key.
4. Select the Icon command from the System menu.
5. Release the AIt key.
The window you selected shrinks to an icon in the icon area.

Closing an Application
When you finish using an application and want to remove it from memory,
use the Close command.
To close an application:
1. Press and hold down the AIt key.
2. Press the Tab key until the application you want is highlighted.
3. Press the spacebar, but continue to hold down the AIt key.
4. Select the Close command from the System menu.
5. Release the AIt key.
The window you selected closes, the application is removed from memory, but the application remains on the disk.

6-9

IIIII

IIIII Using the Keyboard
Using a Dialog Box
To supply information to a dialog box, you move the cursor to items in the
dialog box. The flashing underscore shows the location of the cursor, and
identifies the active component in the dialog box. Table 6-2 describes the
keyboard procedures for moving the cursor in a dialog box.
Table 6-2 Moving the Cursor in a Dialog Box
To move the cursor...

Press ...

In the dialog box

Tab key or Shift/Tab keys

Within a group of check boxes

Arrow keys, Tab key, or Shift/Tab keys

Within a group of option buttons

Arrow keys

(Insertion point) in a text box

Arrow keys

From the text box to the list box

Tab key

In a list box

Arrow keys

Selecting Options in a Dialog Box
To select an option in a dialog box with the keyboard:
1. Move the cursor to the option you want to select, such as the check
box, option button, or command button, as explained in Table 6-2.
2. Press the spacebar.
The option is selected.

6-10

Using the Keyboard

IIIII

Selecting Command Buttons in a Dialog Box
There are alternative ways to select the default command button (usually the
Ok command button) and the Cancel command button. The default commands buttons have bold borders.
To select the default command button in a dialog box, press the Return key.
MS-Windows executes the default command and removes the dialog box from
the window.
To select other command buttons, press the Tab key to move to the desired
button. An underline is displayed under the selected button. To execute the
command button, press the spacebar.
To select the Cancel option in a dialog box, press Ctrl/Break.
The command represented by the dialog box is canceled, and the dialog box
is removed from the window.

Closing a Dialog Box
You usually do not have to close a dialog box, because it is removed when
you select the Ok or Cancel command button. However, if a dialog box has
no Ok or Cancel command button and has a System menu box in the title
bar, you can use the Close command of the System menu to close the dialog
box. You can also use the Esc key to close most dialog boxes.

6-11

IIIII
IIIII

Using the Keyboard

Scrolling a Window
How an application scrolls using the keyboard depends on the application.
You can also use the keyboard to scroll in the MS-DOS Executive window.
When you scroll in the MS-DOS Executive window, you move the highlight
from one file name to another.
Figure 6-1 shows the two sets of keys you can use for scrolling the MS-DOS
Executive window: one set in the cursor keypad, and one set in the numeric
keypad. The keys in the numeric keypad are available only when the Num
Lock feature is not selected (the Num Lock light is off). Table 6-3 describes
scrolling the MS-DOS Executive window with the keyboard.
Table 6-3

Keyboard Scrolling in the MS-DOS Executive Window

To scrolL._

Press __ _

Down one file name

Down arrow key

Up one file name

Up arrow key

Right one file name

Right arrow key

Left one file name

Left arrow key

Down one page in the directory

Pg On key

Up one page in the directory

Pg Up key

6-12

Using the Ke),board

<=)

IIIII

<=)

I DDDD

DDD DDDO
DDD D~DO
D 0

P IBD

Figure 6-1

Keys Used for Scrolling

6-13

11111

IIIII

Using rhe Keyboard

Working With Files
Selecting Files
You can select:
• One file
• A block of files
• Scattered files
Selecting One File

To select a file in the MS-DOS Executive window, use:
• Arrow keys
Press the arrow keys until the file name you want is highlighted.
• Alphabet keys
Press the first letter of a file name.
The highlighted file name is selected.
For example, if you press S, the first file name beginning with S is
highlighted. Press S again to highlight the second file name beginning
with S, and so on.
If no more files begin with the letter, the last file remains selected.

Canceling One Selected File

To cancel a selected file with the keyboard, press the spacebar.
The highlight changes to an underscore, showing the file is no longer
selected.
If you press the spacebar again, the file becomes selected again.

6-14

Using the Keyboard

IIIII

Selecting a Block of Files
To select a block of files:
1. Press the down arrow key until the first file you want is highlighted.
2. Press and hold down the Shift key.
3. To select other files, move the highlight by pressing the arrow keys.
The file names are selected as the highlight moves across them.
4. Release the Shift key after you select all the files you want.
All the file names you selected are highlighted.
Selecting Scattered Files
To select scattered files:
1. Press the down arrow key until the first file you want is highlighted.
2. Press and hold down the etr! key.
3. To move the underscore across files you do not want to select, continue
to hold down the etr! key, and press the arrow keys, until the underscore is under the next file you do want to select.
4. Press the spacebar.
The highlighted file is selected.
5. Select all the files you want by repeating steps 3 and 4.
6. After you select all the files you want, release the etr! key.
All the file names you selected are highlighted.

6-15

IIIII
IIIII Using the Keyboard
Using More Than One Window
You can display more than one window at a time, but only one window can
be the active window.

Switching Windows
To switch to another window:
1. Press and hold down the Alt key.
2. Press the Tab key until the title bar of window you want to switch to is
highlighted.
Each time you press the Tab key, the title bar of the next window or
icon, from top-to-bottom and left-to-right, is highlighted.
3. Release the Alt key and the Tab key.
The window you switched to is now the active window. Any commands
you select or any other information you enter with the mouse or the
keyboard affect that window.
You can reverse the direction the highlight moves if you type the
Shift/Alt/Tab sequence. You can move the highlight from bottom-to-top and
right-to-Ieft if you press and hold down the Shift key before you press the
Tab key.

Changing the Size of a Window
Making a Window Larger or Smaller
To make a window larger or smaller:
1. Switch to the window you want to make larger or smaller.

2. Select the Size command from the System menu.
The cursor changes to the size box.
3. Move the size box to the window border by pressing the arrow keys.

6-16

Using the Keyboard 11111

Continue pressing the arrow keys to move beyond the window border to
the size you want. A line shows where the new window's border is
located.
To make the window smaller, you must move the size box beyond the
window border and back inside the window border.
4. Press the Return key.
MS-Windows changes the size of the window and adjusts the size of any
adjacent windows.
Making a Window Fill the Entire Screen
To zoom a window so that it fills the entire screen:
1. Switch to the window you want to fill the entire screen.
2. Select the Zoom command from the System menu.
The window you selected zooms and fills the entire screen including
the icon area.
To zoom a window, you can also:
1. Switch to the window you want to fill the entire screen.
2. Press the Alt/Return keys.
The window you selected zooms and fills the entire screen including
the icon area.
To return the window to its former size:
• Use the Zoom command again .
• Press the Alt/Return keys to restore the window to its former size.

Moving a Window
To move a window to another position in the work area:
1. Switch to the window you want to move.
2. Select the Move command from the System menu.
MS-Windows diplays the icon of the application in the middle of the
window.

6-17

IIIII Using the Keyboard
3. Press the arrow keys until the icon is where you want the window to be
moved.

4. Press the Return key.
The window is moved to the position you selected. MS-Windows adjusts
the size of the other windows in the work area.

Receiving Messages From Another Application
To see a message sent by another application, switch to the window whose
title bar is flashing or to the flashing icon:
1. Hold the Alt key and press the Tab key until the window or icon of the
application sending you the message is highlighted.
2. Release the Alt key.

The message is displayed when you switch to the window or icon of the
application sending you the message.

Printing Screen Images
With MS-Windows, you can send the information displayed on the screen to
your printer, on LPT1. To print a screen, the GRAPHICS command must be
loaded and run before MS-Windows starts. The key diskette runs the
GRAPHICS command for you. For more information on the GRAPHICS command see Chapter 32.
To print your screen:
1. If you are using a local printer, be sure your printer is attached and on
line.
2. Ensure the screen contains the information you want printed. Everything
displayed on the screen is printed.
3. Press Shift/Prt Sc.
The screen is printed. This operation may take a few minutes.
NOTE

Do not press Shift/Prt Sc if LPT1 is being used by another
application.

6-18

Chapter 7
Running
Standard Applications

This chapter describes how to:
• Run standard applications in a window
• Run standard applications outside a window
• Transfer information between standard applications
• Run large standard applications
• Run special applications

Working with Standard Applications
A standard application is an application (with a .EXE, .BAT, or .COM extension) that you can use with MS-Windows, even though it was not designed
for this use. (MS-Windows applications, such as Notepad and Clock, are specifically designed to be used with MS-Windows.)
When you run a standard application with MS-Windows, you continue to use
the commands and functions of the application. For many standard applications, MS-Windows lets you run several applications and switch from one
application to another.
Many standard applications can run in a window, sharing the work area with
other applications in their own windows. However, some standard applications require the entire screen and run outside a window.
Whether a standard application runs in a window depends on how it:
• Uses memory
• Processes input/output (I/O) activities

7-1

IIIII
When an application runs on your workstation, it processes I/O activities that
use the workstation's resources. These resources include:
• Computer memory
• Communications ports
• Video display screen
• Keyboard
If a standard application uses standard MS-DOS supplied I/O procedures and
memory allocation, it can run in a window, because MS-Windows emulates
the I/O activities that are compatible for MS-DOS.
If a standard application does not use standard MS-DOS supplied I/O procedures or standard memory allocation, it cannot run in a window, because
MS-Windows cannot provide the interface for I/O activities. These standard
applications provide their own interface for I/O activities.
NOTE

Standard applications must run under MS-DOS Version 3.10 or later
to run from MS-Windows.

Using Program Information Files
A program information file (PIF) contains information about how a standard
application uses workstation resources. The system administrator enters this
information into a PIF for the standard application, and the information is
used by MS-Windows. Each standard application you use should have a PIF
associated with it.
Included with your MS-Windows software package are PIFs for many standard
applications. If you try to run an application that has no PIF, MS-Windows
uses default settings for the resources. However, the system administrator
should create a PIF for the application.
An application can have more than one PIF associated with it. For example,

you can have two versions of the same application. One version can require a
large amount of memory, because you use all the features of the application,
while another version can require less memory, because you use only a few
features.

7-2

Running Standard Applications

IIIII

Some applications require more than one PIF. Each file with a .EXE, .COM,
and .BAT extension that an application runs must have a PIF associated with
it.
If you are running a batch file (an application with a .BAT extension) that

redirects I/O, you must set the Directly Modifies Screen option in its PIF file
and run it from the MS-DOS Executive window. See Appendix C for more
information on creating PIFs for standard applications.
NOTE
You should not run a batch file from a COMMAND.COM window if
the file includes redirected I/O or piping.

You can run an application by selecting its PIF in the MS-DOS Executive
window. When you select the PIF, MS-Windows loads and runs the application named in the PIF.

7-2.1

This page intentionally left blank.

Running Standard Applications 11111

Running a Standard Application
You run a standard application that runs in a window as you run
MS-Windows applications, such as Calculator and Notepad.
NOTE

When you run a standard application in a window, the Special
light in the top right of the keyboard may turn on and off. This
means the keyboard is automatically changing modes according to
the needs of the application.

Shrinking a Window
You shrink a standard application that runs in a window as you shrink
MS-Windows applications, such as the Information System and Notepad.
Most icons for standard applications are a plain rectangle containing a threeletter abbreviation for the application. However, some applications have custom icons that are graphic representations of the application.
NOTE

When you drag the icon of any standard application, it becomes a
plain rectangle, resembling the Clock icon when it is dragged.

Closing a Window
To close a standard application running in a window:
1. Execute the Exit command of the application.
This ensures a normal ending of operations for the application.
NOTE

Standard applications have a Quit command, an End command, or
some other command that is equivalent to the Exit command; see
your application documentation for using them.
2. Observe and note any information the application displays in the
window.
Some standard applications display information for you to look at or
copy. Observe the name of the application displayed in the title bar
with parentheses around it, indicating you have successfully exited from
the application and it has stopped running.
3. Select the Close command from the System menu.

7-3

Running Standard Applications

11111

The standard application stops running, the window closes, and the
standard application is removed from memory.
An option in the PIF allows for a standard application window to close
when you execute the Exit command for the standard application. If

this option is selected, the window automatically closes when you execute the Exit command of the standard application. For more information on the Close or Exit option, see Appendix D.

Scrolling a Window
If your standard application runs in a window, MS-Windows adds the Scroll

command to the System menu of the application.
To scroll a standard application, you use:
• The Scroll command from the System menu
• The commands and keys built into your standard application
If using the Scroll command, you must use the keyboard to scroll. The Scroll

command is independednt of the commands already built into your standard
application.
The keys you use have two functions: their normal function and their scrolling function. Press the Esc key to use the normal function. Press the Esc key
again to use the scrolling function.
If using the built-in commands and keys, use the mouse to scroll. See the

application documentation for information on what these commands and keys
are.
Table 7-1 shows the keys used for scrolling standard applications that run in
a window.
Table 7-1

Scrolling Standard Applications That Run in a Window

To scrolL_

Press ...

Up one line

Up arrow key

Down one line

Down arrow key

Left one character

Left arrow key

Right one character

Right arrow key

Up one screen

Pg Up key

7-4

Running Standard Applications
Table 7-1

IIIII

Scrolling Standard Applications That Run in a Window (cont.)

To scroll...

Press ...

Down one screen

Pg Dn key

Left one screen

Home key

Right one screen

End key

Finishing an MS-Windows Session
You cannot finish an MS-Windows session while a standard application is still
running. You must exit from all standard applications before you can end
your MS-Windows session.
If you try to end your MS-Windows session while a standard application is
still running, MS-Windows displays a dialog box, showing a message that a
standard application is still active. The name of the active standard application is displayed in the title bar of the dialog box. When you see this dialog
box, execute the Exit command of the application.

Any standard application running as an icon must also be closed before you
try to end your MS-Windows session. For each standard application running
as an icon, you must expand the icon into a window and execute the Exit
command of the application.

Running Multiple Standard Applications
You run multiple standard applications the same as MS-Windows applications, such as the Information System and Notepad.

Running Standard Applications Outside a Window
Some standard applications require exclusive use of the screen and cannot
run in a window. When you run this kind of application, you no longer see
MS-Windows features, such as the title bar, the menu bar, and the icon area.
When you run a standard application outside a window, MS-Windows temporarily removes itself from the screen. You can use the application's commands and functions, but you cannot use all of MS-Windows' functions.

7-5

Running Standard Applications

11111

Starting an Application That Runs Outside a Window
You start a standard application that runs outside a window the same as you
start other applications. You can:
• Expand the icon
• Select the Run command from the File menu of the MS-DOS Executive
window and type the file name and path name, if needed
• Select the file name in the MS-DOS Executive window
When you start a standard application that runs outside a window, it fills the
entire screen. Any applications that are displayed on the screen are removed.
They return to the screen after you finish the application and return to
MS-Windows.

Returning to MS- Windows
To return to MS-Windows from a standard application that runs outside a
window, you can use:
• The application's Exit command
All applications use this method.
• Alt/Tab keys
Some applications use this method, depending on how they use certain
workstation resources, as specified in each standard application's PIF.
For example, the Alt/Tab keys cannot be used to switch windows if the
Program Switch option is set to Prevent in the application's PIF. For
information on the Program Switch option, see Appendix C.
After you close the standard application, switch to the application that was
running previously.
To run the standard application again, expand its icon.

7-6

Running Standard Applications 11111

Transferring Information
To transfer information between applications that run in windows, use:
• Added System menu commands:
- Mark
- Copy
- Paste
These can be used only with standard applications that run in a window, because these are the only standard applications that have a
System menu.
• AltjPrt Sc keys
To traansfer information from an application that runs outside a window, use
the AltjPrt Sc keys.

Marking Information to be Transferred
Before you can transfer information, you must mark (select) it, using the
mouse or the keyboard.
To use the mouse to mark information:
1. Point to the beginning of the area you want to transfer.
2. Drag the cursor across the area of the window you want to transfer.
As you drag the cursor across the window, the selected information is

highlighted.
3. Release the mouse button.
The information you want to transfer is now marked.
To use the keyboard to mark information:
1. Select the Mark command from the System menu.
A rectangular cursor is displayed at the upper-left corner of the
window.
2. Press the arrow keys to move the cursor to the beginning of the area
you want to transfer.
3. Press and hold down the Shift key.

7-7

IIIII Running Standard Applications
4. Press the arrow keys to define the area you want to transfer.
The block of information you marked for transfer is highlighted.
To cancel the selected area, press the Esc key, or the Return key. This
removes the highlighting on the block of information you selected.
5. Release the Shift key.
The information you want to transfer is now marked.
For example, to select a paragraph:
1. Move the cursor to the first character of the paragraph.
2. Press and hold down the Shift key.
3. Press the right arrow key to go to the end of the line, then press the
down arrow key to go to the last line of the paragraph.
4. Release the Shift key.
After you mark the information, you transfer it to the Clipboard using the
Copy command.

Copying Information to the Clipboard
You must copy information to the Clipboard before you can transfer it to an
application. To transfer marked information to the Clipboard, select the Copy
command from the System menu.
The information you marked is copied to Clipboard. You insert this information into another location using the Paste command.

Pasting Information
After the information has been copied to the Clipboard, you can transfer it to
another location using the Paste command. You can paste the information to:
• Applications designed to work with MS-Windows
For example, you can paste text screens to Notepad and graphics
screens to MS-Paint.
• Standard applications that run in a window
You can paste all or part of an application that runs in a window.

7-8

Running Standard Applications 11111

When you paste information to a terminal emulator, you must first enable
HOSTSYNC under VMS by typing:
$

SET TERMINAL/HOSTSYNC

This command prevents data overruns.
You cannot paste:
• Information from the Clipboard to an application that runs outside a
window
• Graphics information from the Clipboard to any standard application
(inside or outside a window)
NOTE

Text is stored in its character (ASCII) representation. When you
use the Copy or Paste commands, the text is also transferred in this
character representation.
To use the Paste command:
1. Switch to the window into which you want to paste the information.
2. Move the cursor where you want to insert the information.
3. Select the Paste command from the System menu.
The selected text is inserted in your application at the cursor location.

Using the Prt Sc Key
You can also transfer information to the Clipboard by using the Alt/Prt Sc
keys. To copy a standard application's window to the Clipboard:
1. To copy from a standard application that runs in a window, make sure
the window is the active window. (Switch to the window you want to
copy if it is not the active window.)
2. Press the Alt/Prt Sc keys.
For a standard application that runs outside a window, the screen contents are copied to the Clipboard. For a standard application that runs
in a window, the active window is copied, as if it filled the entire
screen, to the Clipboard. Other windows in the work area are not
copied.

7-9

IIIII Running Standard Applications
A block of information, 80 columns by 2S lines, is transferred from the
selected window to the Clipboard, regardless of the number of columns
and lines displayed in the window.
After the information has been copied to the Clipboard, you can paste it to
other applications with the Paste command.

Running Large Standard Applications
To run multiple standard applications efficiently, run the largest application
first.
If you run more than one application and try to run a new application that
requires more memory than is available, MS-Windows displays the message
"Not enough memory to run."
If you see this message, close an application that you do not currently need

and try to run the standard application again.
If you are closing a standard application, you should first execute the Exit

command of the application.
The application runs after enough memory has been freed by closing other
applications. If the MS-DOS Executive window is the only application running, the application you selected runs because MS-Windows and the MS-DOS
Executive application step aside and give the application most of the available memory. A small amount of memory is retained for restoring
MS-Windows.
When you finish using the large application, close it. After you close the
application, the MS-DOS Executive window returns to the work area. Any
application defined in the WIN.INI file to load or run is started.
NOTE

Do not use a large standard application in the WIN.INI file's RUN=
line.

Running Special Applications
Some applications remain in memory after you load them. These special
applications are sometimes called "memory resident," "terminate and stay
resident," or "pop-up" programs.
You must load special applications before you start MS-Windows.
7-10

Running Standard Applications

IIIII

You run special applications from MS-DOS outside MS-Windows. You can also
run special applications while using standard applications that both:
• Do not run in a window
• Have Directly Modifies Memory set in their PIFs
You cannot run special applications from COMMAND.COM in MS-Windows.
NOTE

The PIF for a special application should have the Directly Modifies
Memory option enabled. If you then try to run a special
application, a system warning displays. Select CANCEL. If you
select Ok, the special application can cause system problems.
Some special applications prevent you from switching back to MS-Windows.
To return to MS-Windows, stop the special application by using its EXIT
command.

7-11

Chapter 8
Using the Control Panel

This chapter describes how to use the Control Panel application to:
• Change the date and time
• Change the mouse cursor blink rate
• Change the mouse double-click rate
• Add and remove printers
• Add and delete display fonts
• Change printer ports
• Change the default printer and its output modes
• Change communications ports
• Change network terminal services
• Change screen shades
• Change keyboard settings
• Exchange mouse button functions
• Change country settings

Running the Control Panel
The Control Panel is an application that lets you change the settings for
MS-Windows. MS-Windows saves the Control Panel changes you make in the
WIN.INI file, which is stored in your personal directory. Each time
MS-Windows starts, it uses the settings in the WIN.INI file. For more information on the WIN.INI file, see Appendix B.

8-1

11111

Using the Control Panel

To run the Control Panel:
1. In the MS-DOS Executive window, select the Run command from the
File menu.
The MS-DOS Executive window dispiays the Run command diaiog box.
2. In the dialog box, type:
CONTROL

The MS-DOS Executive window displays the Control Panel window with
a dialog box in the window and three menu names in the menu bar.
Screen 8-1 shows the Control Panel window.

COllt .. ,,} Pdll"}

Installation Setup

Tillle
rL112:53:37
PM

L03l17I86J

Cursor BlinkSlol11
Fast

Double Click---Slolll
Fast

I.. Wiii',,;i,l

1.. 1i""'iiiii:!;I_liiHii"iil"+l

Hiiii:ii!!iiiilU-+1

Screen 8-1

8-2

Preferences

rDate::-=-l

I TEST I

Control Panel Window

Using the Control Panel

IIIII

The Control Panel dialog box, in the center of the window, lets you change:
• Time
• Date
• Cursor blink rate
• Double-click rate
The three menu names in the menu bar are:
• Installation
• Setup
• Preferences

Using the Control Panel Dialog Box
Changing the Time
The time you set from the Control Panel is used in many applications, such
as Clock or Calendar.
To change the time using the mouse :
1. Click on the part of the time (hours, minutes, or seconds) you want to
change. Figure 8-1 shows changing the time.

,-._------------------------

1~l1le

~{ 14: 23 At'1

11"1

r±l

',I

reut-SOt'

Blink-

Fast
bYI ... 1

Figure 8-1

Changing the Time

The part of the time you selected is highlighted. An up arrow and a
down arrow are displayed to the right of the time.

8-3

IIIII Using the Control Panel
2. Click on the up arrow to increase the number; click on the down arrow
to decrease the number.
To change the time using the keyboard:
1. Press the Tab key to move the cursor, dispiayed as an underscore, to the
Time section.
2. Press the right arrow and left arrow keys to highlight the part of the
time (hour, minutes, or seconds) you want to change.
The selected time is highlighted. An up arrow and a down arrow are
displayed to the right of the time.
3. Press the up arrow key to increase the number; press the down arrow
key to decrease the number.

Changing the Date
You change the date the same way that you change the time.
To change the date with a mouse, click on the part of the date (month, day,
or year) you want to change, then use the same procedure for changing the
time. Figure 8-2 shows changing the date.

[ijt.

rTifl)e

"9: "9 : 34 At1

,,/17186

-Cut'SOt' Blink---Fast
Slm"

-Double Click---Slow
Fast
I+- lin!!!!!!!!!! k!!!!!!!iniil ... 1

I TEST I
Figure 8-2

Changing the Date

To change the date with the keyboard, press the Tab key to move the cursor,
displayed as an underscore, to the Date section, then use the same procedure
for changing the time.

8-4

IIIII

Using the Control Panel

Changing the Cursor Blink Rate
Some applications have a cursor that blinks. The cursor is usually an underscore or insertion point that blinks. The blink rate is the frequency at which
the cursor flashes.
To change the cursor blink rate with the mouse, do one of the following:
• Click on the right or left scroll arrow.
The scroll box moves as you click on an arrow.
• Drag the scroll box within the scroll bar to the right or to the left.
The vertical cursor below the scroll bar shows the new cursor blink
rate. As you scroll, the blink rate of the vertical cursor changes. The
farther right you scroll, the faster the cursor blinks. The cursor blink
rate stays in effect until you change it again.
To change the cursor blink rate with the keyboard:
1. Press the Tab key to move the cursor to the Cursor Blink section.
2. Press the left arrow or the right arrow key to scroll to the setting you
want.

Changing the Mouse Double-Click Rate
You can double-click to execute many commands. MS-Windows interprets
this action either as a double-click or as two individual clicks, depending on
how soon one click follows another. If you do not double-click fast enough,
MS-Windows interprets the action as two individual clicks of the left mouse
button, instead of a double-click.
To change the mouse double-click rate, do one of the following:
• Click on the right or left scroll arrow in the Double-Click section.
• Drag the scroll box within the scroll bar.
The farther right you scroll, the faster MS-Windows expects a doubleclick.
You can test the new double-click setting by double-clicking on the TEST
button in the dialog box. If MS-Windows interprets your clicking as a doubleclick, the TEST button shade changes from dark to light, or from light to
dark. If the TEST button shade does not change, try double-clicking faster or
reducing the double-click rate.

8-5

IIIII Using the Control Panel
Using the Installation Menu
The Installation menu has four commands:
• Add New Printer, which adds a printer to the list of available printers
• Delete Printer, which removes a printer from the list of available
printers
• Add New Font, which adds a font to the list of available fonts
• Delete Font, which removes a font from the list of available fonts
Figure 8-3 shows the Installation menu commands.

~~~~~I~

Setu
Add Hew Printer .. .
Delete Printer .. .
Add Hew Font .. .
Delete Font .. .

Figure 8-3

Installation Menu Commands

Adding and Removing a New Printer
When you first set up MS-Windows, you select the printer or printers you
want to use. To change this selection, use the Add New Printer and the
Delete Printer commands from the Installation Menu.
On the network, you can connect to print servers that generate output in
either landscape or portrait mode. Using the Control Panel, you can select
the default printer mode: landscape or portrait. The printer mode you select
overrides the current mode of the printer.
When you use the Control Panel to add or remove a printer to MS-Windows,
you are actually adding or removing the name of the printer driver file to the
other printer drivers already named in the WIN.lNI file of MS-Windows. Only
printers that have their printer driver files named in the WIN .INI file can be
used by MS-Windows and its applications.

8-6

Using the Control Panel

IIIII

After MS-Windows is set up, you can add a printer driver file to MS-Windows
when you want to install:
• An existing printer driver file

The printer driver file is included in the network directory
H:\ WIN\UTIL, which stores printer driver files.
• A new printer driver file
The printer driver file is not in the network directory H:\WIN\UTIL.
You install the printer driver file by copying it from the distribution
diskette of a new application to the network directory H:\WIN\UTIL.
After you add a new printer to your system, you must let MS-Windows know
which communications port the printer is connected to before you can use
the printer. To define the communications port, use the Connections command in the Setup menu of the Control Panel.

Adding an Existing Printer Driver File
To add an already existing printer driver file to your system:
1. Select the Add New Printer command from the Installation menu.

MS-Windows displays the Add Printer dialog box. Figure 8-4 shows the
Add New Printer dialog box.

Add Pt"inter
Insert the disk with the printer file
you wish to add into drive A. or choose
an alternative drive/directory:
11j&.1" U ..'II II 1

(

)

(Cancel)

Figure 8-4 Add Printer Dialog Box

2. In the text box, you type the location of the printer driver file,
typically:
H:\WIN\UTIL

8-7

IIIII Using the Control Panel
3. Select the Ok command button.
MS-Windows displays a dialog box, listing the printers available in the
directory you specify.
4. From the list box, select a printer.
The name of the corresponding printer driver file is displayed in the
Printer File text box of the dialog box.
See Table 8-1 for information on selecting the LA75 and the LN03 PLUS
printers.
5. Select the Add command button.
MS-Windows displays a dialog box.
6. Select the No command button.
Selecting the No command button is the normal procedure. However, if
you want to duplicate this printer driver file, type the drive or name of
an existing directory you want, and select the Yes command button.
MS-Windows updates the WIN.INI file to include information for the
new printer driver. However, only the WIN.INI file used when you start
MS-Windows is updated. If the printer is added to the network and is
used by more than one user, the WIN.INI file of each user needs to be
updated.
Table 8-1

Selecting Printers

Type of Printer

Select

Driver filename
is ...

LA7S

Digital LA7SDEC

LASO.DRV

LNO 3 PLUS with CG· Times Cartridge

Digital LN03PLUS

LN03PLUS.DRV

LN03 PLUS with ISO/PC Cartridge

Digital LN03DEC

LN03PLUS.DRV

LA7S to emulate IBM Proprinter

LA7SSTD

LA7S.DRV

LN03 PLUS with ISO/PC Cartridge to
emulate IBM Proprinter

Digital LN03STD

LA7S.DRV

8-8

Using the Control Panel 11111

Adding a New Printer Driver File
Your system administrator adds new printer driver files from the distribution
diskette that comes with a new printer. This section includes information
your system administrator needs to add a new printer driver file.
To add a new printer driver file to the directory containing the other
MS-Windows printer driver files:
1. Select the Add New Printer command from the Installation menu.
MS-Windows displays a dialog box that prompts you to insert into Drive
A the diskette with the printer driver file you want to add, or to select
an alternate drive/directory. It displays H:\WIN\UTIL in the text box.
Select Drive A by typing in the text box:
A:\

2. Insert the diskette with the printer files.
See the printer hardware documentation to determine which diskette
and which directory contains the printer driver files (.DRV).
3. Select the Ok command button.
MS-Windows displays a dialog box, listing the printers available on the
diskette.
4. From the list box, select a printer.
After you select a printer, the name of the corresponding printer driver
file displays in the printer file text box at the right.
5. Select the Add command button.
A dialog box prompts you for the name of the drive or directory to
which you want to copy the printer driver file.
6. In the text box, type the alias for H:\WIN\UTIL, the drive and directory
to which the printer driver file is to be copied. Drive H: must be
connected to the read/write alias for the system files.
7. Select the Yes command button.
MS-Windows updates the WIN.INI file to include information for the
new printer driver. However, only the WIN.INI file used by
MS-Windows when you started MS-Windows is updated. If the printer is
added to the network, and is used by more than one user, the WIN.INI
file of each user needs to be updated.

8-9

11111

Using the Control Panel

Removing a Printer
To remove a printer from MS-Windows:
1. Select the Delete Printer command from the Installation menu.
MS-Windows displays the Delete Printer dialog box. The list box shows
all the printers currently in your WIN.INI file. Figure 8-5 shows the
Delete Printer dialog box.

Printer File:

Delete Printer

LASI.DRU

LHI3DEC

LPT3:

( Delete) ( Cancel)
Figure 8-5 Delete Printer Dialog Box
2. Select the printer you want to remove from the list box.
The file name of the corresponding printer driver file is displayed in
the text box.
3. Select the Delete command button.
MS-Windows displays a dialog box.
4. Select the No command button.
NOTE

When you select the No command button, the printer name is
deleted from the WIN.INI file, but the printer driver file is not. By
selecting the No command button, you can use the procedure
discussed in "Adding an Existing Printer Driver File," because the
printer driver is still stored in the directory.

8-10

Using tbe Control Panel

IIIII

Some printer drivers support more than one printer model. In this case, the
printers share the print driver file. If other printers share the printer driver
file that is displayed in the Delete Printer dialog box, that printer driver file
is not deleted, because it is still used by the other printers.
In this case, MS-Windows displays a dialog box, indicating the shared printer
driver file is not deleted. However, it is disassociated from the selected
printer in the WIN.INI file.

Adding a New Font
To add a font file (.FON) to MS-Windows, use the Add New Font command
from the Installation menu. This command works Similarly to the Add New
Printer command.
When you select the Add New Font command (or the Delete Font command),
you must specify where the font files are located. MS-Windows lists the available fonts, including the font names, the font sizes, and the set numbers.
The set number is based on the devices that the font is primarily designed to
be used with.
Set 1

Set 1 fonts are stroke fonts. They can be used for the screen, a printer, or a
plotter device of any resolution.
Set 2

Set 2 fonts are raster fonts. They are designed for a screen resolution of 640
X 200, such as a workstation with the IBM Color Graphics Adapter or compatible adapter card.

8-11

IIIII Using tbe Control Panel
Set 3
Set 3 fonts are raster fonts. They are designed primarily for a screen resolution of 640 X 350, such as a workstation with an IBM Enhanced Color
Graphics Adapter or Hercules Graphics Card. These fonts are also used by
VAXmate.

Set 4
Set 4 fonts are raster fonts. They are designed primarily for printers in 60 dpi
resolution:
• LA75 in STn mode (landscape mode)
• Okidata 92,93, 192, 193, standard models (portrait mode)
• Okidata 92, 93, 192, 193, standard and IBM-compatible models (landscape mode)
• Epson MX-BO, FX-BO, and compatibles (landscape mode)
• IBM Graphics (landscape mode)
• IBM Proprinter (landscape mode)
• Star Micronics SG-I0 (landscape mode)

Set 5
Set 5 fonts are raster fonts. They are designed for printers in the 120 dpi
resolution:
• LA75 in STn mode (portrait mode)
• Okidata 92, 93, 192, 193, IBM-compatible models (portrait mode)
• Epson MX-BO, FX-BO, and compatibles (portrait mode)
• IBM Graphics (portrait mode)
• IBM Proprinter (portrait mode)
• Star Micronics SG-I0 (portrait mode)
In addition to these fonts, an application can list device fonts. These are the
fonts provided by a device. For example, on print-wheel printers, font names
correspond to wheel names. These fonts cannot be added or deleted with the
Control Panel, but they can be listed when the output device is selected.
When a raster font does not correspond to the screen, MS-Windows can substitute a screen font in the· same class.
8-12

Using the Control Panel 11111

NOTE

Because applications handle fonts differently, some applications
may not list all fonts.
Fonts have names that represent their different characteristics. Table 8-2 lists
and describes the fonts that are included on H:\WIN\UTIL.

Table 8-2

Fonts on the Fonts Disk

Font

Description

DECterm

(Raster font.) A fixed-width font (characters having uniform widths)
without serifs.

Helv

(Raster font.) A proportional font (characters having varying widths)
without serifs.

Courier

(Raster font.) A fixed-width font with serifs.

Tms Rmn

(Raster font.) A proportional font with serifs.

Roman

(Stroke font.) A proportional font with serifs.

Modern

(Stroke font.) A proportional font without serifs.

Script

(Stroke font.) A proportional font of slanted characters formed from
nearly continuous curved lines.

Table 8-3 describes the fonts that are not included on H:\WIN\UTIL, but you
can see them in some applications. These fonts cannot be added or deleted.
Table 8-3

Fonts Not on the Fonts Disk

Font

Description

System

(Raster font.) A fixed-width font designed for the screen.

Terminal

(Raster font.) A fixed-width font that is the same as the font your workstation displays from MS-DOS.

Deleting a Font
To delete a font file to MS-Windows, use the Delete Font command from the
Installation menu. This command works Similarly to the Delete Printer
command.

8-13

IIIII Using the Control Panel
Using the Setup Menu
The Setup menu has four commands:
• Connections, which lets you assign or change printer port connections
• Printer, which lets you select the default printer
• Communications Port, which lets you select a serial communications
port and select parameters, such as baud rate, word length, parity, and
stop bits
• Network Terminal Services, which lets you select network services for
your communication ports
Figure 8-6 shows the Setup menu commands.

Communications Port ...
Network Terminal Services ...
Figure 8-6

Setup Menu Commands

Changing Printer Connections
MS-Windows needs to know to which communications port your printer is
connected. To set or change the port for your printers, use the Connections
command.
For example, to move your printer from the communications port LPTl to
LPT2, use the Control Panel to change the printer connections setting.

8-14

Using the Control Panel

IIIII

To change printer connections:
1. Select the Connections command from the Setup menu. MS-Windows
displays the Connections dialog box. Figure 8-7 shows the Connections
dialog box.

.....

Printer

~~~~~~~~

LH03DEC

LPTJ:

lilill

________________________~~~

(

)

Figure 8-7

Connection
~~--------~~

LPTJ:
~C~O~M~1~:

__________~~~

(Cancel )
Connections Dialog Box

2. From the Printer list box, select the printer you want to change. The
current communications port assignment for the selected printer is
displayed in the Connection list box, located at the right.
3. From the Connections list box, select one of the communications ports.
4. Select the Ok command button.
NOTE

You can redirect an LPT port only to the SPP (Serial Printer Port)
or to a network print device.

Changing the Default Printer
When you execute a Print command, MS-Windows prints the file on the
default printer. To select the default printer and to set its output modes, use
the Printer command.
Printer output modes are printer-specific settings, such as portrait mode
(normal vertical page orientation) or landscape mode (horizontal page orientation). The Printer command is useful when you have both local and remote
printers, or both dot matrix and character printers, connected to your communications ports.

8-15

IIIII Using the Control Panel
To change the default printer:
1. Select the Printer command from the Setup menu.

MS-Windows displays the Default Printer dialog box. It lists all the available printers and their current communications port connections. Figure
8-8 shows the Default Printer dialog box.

Default Printer
I

(

LHU3DEC

)

LPT3:

(Cancel)
Figure 8-8

Default Printer Dialog Box

2. From the list box, select the printer name.
3. Select the Ok command button.
MS-Windows displays the Output Mode dialog box, containing the mode
settings specific to the printer you selected.
4. To select another output mode, select from the options for printer
output or answer the questions in the dialog box.
5. Select the Ok command button.
The printer you select becomes the default printer.

Changing the Communications Port
To select COM! and COM2 settings, including baud rate, stop bits, parity,
word length, and the retry (print/send) option, use the Communications Port
command.
For example, MS-Windows' print spool uses these settings to configure the
communication port before printing. (COM! and COM2 are serial communications ports and can be used only with serial printers and serial communication deVices.)

8-16

Using the Control Panel

IIIII

To select a communications port:
1. Select the Communications Port command from the Setup menu.
MS-Windows displays the Communication Settings dialog box. Figure
8-9 shows the Communications Settings dialog box.
CORRunications Settings
Port

@ k!ll!.1.;.

Baud Rate:

[12110

0 COM2:

[

o Even

06
0 Odd

0 7

Parity
Stop Bits

01.5

Handshake

0 Hardware

Word length

(

Figure 8-9

04 05

@Hone

@ Hone

(Cancel)

Communications Settings Dialog Box

2. Select the communications port COM1 or COM2.
The settings for the selected communications port are displayed in the
dialog box.
3. Select the rest of the settings.
The settings for baud rate, word length, stopbits, and handshake
(protocol) should be the same as those set for your printer or device.
The protocol, "Hardware," is equivalent to XONjXOFF. See your
printer or device documentation for the proper communications port
settings.
4. Select the Ok command button. The communications port you select is
set up.
NOTE

This command does not configure or set up the communication
hardware. It gives information about the communication hardware
settings to MS-Windows and the applications using the
communications ports. When you set up a communications device
or printer, make sure the communications port settings are
configured according to the serial communications instructions
supplied by your printer or device manufacturer before you try to
print.

8-17

IIIII Using the Control Panel
Selecting Network Terminal Services
To select terminal services for the workstation's communication ports, use
the Network Terminal Services command. This command lets you redirect the
COMl and COM2 communications ports to the selected terminal services.
Any application using COMl or COM2 is redirected over the local area network to the specified network terminal service.
To select a network terminal service:
1. Select the Network Terminal Services command from the Setup menu.
MS-Windows displays a Network Terminal Services dialog box. It lists
the currently available network services. Figure 8-10 shows the Network
Terminal Services dialog box.

lietl~OI"k

Terminal Services

You can assign communications ports 1 and 2 to the services listed
below_ These are the only currently available set"vices. Pt"eviously
assigned services may be unavailable at this time.
Port

Set"vices

~mwe
o :-Aft ER

i 1~~¥~kR

I~~¥~~~

iiiilirl

RAIiGER

(

)

Figure 8-10

r-Reset
1
--'

I Cancel)

Network Terminal Services Dialog Box

NOTE

For most systems, you can access a maximum of 10 services. A
warning box is displayed if the service table has overflowed.
To add more services, you must change the table size in the
Network Terminal Services (LAT) driver.
2. From the Port list box, select the COM1 or COM2 communications port.
The current terminal services for that port are displayed.

8-18

Using the Control Panel 11111

3. From the Services list box, select a terminal service.
4. Select the Ok command button.
You can redirect communications ports to a network terminal service for any
standard application that runs in a window, such as, the VT220 terminal
emulator. Using the configuration shown in Figure 8-10, you can connect the
VT220 emulator to the COM2 port; however, all communications for the
VT220 emulator will use the network terminal service called RANGER. For
more information about network terminal services, see Chapter 9.
When you run an application that uses COMI or COM2, the selected terminal service is redirected if the following conditions are met:
• The Network Terminal Service driver (LAT) was installed prior to starting MS-Windows. This driver lists all available services, normally
assigned by the key diskette.
• The redirected port is COM! or COM2. Only COMI and COM2 can be
redirected.
• The mode of transmission is computer to computer, and does not use a
modem. Only applications that do not use modem control signals to
control the flow of data can be redirected.
• No more than four Network Terminal Services are active, including redirected and direct connections.
• A terminal services name is present in the WIN.INI file for the serial
communication device being used. You cannot select a terminal service
not listed in the Services list box.
• The terminal service is available. This availability is dynamic. If a terminal service is selected for a communications port, the terminal service
is assigned to that communications port only as long as terminal service
is available to the network. If the terminal service becomes unavailable
to the network, it is no longer assigned to the communications port.
NOTE

Even if COMI and COM2 hardware is not installed, redirection
over the local area network can occur, because the redirection is
done by software.

8-19

IIIII Using the Control Panel
Using the Preferences Menu
The Preferences menu has four commands:
• Screen Colors, which lets you adjust shades on your screen
• Keyboard Settings, which lets you change settings such as keyc1ick and
autorepeat
• Mouse, which lets you swap the function of the left and right mouse
buttons
• Country Settings, which lets you select country-specific user preferences
Figure 8-11 shows the Preferences menu commands.

Screen Colot·s ...
Keyboard Settings ...
Mouse ...
C
Figure 8-11

Preferences Menu Commands

Changing Screen Colors
To adjust the shades of the components in a window, use the Screen Colors
command. These components are:
• Window background
• Window text
• Scroll bars
• Active (selected) title bar
• Inactive (unselected) title bar
• Title bar text
• Window frame (the thin border around the outside of the window)

8-20

Using the Control Panel

IIIII

• Menu bar
• Menu text
• Screen background (including the icon area)
To change the shade of a component in a window:
1. Select the Screen Colors command from the Preferences menu.
MS-Windows displays the Screen Colors dialog box. Figure 8-12 shows
the Screen Colors dialog box.
NOTE

Set your screen to have contrasting text and background colors.
Otherwise, your screen could look blank.

SalQple

Screen Colors

19m.

!ext
Scroll Bars
Actiue Title Bar
Inactiue Title Bar

!~lnlJ!lW

Actlve

Hue
Bright
Color

Figure 8-12

Screen Colors Dialog Box

2. From the Screen Colors list box, select the part of the screen for which
you want to change the shade.
The current settings for Hue, Bright, and Color of the selected
component in the window are displayed in the scroll bars. The mixture
of these three settings for the selected component result in the current
shade displayed in the Sample area.
To change the shade of a component in the window, change the settings
for Hue, Bright, and Color.

8-21

11111

Using the Control Panel

3. To change a setting for Hue, Bright, or Color:
a. Move the cursor to the scroll bar by clicking on the scroll bar or by
pressing the Tab key until the scroll box blinks in the desired scroll
bar.
b. Scroll to the right or to the left to change the setting.
With the mouse, click on the arrows or drag the scroll box in the
scroll bar.
With the keyboard, press the right and left arrow keys to change
settings in small increments, or press the Pg Up or Pg Dn keys to
move across the scroll bar more quickly.
As you scroll, the Sample area dynamically shows the changing shade

of the selected window component.
c. Select another scroll bar until the desired shade is displayed in the
Sample area.
d. Change the shades of all other items in the Screen Colors dialog box.
e. When you finish changing screen colors, select the Ok command
button.
When you select the Ok command button, the settings are recorded in
the WIN.INI file, and the dialog box is removed from the screen.

Changing Keyboard Settings
To change keyboard features, use the Keyboard Settings command. These features include:
• Keyclick volume (No sound, Soft, Intermediate, Loud)
The default setting is Intermediate.
• Autorepeat (enable or disable)
The default setting is autorepeat enabled.
• Lock selection (Caps Lock or Shift Lock)
The default setting is Caps Lock.
This selects the function of the Lock key.

8-22

Using the Control Panel

IIIII

When you type a key with the Caps Lock selected, uppercase letters are
used for the alphabetic keys, but the lower character on the
numeric/symbolic keys are used. To clear the lock function momentarily, press the Shift key.
When you type a key with the Shift Lock selected, uppercase letters are
used for the alphabetic keys, and the top character on the
numeric/symbol keys are used.
In either case, pressing the Lock key turns on the keyboard lock indicator light. To override the lock function, press the Lock key again. The
lock indicator light turns off.
To change keyboard settings:
1. Select the Keyboard Settings command from the Preferences menu.
MS-Windows displays the Keyboard Settings dialog box. Figure 8-13
shows the Keyboard Settings dialog box.

Keyboa~d

Settings

Keyboa~d

in use: U.S.A.

Keyclick uolullle a Ho sound
Soft
@ I nterlllediate
aloud
Autorepeat
@ Enabled
Disabled
lock selection @ Caps
Shift

a
a

(

)

Figure 8-13

( Reset)

(Cancel )

Keyboard Settings Dialog Box

2. Select the settings you want.

8-23

IIIII Using the Control Panel
3. Select the Ok command button.
The keyboard settings for the keyclick volume and autorepeat are in
effect for your workstation, even when you are not running
MS-Windows.
When you change a keyboard feature, the new selection affects the
keyboard, and MS-Windows enters the new selection into the WIN.INI
file. The changes are effective immediately and remain in effect until
you change them.
The default settings are used when:
• You run MS-Windows for the first time and have not made any changes
to the keyboard preference features.
• The WIN .INI file is not present, or the information about the keyboard
preference features has been removed from the WIN .INI file with a text
editor.

Changing Mouse Settings
To swap the function of the left and right mouse buttons, use the Mouse
command. The default setting is the left mouse button for performing the
mouse actions of clicking, double-clicking, and dragging.
To swap the functions of the left and right mouse buttons:
1. Select the Mouse command from the Preferences menu.
MS-Windows displays the Mouse Options dialog box. Figure 8-14 shows
the Mouse Options dialog box.

Mouse Options
~left/right ~ouse buttons swapped
(

Figure 8-14

8-24

)

(Cancel)

Mouse Options Dialog Box

Using the Control Panel

IIIII

2. Click on the check box.
An X is displayed in the check box, showing that the functions of the

right and left mouse buttons will be swapped.
3. Click on the Ok command button.
The functions of the left and right mouse buttons are swapped. Until
you swap the functions of the left and right mouse buttons again, and
remove the X from the check box, you must use the right mouse button
when using any mouse action.

Changing Country Settings
To specify country-specific information, such as the formats for date and
time, use the Country Settings command. This information can then be used
by the MS-Windows applications you run.
NOTE

All applications you run do not automatically access this
information. Access depends on how the application interfaces
with MS-Windows.
To change country settings:
1. Select the Country Settings command from the Preferences menu.
MS-Windows displays the Country Settings dialog box. Figure 8-15
shows the Country Settings dialog box.

8-25

11111

Using the Control Panel

Country Settings
11_.... '

Itrance
Spain
Italy
Switzerland
Date Format
(!JMDY
ODMY

P-

() YMD

Separator: [ZJ

r Time Format
@ 12 hour

11 :59®CJ 23:59~

024 hoUl"

Separator: [J

Number Format
1000:
Decimal digits:C[J
Decimal: [J
Leading Zero
List:

GJ o

CUI"rency Forlllat
( Ok ) t Reset ) (Cancel) _ Symbol:
U ,~\ Prefix

Figure 8·15

() Suffix

Country Settings Dialog Box

For example, the default setting for the date format in the U.S. country
setting is month/day/year. You can use day/month/year or day-monthyear.
4. Select the Ok command button.
The country settings you selected are in effect.

8-26

Chapter 9
Using Terminal
Emulators With
Your Workstation

This chapter provides a brief overview of three methods of connecting your
workstation to a host computer:
• VT220 terminal emulator
• VT240 terminal emulator
• SETHOST MS-DOS command
A terminal emulator is an application that lets you use your workstation to
access a host computer as if you were using a terminal. When you use a
terminal emulator, your workstation keyboard and screen behave like a
DIGITAL terminal.
The VT220 and VT240 terminal emulator applications behave like VT52,
VT100, or VT200 7 and 8-bit control terminals that support both DEC and
ISO Latin-l character sets.
The MS-DOS SETHOST command is a network utility that performs terminal
emulation of a VTI02 7-bit control terminal that only supports the line drawing character set.

9-1

IIIII Using Terminal Emulators With Your Workstation
Table 9-1 compares the three emulators and their features.
Table 9-1

Workstation Emulator Comparison Table

Feature

VT220

VT240

SETHOST

ReGIS Graphics

Yes

Runs in a window(s)

Yes

Supports multiple simultaneous sessions

No'

Yes

Accesses hosts on a local area network+

Yes

Accesses hosts on a wide area DEC net
network+

Yes

Can use a serial port

Yes

• Single session only. but can run multiple copies of VT220 emulators simultaneously in differ·
ent windows.
t Uses the ThinWire Ethernet port.

9-2

Chapter 10
Using the VT220
Terminal Emulator

The VT220 terminal emulator is an MS-Windows application that offers many
Set-Up parameters or selections you can change or set depending on your
needs. These selections can be saved in a file the emulator reads when it
starts.
Wherever the words VT220 emulator are used, it means the VT220 terminal
emulator for the workstation.
The VT220 emulator allows you to:
• Put the VT220 emulator application on temporary hold while you
switch to another application
• Receive or send information to or from a host using files
• Save and recall Set-Up selection settings using Set-Up configuration files
• Use MS-Windows Clipboard commands
This chapter covers:
• Starting the VT220 emulator
• Using the VT220 emulator window
• Leaving the VT220 emulator

10-1

IIIII Using the VT220 Terminal Emulator
Starting the VT220 Emulator
Start the Vf220 emulator either by:
• Expanding the VT220 emulator icon (a small terminal) in the icon area
into the work area
• Using the Run command from the File menu in the MS-DOS Executive
window
To do this:
1. Select the Run command.
2. Type VT220 in the dialog box.
3. Click on the Ok command button.
Your workstation is emulating a VT220 terminal, and your host login
information is displayed.
NOTE
If your login information is not displayed, see your system

administrator.

Using Multiple VT220 Emulators
You can run more than one VT220 emulator. You might want to do this if
you are:
• Editing a file in one Vf220 emulator and want to access or monitor
your mail using another Vf220 emulator
• Compiling a program in one Vf220 emulator and want to edit a memo
using another VT220 emulator
When you start another VT220 emulator, the title bar displays square brackets next to the VT220 emulator title. A number is displayed in these brackets
to indicate the emulator session you are running. These brackets only display
if you are using more than one VT220 emulator.

10-2

Using the VT220 Terminal Emulator

IIIII

Scrolling in the Emulator Window
If you need to view more information than can be displayed in an emulator
window, use these keys:
( Clrl/Find )

To scroll to the left

( Clrl/Selecl )

To scroll to the right

( Clrl/Prev )

To scroll up

( Ciri/Nexi )

To scroll down

Using the VT220 Emulator System Menu Commands
The VT220 emulator adds the following commands to the standard System
menu commands:
• Set-Up
• Mark
• Copy
• Paste
• About

The Set-Up Command
You can start or exit from the VT220 emulator Set-Up utility by selecting the
Set-Up command. Chapter 12 discusses the Set-Up utility.

10-3

IIIII Using the VT220 Terminal Emulator
The Mark, Copy, and Paste Commands
The Vf220 emulator lets you transfer information between itself and the
MS-Windows Clipboard application. You copy the information from the emulator to the Clipboard or paste information from the Clipboard to the emulator as if you typed it. When you send information to the Clipboard, the
characters are interpreted as ISO Latin -1 characters.
To copy text to the Clipboard:
1. Select Mark from the Vf220 System menu.
The word "Mark" is displayed in parentheses next to the VT220
emulator title in the title bar. A special vertical bar, the insertion point,
is also displayed in the window.
2. Drag the insertion point across the text you want to copy. This marks
the text.
3. Select Copy to move the marked text to the Clipboard.
NOTE

Marking is disabled whenever a key is typed, or when Mark is
selected a second time.
You can paste from the Clipboard at any time. The pasted text is sent to the
host. Text is not displayed in the window unless the host echoes it, or Local
Echo is enabled in Set-Up.

The About Command
The About command displays the version number of the VT220 emulator
application.

Leaving the VT220 Emulator
To leave the VT220 emulator select one of the following commands from the
Vf220 System menu:
• The Icon command
Selecting the Icon command shrinks the VT220 emulator to an icon
without exiting from the emulator application.
• The Close command
Selecting the Close command exits you from the Vf220 emulator.
Before using this command, you should log off the host system.

10-4

Chapter 11
Using the VT220
Emulator Keyboard

This chapter:
• Shows a diagram of the workstation keyboard.
• Describes the differences between the workstation keyboard for the
VT220 emulator and an actual VT220 terminal keyboard.

The VT220 Emulator Keyboard
The layout of the VT220 emulator keys on a workstation keyboard is identical to the emulated terminal except for:
• Labels for some keys
• Location of the' , -, <, and >, and Compose key
The labels referred to are those on the standard United States legend strip. All
countries are supplied with a separate emulator legend strip and should
ensure that this is used with the VT220 emulator.

11-1

IIIII Using the VT220 Emulator Keyboard
Labels
Some labels for the workstation top-row function keys differ from those on a
VT220 terminal keyboard. These keys are indicated in Figure 11-1.

DDDDD

DDDD

DDDDDDDDDDDDDD
DDDDDDDDDDDDDO
DDDDDDDDDDDDDD

c:::JDDDDDDDDDDDCJ
CJI

Figure 11-1

DDD DDDD
DDD DDDD

DDD

DODD

rgBO

Workstation Keyboard

The VT220 emulator keys function exactly as they do for the VT220 terminal.
However, the workstation keyboard has and uses the Alt key.
For more information about the Alt key, see Appendix D.

Top-Row Function Keys
Most of the top-row function keys have functions assigned to them by your
application software. Refer to your application software documentation for
their use.
This section describes keys with fixed meanings for the VT220 emulator. The
labels in parentheses refer to the labels on the standard United States legend
strip.
Fl (Hold)

Pressing the Fl (Hold) key freezes the screen display and
stops any new characters from being displayed. Pressing
the Fl (Hold) key again returns the emulator to normal
operation.
Pressing the F2 (Print Screen) key sends the screen text
to the printer.
Pressing Ctrl/F2 (Print Screen) sets or resets Auto Print
Mode.

11-2

l !sing fhl' VT.2.2() Emulator KI'),board

IIIII

F3 (Set-Up)

Pressing the F3 (Set-Up) key allows you to enter and exit
Set-Up.

F4 (Data/Talk)

Used when the optional integral modem is installed or if
an external modem is used. For more information, refer
to the VAXmate Modem User's Guide.
Note: The integral modem may not be available for your
country.

F5 (Break)

Pressing the F5 (Break) key transmits a break if you enabled Break in Set-Up. You may use it with other key
combinations when the optional integral modem is installed. For more information, refer to the VAXmate
Modem User's Guide.

Pressing the Shift/F5 keys initiates a communications line
disconnect.
Pressing the Ctrl/F5 keys sends an answerback message as
defined in Set-Up.
Note: The integral modem may not be available for your
country.
FIl (ESC)

Pressing FIl (ESC) generates an escape character when
in VT52 and VT100 modes. In VT200 modes, Fll is a
function key.

F12 (BS)

Pressing F12 (BS) generates a backspace character when
in VT52 and VT100 modes. In VT200 modes, F12 is a
function key.

F13 (LF)

Pressing F13 (LF) generates a line feed character when in
VT52 and VT100 modes. In VT200 modes, F13 is a function key.

11-3

Chapter 12
Using Set-Up With
the VT220 Emulator

This chapter describes:
• How to enter and exit Set-Up
• How to make or change Set-Up settings
• Each Set-Up screen and all the settings

Entering Set-Up
The VT220 emulator offers several Set-Up selections that affect such settings
as tab stops, screen background, or column width.
To enter Set-Up either:
• Press the F3 (Set-Up) key
• Select the Set-Up command from the Set-Up System menu

12-1

111I1

Using Set- Up With the VT220 Emulator

Understanding the VT220 Set-Up Screens
Mter you enter Set-Up the VT220 emulator displays Screen 12-1, the Actions
Screen, the first of eight Set-Up screens. For this discussion the Actions
Screen is being treated as a general example of all eight screens.

Tabs
Set Default Set-Up Parameters
Send File
Receive File

Receive File: Idle
Send File: I dIe
Printer: None
Modem: Not Selected
Telephone: Talk Mode - Manual Answer
Insert/Replace: Replace
Communications: Comm Port 1 - Data Leads Only

Screen 12-1

VT220 Set-Up

Each Set-Up screen displays:
• A title bar with a Set-Up System menu in the first line.
• A menu bar in the next two lines of the screen with the name of the
currently selected screen highlighted. You select a screen by clicking
on its name.
• The current selections and settings in the mid-section of the screen.
Some selections are actions that can be taken, while others represent
settings with different values. These selections vary depending on the
selected screen.
• A status section in the bottom half of the the screen.

12-2

Using Set- Up With the VT220 Emulator

IIIII

Table 12-1 describes each of the Set-Up screens.
Table 12-1

VT220 Set-Up Screens

Set-Up Screen

Description

Actions

Contains selections relating to clearing the screen and resetting
the emulator, saving and recalling Set-Up settings, and sending
or receiving files.

Communications

Contains selections for defining the communications environment, such as speed, parity, and disconnect.

Display

Contains selections for defining screen display, such as columns, cursor style, and background.

General

Contains commonly used general operating selections, such as
local echo, character sets, and terminal ID.

Keyboard

Contains selections for defining keyboard operating characteristics, such as margin bell, break, and answerback.

Printer

Contains selections for defining printer operations, such as
print size or type of printer.

Tabs

Contains selections for defining the tab settings.

Telephone

Lets you determine how telephone answering is done. You can
also emer the telephone numbers you want to use with the
modem.

From each Set-Up screen you can:
• View the current selections and settings
• Change the current settings to suit your needs
• Access any of the other Set-Up screens from the menu
All settings can be saved in or recalled from Set-Up files. You can also recall
the factory default settings.

12-3

IIIII Using Set-Up With the VT220 Emulator
The VT220 Status Section
The status section displays information relating to the state of operations you
initiate through various Set-Up selections.
Ail screens for the VT220 emulator have a bottom section displaying the
current status for:
• Receiving or sending a file
- Idle or In Progress
• Printer
- Printer type and Mode
• Modem usage (valid only if the optional integral modem is installed,
and you selected Modem Control)
- Selected or Not selected
• Telephone modes (valid only if the optional integral modem is
installed, and you selected Modem Control)
- Manual or Automatic Answer
• Insert/Replace mode
• Communications
- Comm Port 1, Comm Port 2, or Network Terminal Service
NOTE

The VT220 status area is a reporting area only.

Changing Settings in VT220 Set-Up
You can use either the mouse or the keyboard in VT220 Set-Up. This section
describes only how to use the mouse. For information on how to use the
keyboard to change settings, see Appendix D.

12-4

Using Set-Up With the VT220 Emulator 11111

Using the Mouse in Set-Up
To select a Set-Up screen and change a setting:
1. Select the desired screen from the menu area.
2. After the desired Set-Up screen is displayed, click on the selection you
want to view or change.
If a drop-down menu is displayed, go to the next step; otherwise release
the mouse button.

3. Drag the pointer to the desired setting and release the mouse button.
NOTE

Some settings take effect immediately; others take effect when you
exit Set-Up.

Exiting Set-Up
To exit Set-Up either:
• Press the F3 (Set-Up) key again
• Select the Close command from the Set-Up System menu

Using Set-Up Table Information
The following sections describe the Set-Up screens and the settings you can
change.
The information for each Set-Up screen is organized as follows:
• A description of the Set-Up screen
• The VT220 screen
• A table containing:
- Selection definitions
- Setting descriptions for each selection
- Default settings

12-5

IIIII Using Set-Up With the VT220 Emulator
Actions Screen
Whenever you enter VT220 Set-Up, it displays the Actions Set-Up screen.

/----------------------------------------------------------------------UT221l EfIlulatot·

"-""

- -

Set Default Set-Up Paraflleters
Send File
Receiue File
Receiue File: Idle
Send File: Idle
Printer: Hone
Modefll: Hot Selected
Telephone: Talk Mode - Manual Answer
Insert/Replace: Replace
COfllfllunications: COfllfll Port 1 - Data Leads Only

Screen 12-2

VT220 Actions

Table 12-2 defines the Actions Set-Up selections.

12-6

" •. ' -.

Using Set-Up With the VT220 Emulator

Table 12-2

IIIII

VT220 Actions Set-Up

Selection

Function

Reset Terminal

Resets many terminal operating settings to the power up default state.
Does not affect communication, NRC (National Replacement
Characters) and multinational modes, or user-defined keys. It
takes effect immediately.

Clear Display

Clears and sends the cursor to the upper-left corner of the
screen.

Clear
Communications

Clears communication lines immediately and stops any print
operation in progress. It also exits printer controller mode.
Does not affect LAT communications.

Recall Set-Up
Parameters

Replaces all existing settings with values you saved in a default file called DEFAULT.220 or in a file you created.
Clears the dialog box from the Actions Set-Up screen and
returns the cursor to the upper-left corner of the Actions
Set-Up screen.

Save Set-Up
Parameters

Saves the Set-Up settings in a default file called
DEFAULT.220 or in a file you can specify.
Clears the dialog box from the Actions Set-Up screen and
returns the cursor to the upper-left corner of the Actions
Set-Up screen.

Set Default Set-Up
Parameters

Replaces all current Set-Up settings with factory default
settings.
Clears the dialog box from the Actions Set-Up screen and
returns the cursor to the upper-left corner of the Actions
Set-Up screen.

12-7

IIIII Using Set-Up With the VT220 Emulator
Table 12-2

VT220 Actions Set-Up (cont.)

Selection

Function

Send File

Allows you to send characters to a host from an MS-DOS text
file as though you entered them from a keyboard.

Open File

Displays a dialog box and asks you to enter a file name.
When you open a file from the dialog box, sending begins
after you select Ok and exit Set-Up. When the file is opened
this setting is displayed in a lighter shade until the file is
closed.

Close File

Displayed in a lighter shade until YOll open a file. Closes and
saves the file.

Receive File

Controls the receiving of characters from a host into a specified file.

Open File

Displays a dialog box and asks YOll to enter the name of the
file that is to receive the characters. If a file of the same
name already exists, it is replaced.

Open File and
Append

This is identical to Open File except that text is appended to
a file of the same name if it exists. If not, a new file is
created.

Close File

File logging is ended and the file is closed.

File logging resumes.

Off

File logging is suspended but the file remains open.

12-8

Using Set- Up With the VT220 Emulator

IIIII

Communications Screen
The Communications Set-Up screen lets you define the communications environment between the terminal and the host.
Normally a terminal can only connect to a host using a serial port. Your
workstation VT220 emulator allows you to connect to a host using either:
• A serial port
• Network Terminal Services/the ThinWire Ethernet port

Pot'tltietwot-k
fh~t udYi,;

Disconnect Delay
XOFF Point

Speed
Data Bits and Parity
Stop Bits

Receiue File: Idle
Sef,d File: Idle
Printet-: tione
Modem: tiot Selected
Telephone: Talk Mode - Manual Answer
Insert/Replace: Replace
Communications: Comm POt-t 1 - Data Leads Only

Screen 12-3

VT220 Communications

Table 12-3 defines the Communications Set-Up selections and, where applicable, the settings.

12-9

11111

Using Set-Up With the VT220 Emulator

Table 12-3

VT220 Communications Set-Up

Selection

Function

Port/Network

Selects the type of port used for communication with a
host, either serial or Network Terminal Services commu·
nications.
If you select serial communications, Network Terminal
Service is displayed in a lighter shade on your screen.

Comm Port 1: Data
Leads Only (default)

Select when you connect to the host using serial communications.

Comm Port 1: Full
Modem Control

Select if your workstation is connected to the host
through the communications port and an external modem
requiring modem control is used.

Comm Port 2: Data
Leads Only

Select when you connect to the host using serial communications.

Comm Port 2: Full
Modem Control

Select if your workstation is connected to the host
through the communications port and an external modem
requiring modem control is used.
Note: The VT220 emulator may not function correctly
with certain external modems due to inconsistencies of
timing under MS-Windows. To avoid problems using
external modems, use the VT240 emulator.

Comm Port 2:
Integral Modem

Select if the optional integral modem is installed, and the
workstation uses it to communicate with the host.
Note: The integral modem may not be available for your
country.

Network
Communication
Port

Selects connection to Network Terminal Services. You
must be connected to the Network in order to access
these services.
If you have not selected a Network Terminal Service, a
dialog box is displayed listing the available workstation
services. For more information on defining the table size
for these services in the MSNET.lNI, see the VAXmate
System Administrator's Guide.

Click on the service you want to access, then click on
the Ok command button.

12-10

Using Set-Up With the VT220 Emulator 11111

Table 12-3

VT220 Communications Set-Up (cont.)

Selection

Function

Network Terminal
Services

If displayed in a lighter shade. you are lIsing serial communications.
If you set the Network selection under Port/Network, all
items relating to serial communications are displayed in a
lighter shade, and you are connected to services available
under Network Terminal Services.

Disconnect Delay

Selects (when modem control is used) the amount of
time before the workstation disconnects from the communications line if the carrier detect is lost.

2 second delay
( default)

Most countries, except the United Kingdom, use the twosecond delay.

60 Millisecond
delay

The 60 millisecond delay is for use in the United Kingdom.

XOFF Point

Selects the XOFF point or disables the automatic
XON/XOFF tlow control.
For most applications you should set XOFF at 64 or 256.
If you set XOFF greater than 256 and have a buffer overnow problem, set XOFF to the next lower value.

XOFF at 64
(default)

The choices for XOFF are: 64 (default), 256, 512, and
1024.

Disabled

Characters are received continuously from the host. Some
characters may be lost.

Speed

Selects the rate at which characters are received or transmitted. The default is 9600.

Data Bits and Parity

Selects the character format used for communication with
the host computer. The default is 8 bits - No Parity.

Stop Bits

Selects the number of stop bits (lor 2) required for use
by the host port. The default is 1 stop bit.

12-11

IIIII

Using Set-Up With the VT220 Emu/ator

Display Screen
The Display Set-Up screen lets you define screen display characteristics.
~--------------------------------------------------------------------

Blink
Font Size

Receiue File: Idle
Send File: Idle
Printer: Hone
Moden: Hot Selected
Telephone: Talk Mode - Manual Answer
Insert/Replace: Replace
Connunications: Conn Port 1 - Data leads Only

Screen 12-4

VT220 Display

Table 12-4 defines the Display Set-Up selections and, where applicable, the
settings.
Table 12-4

VT220 Display Set-Up

Selection

Function

Columns

Selects an 80- or 132-column screen for text.

80 Columns
(default)

Selects an 80-column screen.

132 Columns

Selects a 132-column screen.

12-12

IIIII

Using the Control Panel

Changing the Cursor Blink Rate
Some applications have a cursor that blinks. The cursor is usually an underscore or insertion point that blinks. The blink rate is the frequency at which
the cursor Hashes.
To change the cursor blink rate with the mouse, do one of the following:
• Click on the right or left scroll arrow.
The scroll box moves as you click on an arrow.
• Drag the scroll box within the scroll bar to the right or to the left.
The vertical cursor below the scroll bar shows the new cursor blink
rate. As you scroll, the blink rate of the vertical cursor changes. The
farther right you scroll, the faster the cursor blinks. The cursor blink
rate stays in effect until you change it again.
To change the cursor blink rate with the keyboard:
1. Press the Tab key to move the cursor to the Cursor Blink section.
2. Press the left arrow or the right arrow key to scroll to the setting you
want.

8-5

~~__~~I~

Setu
Add Hew Printer .. .
Delete Printer .. .
Add Hew Font .. .
Delete Font .. .

Figure 8-3

Installation Menu Commands

Adding and Removing a New Printer
When you first set up MS-Windows, you select the printer or printers you
want to use. To change this selection, use the Add New Printer and the
Delete Printer commands from the Installation Menu.
On the network, you can connect to print servers that generate output in
either landscape or portrait mode. Using the Control Panel, you can select
the default printer mode: landscape or portrait. The printer mode you select
overrides the current mode of the printer.
When you use the Control Panel to add or remove a printer to MS-Windows,
you are actually adding or removing the name of the printer driver file to the
other printer drivers already named in the WIN.INI file of MS-Windows. Only
printers that have their printer driver files named in the WIN.INI file can be
used by MS-Windows and its applications.

8-6

IIIII

Using the Control Panel

After MS-Windows is set up, you can add a printer driver file to MS-Windows
when you want to install:
• An existing printer driver file

The printer driver file is included in the network directory
H:\WIN\UTIL, which stores printer driver files.
• A new printer driver file
The printer driver file is not in the network directory H:\WIN\UTIL.
You install the printer driver file by copying it from the distribution
diskette of a new application to the network directory H:\WIN\UTIL.
After you add a new printer to your system, you must let MS-Windows know
which communications port the printer is connected to before you can use
the printer. To define the communications port, use the Connections command in the Setup menu of the Control Panel.

Adding an Existing Printer Driver File
To add an already existing printer driver file to your system:
1. Select the Add New Printer command from the Installation menu.
MS-Windows displays the Add Printer dialog box, which prompts you to
insert the diskette containing the new printer driver file into Drive A, or
select an alternate drive/directory. Figure 8-4 shows the Add New
Printer dialog box.

Add Pt'inter
Insert the disk with the printer file
you wish to add into drive A, or choose
an alternative drive/directory:
I~

(

Figure 8-4

)
Add New Printer Dialog Box

8-7

IIIII Using the Control Panel
2. In the text box, you typically type the location of the printer driver file:
H:\WIN\UTIL

3. Select the Ok command button.
MS-Windows displays a dialog box, listing the printers available in the
network directory H: \ WIN\ UTIL.
4. From the list box, select a printer.
The name of the corresponding printer driver file is displayed in the
Printer File text box of the dialog box.
5. Select the Add command button.
MS-Windows displays a dialog box.
6. Select the No command button.
A dialog box prompts you to type the name of the drive or directory to
which you want to copy the printer driver file. The default directory, in
this case A:\WIN\STD, is displayed in the text box. This directory
contains the MS-Windows run-time executables.
Selecting the No command button is the normal procedure. However,
to duplicate a separate file containing this printer driver file, type the
drive or name of an existing directory you want, and select the Yes
command button.
MS-Windows updates the WIN.lNI file to include information for the
new printer driver. However, only the WIN.INI file used when you start
MS-Windows is updated. Each user's WIN.lNI file needs to be updated
when a printer is added, even if it is added to the network.

8-8

Using the Control Panel

IIIII

Adding a New Printer Driver File
Your system administrator, if you have one, adds a new printer driver file
from the distribution diskette of a new application.
Otherwise, to add a new printer driver file from the distribution diskette of a
new application to your system:
1. Select the Add New Printer command from the Installation menu.
MS-Windows prompts you with a dialog box to insert the diskette with
the printer driver file you want to add into Drive A, or select an alternate drive/directory.
2. Insert the diskette with the printer files.
Consult your application documentation to determine which diskette
and which directory contains the printer driver (.DRV) files.

3. Select the Ok command button.
MS-Windows displays a dialog box, listing the printers available on the
diskette.
4. From the list box, select a printer.
Mter you select a printer, the name of the corresponding printer driver
file is displayed in the Printer File text box at the right.
S. Select the Add command button.
A dialog box prompts you to type the name of the drive or directory to
which you want to copy the printer driver file. The text box displays
the default network directory A:\WIN\STD.
The printer driver file should be copied to the H:\WIN\UTIL directory.
However, this a read only directory. Copy the printer driver file to this
directory by using a read/write alias.
6. In the text box, type the read/write alias for H:\WIN\UTIL, the drive
and directory to which the printer driver file is to be copied.
7. Select the Ok command button.
8. When prompted, select the Yes command button.
MS-Windows updates the WIN.INI file to include information for the
new printer driver. However, only the WIN.INI file used by
MS-Windows when you started MS-Windows is updated.

8-9

IIIII Using the Control Panel
Removing a Printer
To remove a printer from MS-Windows:
1. Select the Delete Printer command from the Installation menu.
MS-Windows displays the Delete Printer dialog box. The list box shows
all the printers currently in your WIN.INI file. Figure 8-5 shows the
Delete Printer dialog box.

Delete Printer

Printer File:

LA7S.DRU

....

LPT2:
( Delete)
Figure 8-5

( Cancel )

Delete Printer Dialog Box

2. Select the printer you want to remove from the list box.
The file name of the corresponding printer driver file is displayed in
the text box.
3. Select the Delete command button.
MS-Windows displays a dialog box.
4. Select the No command button.
IMPORTANT
When you select the No command button, the printer name is
deleted from the WIN.INI file, but the printer driver file is not
deleted from the network directory H:\WIN\UTIL. By selecting the
No command button, you can use the procedure discussed in
"Adding an Existing Printer Driver File," because the printer driver
is still stored in the directory.

8-10

Using the Control Panel

IIIII

It is recommended that you do not delete the printer driver file. If
you select the Ok command button, the printer driver file is
deleted from the network directory H:\ WIN\UTIL. To add the
printer driver file again, you must follow the more complicated
procedure discussed in "Adding a New Printer Driver File."
Some printer drivers support more than one printer model. In this case, the
printers share the print driver file. If other printers share the printer driver
file that is displayed in the Delete Printer dialog box, that printer driver file
is not deleted, because it is still used by the other printers.
In this case, MS-Windows displays a dialog box, indicating the shared printer
driver file is not deleted. However, it is disassociated from the selected
printer in the WIN .INI file.

Adding a New Font
To add a font file (.FON) to MS-Windows, use the Add New Font command
from the Installation menu. This command works similarly to the Add New
Printer command.
Two types of fonts are provided: raster fonts and stroke (also known as vector) fonts. Raster fonts are generally used only for devices such as dot-matrix
printers or the screen. They are available only in fixed sizes. Raster fonts
look better and may be faster than stroke fonts when drawn on raster devices.
Stroke fonts are typically used if your output is printed.
When you select the Add New Font command (or the Delete Font command),
you must specify where the font files are located. MS-Windows lists the available fonts, including the font names, the font sizes, and the set numbers.
The set number is based on the devices that the font is primarily designed to
be used with.
Set 1
Set 1 fonts are stroke fonts. They can be used for the screen, a printer, or a
plotter device of any resolution.
Set 2
Set 2 fonts are raster fonts. They are primarily designed for a screen resolution of 640 X 200, specifically for the IBM Color Graphics Adapter or a
compatible adapter card.

8-11

IIIII Using the Control Panel
Set 3
Set 3 fonts are raster fonts. They are designed for a screen resolution of 640
X 350, specifically for the IBM Color Graphics Adapter and the Hercules
Graphics Card. These fonts are also used by the printer erTOR 8510 (por·
trait mode).
Set 4
Set 4 fonts are raster fonts. They are designed primarily for printers in 60 dpi
resolution:
• Okidata 92, 93, 192, 193, standard models (portrait mode)
• Okidata 92, 93, 192, 193, standard and IBM-compatible models (landscape mode)
• Epson MX-80, FX-80, and compatibles (landscape mode)
• IBM Graphics (landscape mode)
• IBM Pro printer (landscape mode)
• Star Micronics SG-10 (landscape mode)
• LA75 in STD mode (landscape mode)
Set 5
Set 5 fonts are raster fonts. They are designed for printers in the 120 dpi
resolution:
• Okidata 92,93, 192, 193, IBM-compatible models (portrait mode)
• Epson MX-80, FX-80, and compatibles (portrait mode)
• IBM Graphics (portrait mode)
• IBM Proprinter (portrait mode)
• Star Micronics SG-10 (portrait mode)
• LA75 in STD mode (portrait mode)
In addition to these fonts, an application can list device fonts. These are the
fonts provided by a device. For example, on print-wheel printers, font names
correspond to wheel names. These fonts cannot be added or deleted with the
Control Panel, but they can be listed when the output device is selected.
Because a raster font may not correspond to the screen, MS-Windows usually
substitutes a screen font in the same class.

8·12

Using the Control Panel

IIIII

NOTE

Because applications handle fonts differently, some applications
may not list all fonts.
Fonts have names that represent their different characteristics. Table 8-1 lists
and describes the fonts that are included on your MS-Windows Fonts disk.
Table 8-1

Fonts on the Fonts Disk

Font

Description

Helv

(Raster font.) A proportional font (characters having varying
widths) without serifs.

Courier

(Raster font.) A fixed-width font (charcters having uniform
width) with serifs.

Tms Rmn

(Raster font.) A proportional font with serifs.

Roman

(Stroke font.) A proportional font with serifs.

Modern

(Stroke font.) A proportional font without serifs.

Script

(Stroke font.) A proportional font of slanted characters formed
from nearly continuous curved lines.

Table 8-2 describes the fonts that are not included on the Fonts disk, but you
can see them in some applications. These fonts cannot be added or deleted.
Table 8-2

Fonts Not on the Fonts Disk

Font

Description

System

(Raster font.) A fixed-width font designed for the screen.

Terminal

(Raster font.) A fixed-width font that is the same as the font
your workstation displays from MS-DOS.

Deleting a Font
To delete a font file to MS-Windows, use the Delete Font command from the
Installation menu. This command works similarly to the Delete Printer command.

8-13

Communicatlons Port ...
Network Terminal Services ...
Figure 8-6 Setup Menu Commands
Changing Printer Connections
MS-Windows needs to know to which communications port your printer is
connected. To set or change the port for your printers, use the Connections
command.
For example, to move your printer from the communications port LPTI to
LPT2, use the Control Panel to change the printer connections setting.

8-14

Using the Control Panel

IIIII

To change printer connections:
1. Select the Connections command from the Setup menu. MS-Windows
displays the Connections dialog box. Figure 8-7 shows the Connections
dialog box.

Connection

.
lPT2:

UIU3

(

Figure 8-7

)

(Cancel)
Connections Dialog Box

You can redirect an LPT port only to the SPP (Serial Printer Port)
or to a network print device.

8-15

11111

Using the Control Panel

To change the default printer:
1. Select the Printer command from the Setup menu.
MS-Windows displays the Default Printer dialog box. It lists all the availabie printers and their current communications port connections. Figure
8-8 shows the Default Printer dialog box.

Default Printer

( Ok

)

(Cancel)
Figure 8-8

Default Printer Dialog Box

2. From the list box, select the printer name.

3. Select the Ok command button.
MS-Windows displays the Output Mode dialog box, containing the mode
settings specific to the printer you selected.
4. To select another output mode, select from the options for printer
output or answer the questions in the dialog box.
5. Select the Ok command button.
The printer you select becomes the default printer.

Changing the Communications Port
To select COM1 and COM2 settings, including baud rate, stop bits, parity,
word length, and the retry (print/send) option, use the Communications Port
command.
For example, MS-Windows' print spool uses these settings to configure the
communication port before printing. (COM1 and COM2 are serial communications ports and can be used only with serial printers and serial communication devices.)

8-16

(Ising the Control Panel

IIIII

To select a communications port:
I. Select the Communications Port command from the Setup menu.
MS-Windows displays the Communication Settings dialog box. Figure
8-9 shows the Communications Settings dialog box.

Communications Settings
Port
@~
Baud Rate:

112110

Word length

04 05

OCOM2:

Parity

o Euen

OOdd

@Hone

Stop Bits

01-5

Handshake

0 Hard",are

(

Figure 8-9

@ Hone
(Cancel)

Communications Settings Dialog Box

2. Select the communications port COMI or COM2.
The settings for the selected communications port are displayed in the
dialog box.
3. Select an option. See your printer or device documentation for the
proper communications port settings.
4. Select the Ok command button. The communications port you select is
set up.
NOTE

8-17

IIIII Using the Control Panel
Selecting Network Terminal Services
To select terminal services for the workstation's communication ports, use
the Network Terminal Services command. This command lets you redirect the
COMI and COM2 communications ports to the selected terminal services.
Any application using COMI or COM2 is redirected over the local area network to the specified network terminal service.
To select a network terminal service:
I. Select the Network Terminal Services command from the Setup menu.
MS-Windows displays a Network Terminal Services dialog box. It lists
the currently available network services. Figure 8-10 shows the Network
Terminal Services dialog box.

NehlOl"k Terminal Services
You can assign communications ports 1 and 2 to the services listed
below. These are the only currently available services. PI·eviously
assigned services may be unavailable at this time.
Port

Sel"vices

o : RA-ER
~rwe

i 1~1?~E~R
II'·

:::;

I~~¥~~~

RANGER

( Ok

)

Figure 8-10

I Reset )

(Cancel :1

Network Terminal Services Dialog Box

NOTE

For most systems, you can access a maximum of 10 services. A
warning box is displayed if the service table has overflowed.
To add more services, you must change the table size in the
Network Terminal Services (LAT) driver.
2. From the Port list box, select the COMI or COM2 communications port.
The current terminal services for that port are displayed.

8-18

Using the Control Panel

IIIII

3. From the Services list box, select a terminal service.
4. Select the Ok command button.
You can redirect communications ports to a network terminal service for any
standard application that runs in a window, such as, the VT220 terminal
emulator. Using the configuration shown in Figure 8-10, you can connect the
VT220 emulator to the COM2 port; however, all communications for the
VT220 emulator will use the network terminal service called RANGER. For
more information about network terminal services, see Chapter 9.
When you run an application that uses COMI or COM2, the selected terminal service is redirected if the following conditions are met:
• The Network Terminal Service driver (rAT) was installed prior to starting MS-Windows. This driver lists all available services, normally
assigned by the key diskette.
• The redirected port is COMI or COM2. Only COMI and COM2 can be
redirected.
• The mode of transmission is computer to computer, and does not use a
modem. Only applications that do not use modem control signals to
control the now of data can be redirected.
• No more than four Network Terminal Services are active, induding redirected and direct connections.
• A terminal services name is present in the WIN.INI file for the serial
communication device being used. You cannot select a terminal service
not listed in the Services list box.
• The terminal service is available. This availability is dynamiC. If a terminal service is selected for a communications port, the terminal service
is assigned to that communications port only as long as terminal service
is available to the network. If the terminal service becomes unavailable
to the network, it is no longer assigned to the communications port.
NOTE

Even if COMI and COM2 hardware is not installed, redirection
over the local area network can occur, because the redirection is
done by software.

8-19

11111

Using the Control Panel

Using the Preferences Menu
The Preferences menu has four commands:
• Screen Colors, which lets you adjust shades on your screen
• Keyboard Settings, which lets you change settings such as keyclick and
autorepeat
• Mouse, which lets you swap the function of the left and right mouse
buttons
• Country Settings, which lets you select country-specific user preferences
Figure 8-11 shows the Preferences menu commands.

Screen Colot·s ...
Keyboard Settings ...
Mouse ...
Countr Settin s ...
Figure 8-11

Preferences Menu Commands

8-20

Using the Control Panel

IIIII

Screen Colors
I

!ext
Scroll Bars
Actiue Title Bar
Inactiue Title Bar
~1n!lO'"

Salllple
Actlue

Hue
Bright
Color

Figure 8-12

Screen Colors Dialog Box

8-21

11111

Using the Control Panel

8-22

Using the Control Panel

IIIII

Keyboard Settings
Keyboard in use: U.S.A.

0 Ho sound

Keyclick uolume

o Soft

@ Intermediate

Oloud
@ Enabled
Disabled
@ Caps
Shift

Autorepeat

o
o

Lock selection

(

)

Figure 8-13

( Reset)

(Cancel)

Keyboard Settings Dialog Box

2. Select the settings you want.

8-23

11111

Using the Control Panel

3. Select the Ok command button.

The keyboard settings for the keyclick volume and autorepeat are in
effect for your workstation, even when you are not running
MS-Windows.
When you change a keyboard feature, the new selection affects the
keyboard, and MS-Windows enters the new selection into the WIN.INI
file. The changes are effective immediately and remain in effect until
you change them.
The default settings are used when:
• You run MS-Windows for the first time and have not made any changes
to the keyboard preference features.
• The WIN.INI file is not present, or the information about the keyboard
preference features has been removed from the WIN.INI file with a text
editor.

Mouse Options
~Left/right mouse buttons swapped
(

Figure 8-14

8-24

)

(Cancel)

Mouse Options Dialog Box

Using the Control Panel

IIIII

2. Click on the check box.
An X is displayed in the check box, showing that the functions of the

8-25

11111

Using the Control Panel

Country Settings

r TilTle FOt"lTIat

U.S.A.
~
rYaitce
Spain
Italy

S~,itzet"land

(!:' 12 hoUl"

__
I
11 :59 ~ 23 :59 ["pW]

() 24 hout"

Separator: [J

NUlTlbet" F ot"lTIat

GJ DeCIlTla
- 1 d- f2l
D
Igl ts: l-=.J
GJ 0 Leading Zet"o

[ 1000:
DecIlT1al: .
List:.

(
Ok )
'--- - - ' -

(" Cancel") I~un"ency Fot"lTIa:"
"
-'"
- ~lTIbol: [i:=J ':!) Pt"ehx

r- Reset -'I

Figure 8-15

() Suffix

Country Settings Dialog Box

2. From the list box, select a country.
The default settings for the selected country are shown in the dialog
box.
3. Select the setting you want to change.
If necessary, enter the sign you want to use.
For example, the default setting for the date format in the U.S. country
setting is month/day/year. You can use day/month/year or day-monthyear.
4. Select the Ok command button.
The country settings you selected are in effect.

8-26

Chapter 9
Using Terminal
Emulators With
Your Workstation

This chapter provides a brief overview of three methods of connecting your
workstation to a host computer:
• VT220 terminal emulator
• VT240 terminal emulator
• SETHOST MS-DOS command
A terminal emulator is an application that lets you use your workstation to
access a host computer as if you were using a terminal. When you use a
terminal emulator, your workstation keyboard and screen behave like a
DIGITAL terminal.
The VT220 and VT240 terminal emulator applications behave like VT52,
VT100, or VT200 7 and 8-bit control terminals that support both DEC and
ISO Latin-1 character sets.
The MS-DOS SETHOST command is a network utility that performs terminal
emulation of a VT102 7 -bit control terminal that only supports the line drawing character set.

9-1

IIIII Using Terminal Emulators With Your Workstation
Table 9-1 compares the three emulators and their features.
Table 9-1

Workstation Emulator Comparison Table

Feature

VT220

VT240

SETHOST

ReGIS Graphics

Yes

Runs in a window(s)

Yes

Supports multiple simultaneous sessions

No'

Yes

Accesses hosts on a local area networkt

Yes

Accesses hosts on a wide area DECnet
networkt

Yes

Can use a serial port

Yes

• Single session only, but can run multiple copies of VT220 emulators simultaneously in different windows.
t Uses the ThinWire Ethernet port.

9-2

Chapter 10
Using the VT220
Terminal Emulator

10-1

IIIII Using the VT220 Terminal Emulator
Starting the VT220 Emulator
Start the VT220 emulator either by:
• Expanding the VT220 emulator icon (a small terminal) in the icon area
into the work area
• Using the Run command from the File menu in the MS-DOS Executive
window
To do this:
1. Select the Run command.
2. Type VT220 in the dialog box.
3. Click on the Ok command button.

Your workstation is emulating a VT220 terminal, and your host login
information is displayed.
NOTE
If your login information is not displayed, see your system

administrator.

Using Multiple VT220 Emulators
You can run more than one VT220 emulator. You might want to do this if
you are:
• Editing a file in one VT220 emulator and want to access or monitor
your mail using another VT220 emulator
• Compiling a program in one VT220 emulator and want to edit a memo
using another VT220 emulator
When you start another VT220 emulator, the title bar displays square brackets next to the VT220 emulator title. A number is displayed in these brackets
to indicate the emulator session you are running. These brackets only display
if you are using more than one VT220 emulator.

10-2

Using the VT220 Terminal Emulator

IIIII

Scrolling in the Emulator Window
If you need to view more information than can be displayed in an emulator
window, use these keys:
( Clrl/Find )

To scroll to the left

( Clrl/Selecl )

To scroll to the right

( Clrl/Prev )

To scroll up

( Clrl/Nexl )

To scroll down

Using the VT220 Emulator System Menu Commands
The VT220 emulator adds the following commands to the standard System
menu commands:
• Set-Up
• Mark
• Copy
• Paste
• About
The Set-Up Command

You can start or exit from the VT220 emulator Set-Up utility by selecting the
Set-Up command. Chapter 12 discusses the Set-Up utility.

10-3

IIIII Using the VT220 Terminal Emulator
The Mark, Copy, and Paste Commands
The VT220 emulator lets you transfer information between itself and the
MS-Windows Clipboard application. You copy the information from the
emulator to the Clipboard or paste information from the Clipboard to the
emulator as if you typed it. When you send information to the Clipboard, the
characters are interpreted as ISO Latin -1 characters.
To copy text to the Clipboard:
1. Select Mark from the VT220 System menu.
The word "Mark" is displayed in parentheses next to the VT220 emulator title in the title bar. A special vertical bar is also displayed in the
window.
2. Drag the vertical bar to mark the text to be copied.
3. Select Copy to move the marked text to the Clipboard.
NOTE

The About Command
The About command displays the version number of the VT220 emulator
application.

Leaving the VT220 Emulator
To leave the VT220 emulator select one of the following commands from the
VT220 System menu:
• The Icon command.
Selecting the Icon command shrinks the VT220 emulator to an icon
without exiting from the emulator application.
• The Close command.
Selecting the Close command exits you from the VT220 emulator.
Before using this command, you should log off the host system.
10-4

Chapter 11
Using the VT220
Emulator Key board

This chapter:
• Shows a diagram of the workstation keyboard.
• Describes the differences between the workstation keyboard for the
VT220 emulator and an actual VT220 terminal keyboard.

11-1

IIIII Using the VT220 Emulator Keyboard
Labels
Some labels for the workstation top-row function keys differ from those on a
VT220 terminal keyboard. These keys are indicated in Figure 11-1.

DDDDD

DDDDDDDDDDDDDD
DDDDDDDDDDDDDO
DDDDDDDDDDDDDD
CJDDDDDDDDDDDCJ
c==J1
I
Figure 11-1

DDDD

DDD DDDD
DDD DDDD
DODD
D
DDD

~BD

Workstation Keyboard

The VT220 emulator keys function exactly as they do for the VT220 terminal.
However, the workstation keyboard has and uses the Alt key.
For more information about the Alt key, see Appendix D.

11-2

(!sing thl' VT.!.!() Emlilator KI')!board

IIIII

F3 (Set-Up)

Pressing the F3 (Set-Up) key allows you to enter and exit
Set-Up.

F4 (Data/Talk)

F5 (Break)

Pressing Fll (ESC) generates an escape character when
in VT52 and VT100 modes. In VT200 modes, Fl1 is a
function key.

F12 (BS)

Pressing F12 (BS) generates a backspace character when
in VT52 and VT100 modes. In VT200 modes, F12 is a
function key.

F13 (LF)

Pressing F 13 (LF) generates a line feed character when in
VT52 and VT100 modes. In VT200 modes, F13 is a function key.

11-3

Chapter 12
Using Set-Up With
the VT220 Emulator

This chapter describes:
• How to enter and exit Set-Up
• How to make or change Set-Up settings
• Each Set-Up screen and all the settings

12-1

IIIII Using Set- Up With the VT220 Emulator
Understanding the VT220 Set-Up Screens
After you enter Set-Up the VT220 emulator displays Screen 12-1, the Actions
Screen, the first of eight Set-Up screens. For this discussion the Actions
Screen is being treated as a general example of all eight screens.

COllllllunications
Printer

Tabs

Telephone

Set Default Set-Up Parallleters
Send File
Receiue File

Receiue File: Idle
Send File: Idle
Printer: tlone
Modelll: tlot Selected
Telephone: Talk Mode - Manual Answer
Insert/Replace: Replace
COllllllunications: COIllIll Port 1 - Data Leads Only

Screen 12-1

VT220 Set-Up

12-2

Using Set- Up With the VT220 Emulator

IIIII

Table 12-1 describes each of the Set-Up screens_
Table 12-1

VT220 Set-Up Screens

Set-Up Screen

Description

Actions

Contains selections relating to clearing the screen and resetting
the emulator, saving and recalling Set-Up settings, and sending
or receiving files.

Communications

Contains selections for defining the communications environment, such as speed, parity, and disconnect.

Display

Contains selections for defining screen display, such as columns, cursor style, and background.

General

Contains commonly used general operating selections, such as
local echo, character sets, and terminal rD.

Keyboard

Contains selections for defining keyboard operating characteristics, such as margin bell, break, and answerback.

Printer

Contains selections for defining printer operations, such as
print size or type of printer.

Tabs

Contains selections for defining the tab settings.

Telephone

Lets you determine how telephone answering is done. You can
also enter the telephone numbers you want to use with the
modem.

12-3

11111

Using Set- Up With the VT220 Emulator

The VT220 Status Section
The status section displays information relating to the state of operations you
initiate through various Set-Up selections.
Ali screens for the VT220 emulator have a bottom section displaying the
current status for:
• Receiving or sending a file
- Idle or In Progress
• Printer
- Printer type and Mode
• Modem usage (valid only if the optional integral modem is installed,
and you selected Modem Control)
- Selected or Not selected
• Telephone modes (valid only if the optional integral modem is
installed, and you selected Modem Control)
- Manual or Automatic Answer
• Insert/Replace mode
• Communications
- Comm Port 1, Comm Port 2, or Network Terminal Service
NOTE

The VT220 status area is a reporting area only.

12-4

Using ,'iet-Up With the VT220 Emulator 11111

Using the Mouse in Set-Up
To select a Set-Up screen and change a setting:
1, Select the desired screen from the menu area.

2. After the desired Set-Up screen is displayed, click on the selection you
want to view or change.

If a drop-down menu is displayed, go to the next step; otherwise release
the mouse button.
3. Drag the pointer to the desired setting and release the mouse button.
NOTE

Some settings take effect immediately; others take effect when you
exit Set-Up.

Exiting Set-Up
To exit Set-Up either:
• Press the F3 (Set-Up) key again
• Select the Close command from the Set-Up System menu

12-5

11111

Using Set-Up With the VT220 Emulator

Actions Screen
Whenever you enter VT220 Set-Up, it displays the Actions Set-Up screen.

Set Default Set-Up Para~eters
Send File
Receiue File
Receiue File: Idle
Send File: Idle
Printer: Hone
Mode~: Hot Selected
Telephone: Talk Mode - Manual Answer
Insert/Replace: Replace
Co~~unications: Co~~ Port 1 - Data Leads Only

Screen 12-2

VT220 Actions

Table 12-2 defines the Actions Set-Up selections.

12-6

Using Set-Up With the VT220 Emulator

Table 12-2

IIIII

VT220 Actions Set-Up

Selection

Function

Reset Terminal

Clear Display

Clears and sends the cursor to the upper-left corner of the
screen.

Clear
Communications

Clears communication lines immediately and stops any print
operation in progress. It also exits printer controller mode.
Does not affect LAT communications.

Recall Set-Up
Parameters

Save Set-Up
Parameters

Set Default Set-Up
Parameters

Replaces all current Set-Up settings with factory default
settings.
Clears the dialog box from the Actions Set-Up screen and
returns the cursor to the upper-left corner of the Actions
Set-Up screen.

12-7

11111 Using Set-Up Witb tbe VT220 Emulator

Table 12-2

VT220 Actions Set-Up (cont.)

Selection

Function

Send File

Allows you to send characters to a host from an MS-DOS text
file as though you entered them from a keyboard.

Open File

Close File

Displayed in a lighter shade until you open a file. Closes and
saves the file.

Receive File

Controls the receiving of characters from a host into a specified file.

Open File

Displays a dialog box and asks you to enter the name of the
file that is to receive the characters. If a file of the same
name already exists, it is replaced.

Open File and
Append

This is identical to Open File except that text is appended to
a file of the same name if it exists. If not, a new file is
created.

Close File

File logging is ended and the file is closed.

File logging resumes.

Off

File logging is suspended but the file remains open.

12-8

Using Set-Up With the VT220 Emulator

IIIII

Port/lietwork
N(~Y \:~\('A<t

n i rn.1

~:;(q ~yi, l>~

Disconnect Delay
:-:OFF Point

Speed
Data Bits and Parity
Stop Bits

Receiue File: Idle
Sef1d File: Idle
Printer: lione
Modem: liot Selected
Telephone: Talk Mode - Manual Answer
Insert/Replace: Replace
Communications: Comm POI-t 1 - Data Leads Only

Screen 12-3

VT220 Communications

Table 12-3 defines the Communications Set-Up selections and, where applicable, the settings.

12-9

IIIII Using Set- Up With the VT220 Emulator
Table 12-3

VT220 Communications Set-Up

Selection

Function

Port/Network

Selects the type of port used for communication with a
host, either serial or Net\vork Terminal Serv"ic-es communications.
If you select serial communications, Network Terminal
Service is displayed in a lighter shade on your screen.

Comm Port 1: Data
Leads Only (default)

Select when you connect to the host using serial communications.

Comm Port 1: Full
Modem Control

Select if your workstation is connected to the host
through the communications port and an external modem
requiring modem control is used.

Comm Port 2: Data
Leads Only

Select when you connect to the host using serial communications.

Comm Port 2: Full
Modem Control

Comm Port 2:
Integral Modem

Select if the optional integral modem is installed, and the
workstation uses it to communicate with the host.
Note: The integral modem may not be available for your
country.

Network
Communication
Port

Click on the service you want to access, then click on
the Ok command button.

12-10

Using Set-Up With the VT220 Emulator

IIIII

Table 12-3

VT220 Communications Set-Up (COllt.)

Selection

Function

Network Terminal
Services

If displayed in a lighter shade, you are using serial communications.
If you set the Network selection under Port/Network, all
items relating to serial communications are displayed in a
lighter shade, and you are connected to services available
under Network Terminal Services.

Disconnect Delay

Selects (when modem control is used) the amount of
time before the workstation disconnects from the communications line if the carrier detect is lost.

2 second delay
(default)

Most countries, except the United Kingdom, use the twosecond delay.

60 Millisecond
delay

The 60 millisecond delay is for use in the United Kingdom.

XOFF Point

Selects the XOFF point or disables the automatic
XON/XOFF flow control.
For most applications you should set XOFF at 64 or 256.
If you set XOFF greater than 256 and have a buffer overflow problem, set XOFF to the next lower value.

XOFF at 64
(default)

The choices for XOFF are: 64 (default), 256, 512, and
1024.

Disabled

Characters are received continuously from the host. Some
characters may be lost.

Speed

Selects the rate at which characters are received or transmitted. The default is 9600.

Data Bits and Parity

Selects the character format used for communication with
the host computer. The default is 8 bits - No Parity.

Stop Bits

Selects the number of stop bits (lor 2) required for use
by the host port. The default is 1 stop bit.

12-11

IIIII

Using Set-Up With the VT220 Emulator

Display Screen
The Display Set-Up screen lets you define screen display characteristics.

UT220 fflllllato,'

• .• 1

Blink
Font Size

Receiue File: Idle
Send File: Idle
Printel": Hone
Mode~: Hot Selected
Telephone: Talk Mode - Manual Answel"
Insel"t/Replace: Replace
Co~unications: Co~~ POl"t 1 - Data leads Only

Screen 12-4 VT220 Display
Table 12-4 defines the Display Set-Up selections and, where applicable, the
settings.
Table 12-4 VT220 Display Set-Up
Selection

Function

Columns

Selects an 80- or 132-column screen for text.

80 Columns
(default)

Selects an 80-column screen.

132 Columns

Selects a 132-column screen.

12-12

Using Set-Up With the VT220 Emulator
Table 12-4

VT220 Display Set-Up (cont_)

Selection

Function

Text Cursor

Selects whether to display a text cursor.

Visible
(default)

Displays the cursor.

Invisible

Does not display the cursor.

Auto Wrap

IIIII

Selects whether text automatically wraps on the screen.

Causes characters that reach the right margin to automatically be displayed in the first character position of the next
line.

Off
(default)

Causes characters that go beyond the right margin to overwrite the last character position of the current line.

Cursor Style

Selects the text cursor style.

Block
(default)

Displays block cursor.

Underline

Displays underline cursor.

Background

Selects the screen display type.

Light
(default)

Selects reverse video screen display (dark text on a light
background) .

Dark

Selects a dark screen display (light text on a dark background).

Blink

Blinking display is not implemented for the VT220 emulator.
You have a choice of displaying characters with blinking attributes as either normal video (default), reverse video, or
underscore.

Font Size

Changes the font size of characters displayed on the screen.
The settings are: Normal (default), Small, or Automatic.
If you are using applications that display more than 80 col-

umns, use the Automatic or Small setting.

12-13

11111

Using Set-Up With the VT220 Emulator

General Screen
The General Set-Up screen lets you define a group of commonly used general
operating settings.

Terminal Emulation
User Defined Keys
User Features
Receiue File: Idle
Send File: I dIe
Printer: None
Modem: Not Selected
Telephone: Talk Mode - Manual Answer
Insert/Replace: Replace
Communications: Comm Port 1 - Data leads Only

Screen 12-5

VT220 General

Table 12-5 defines the General Set-Up selections and, where applicable, the
settings.

12-14

(fsinM Set-lip With the VT220 Emulator

Table 12-5

IIIII

VT220 General Set-Up

Selection

Function

Line Mode

Lets you select the mode of operation.

On Line
(default)

Lets the workstation communicate with a host
computer.

Off Line

Puts a host computer on hold. Data entered at the keyboard goes directly to the workstation screen.

Local Echo

Enables or disables the local echo selection.

Directs characters from the keyboard to the screen as
well as to the host computer. It is used when the host
does not send the characters back to the screen.

Off
(default)

Directs characters from the keyboard to the host computer only. The host in turn mayor may not send the
characters back to the screen.

New Line

Selects whether the Return key generates a carriage return only or a carriage return and a line feed.

Enabled
(Return = CR/LF)

Generates a carriage return and a line feed. Received
carriage returns cause a new line operation. When
autotyping, any line feeds in an autotyped file are sent.
When using Clipboard, any pasted lines are separated
by carriage returns and line feeds.

Disabled
(Return = CR)
(default)

Generates a carriage return only. Received carriage returns do not cause a new line operation. When
auto typed or Clipboard pasted lines are separated by
carriage returns, line feeds are not sent.
Note: When the VT220 emulator is in numeric keypad
mode, this setting affects the Enter key in the same way
it does the Return key.

Multinational Mode

Determines character set mappings used by the terminal.

NRC

Selects the 7-bit NRC (National Replacement Character)
mode. The NRC set depends on the country keyboard
which is determined during MS-Windows configuration
Set-Up.

Multinational
(default)

Selects the 8-bit MCS (Multinational Character Set), including the 7 -bit ASCII character set.
Note: This selection is disabled when you select NRC
mode.

12-15

IIIII Using ,',et- Up With the VT220 Emulator
Table 12-5

VT220 General Set-Up (cant.)

Selection

Function

Multinational Character Set

Allows you to choose either the ISO Latin-lor the DEC
Multinational character set.

ISO Latin-l

Selects the 8-bit ISO Latin-l character set.

DEC Multinational
(default)

Selects the 8-bit DEC Multinational character set.

Terminal Emulation

Determines how the VT220 emulator acts. It can act
like a VT52, VT100, VT200 with 7-bit controls (default), or VT200 terminal with 8-bit controls.

TerminalID

Identifies your terminal as a VT220 (default), VTI02,
VTI01, or VT100 terminal.
Terminal ID can only be selected when emulation is set
for VT100 mode. It is displayed in a lighter shade (not
selectable) if you are in VT52 or VT200 mode.

User Defined Keys

Selects whether a host can change user-defined key
(UDK) definitions.

Locked

Prevents new UDKs from being changed.

Unlocked
(default)

Allows new UDKs to be changed.

User Features

Selects whether a host can change certain user features.

Locked

Prevents a host from changing certain user features.

Unlocked
( default)

Lets a host change certain user features.
The user features are: Light/Dark Screen, Tab Stops, and
Keyboard Lock.

Note: Some applications expect to control these user
settings. If this applies to your application, select Unlocked.

12-16

Using Set-Up With the VT220 Emulator

IIIII

Keyboard Screen
The Keyboard Set-Up screen lets you define keyboard operating features.

UT220 Emulator Set-Up
Actions
Communications Display
~~.f!j.lt!.!.II!J•.,• • Printer
Tabs
Keypad 110de
Cursor Keys
Margin Bell
!Iarning Bell

Genet'al
Telephone

Break
Auto Answerback
Answerback Concealed
Answerback String

Receiue File: Idle
Send File: Idle
Printer: Hone
Modem: Hot Selected
Telephone: Talk Mode - Manual Answer
Insert/Replace: Replace

I
I

'----~c_o_m_m_u_n_i_c_a_t_io_n_s_:~c_o_m_m_p_o_r_t~1~-_D_a_t_a~l_e_a_d_s_O_n_l_y~~~~~_______

Screen 12-6

VT220 Keyboard

Table 12·6 defines the Keyboard Set-Up selections and, where applicable, the
settings.

12-17

IIIII Using Set-Up With the VT220 Emulator
Table 12-6 VT220 Keyboard Set-Up
Selection

Function

Keypad Mode

Sets the terminal keypad for using either numbers or control
codes.

Numeric
(default)

Sends numbers from the numeric keypad.

Application

Sends escape sequences from the numeric keypad.

Cursor Keys

Selects the kind of control codes sent by the cursor keys. It
is disabled if the terminal is in VT52 mode.

Normal Control
(default)

Sends ANSI cursor control sequences for cursor keys (up,
down, left, and right).

Application
Control

Sends application program control functions for cursor keys.

Margin Bell

Determines whether the terminal sounds a bell tone when
the text cursor approaches the right margin.

Enabled
(default)

Turns on the margin bell setting.

Disabled

Turns off the margin bell setting.

Warning Bell

Determines whether the terminal generates a bell tone, such
as for operating errors, mail messages, or system messages.

Enabled
(default)

Turns on the warning bell setting.

Disabled

Turns off the warning bell setting.

Break

Enables or disables the Break key function.

Enabled
(default)

Turns on the Break key function.

Disabled

Turns off the Break key function.

12-18

Using Set-Up With the VT220 Emulator

IIIII

Table 12-6

VT220 Keyboard Set-Up (cont.)

Selection

Function

Auto Answerback

Selects whether the answerback message is automatically
sent to a host computer after a communication line connection.

Enabled
( default)

Turns on the answerback message.

Disabled

Turns off the answerback message.

Answerback
Concealed
Concealed

Selects whether your answerback message entry is displayed
on the screen.
Your answerback message is not displayed on the screen.
You can only reset this setting to Not Concealed by entering
a new answerback message.

Not Concealed
(default)
Answerback String

Displays the answerback message as entered.

Allows you to enter an answerback message. A dialog box
displays and asks for the answerback string.
The emulator sends an answerback message when it receives
an ENQ (enquiry control character), or if you or the host
send a Ctrl/Break. In the case of ENQ, the message you enter
is sent to a host without affecting screen data or requiring
further operator action.
You can enter any keyboard character, up to a 30 character
limit.

12-19

11111 Using Set.Up With the VT220 Emulator

Printer Screen
The Printer Set-Up screen lets you select printer (or auxiliary device) operations for the emulators.

UTnll [Illulato,'

Actions
Keyboar-d

Display
l{Dili!iii~.iI Tabs

'::W"

•

Gener-al
Telephone

Pr-int Extent
Pr-int Size
Pr-int Mode
Receiue File
Send File
Pr-interModelll
Telephone
Inser-t/Replace
COllllllunications

Idle
Idle
Hone
Hot Selected
Talk Mode - Manual AnswerReplace
COIllIll Por-t 1 - Data Leads Only

Screen 12-7 VT220 Printer

Table 12-7 defines the Printer Set-Up selections and, where applicable, the
settings.

12-20

Using Set- Up With the VT220 Emulator

Table 12-7

IIIII

Printer Set-Up

Selection

Function

Print Extent

Determines how much of the screen is printed during a text
print operation.

Full Page
(default)

Prints the full screen.

Scroll Region

Prints only the scrolling region.

Print Size

Determines the size of the printed characters.

Normal
(default)

Prints 80 characters a line.

Compressed

Prints 132 characters a line.

Print Mode

Selects the operating mode for the printer.

Normal
(default)

Only sends information to the printer when you invoke print
functions from the keyboard.

Auto

Prints the current text line when the terminal receives a Ii II'·
feed, form feed, or vertical tab code from a host.

Controller

Causes the printer port to treat the device connected to it as
a terminal, while the VT220 emulator monitors traffic. (The
printer and host computer transfer data without displaying
the data on the screen.)

12-21

11111

Using Set-Up With the VT220 Emulator

Tabs Screen
The Tabs Set-Up screen lets you set the terminal tab stop interval settings.

,---------------------------------------------------------------------Actions
Keyboard

UT220 E~ulator Set-Up
s, la~
Genet-al
COllllllunications ~Dl.·
Printer
Ii~~.~"•••• Telephone
o

Clear All Tabs
Set 8 Colullln Tabs
Set Tab Interual
Manually Set Tabs
Receiue File
Send File
Printer
Modelll
Telephone
I nset-tiReplace

COIII~unications

Idle
Idle
None
Not Selected
Talk Mode - Manual Answer
Replace
COIIIIII Port 1 - Data Leads Only

Screen 12-8

VT220 Tabs

Table 12-8 defines the Tab Set-Up selections and, where applicable, the
settings.
Table 12-8 VT220 Tab Set-Up
Selection

Function

Clear All Tabs

Clears all tab settings.

Set 8 Column Tabs

Sets tabs every 8 columns, starting with column 9.

Set Tab Interval

Displays a dialog box containing the current tab stop setting.
You enter a new interval in the dialog box by typing the
desired number.

Manually Set Tabs

Allows you to change individual tab stops. The tab intervals
are updated in a displayed ruler.

12-22

Using Set-Up With the VT220 Emulator

IIIII

Setting VT220 Tabs Manually
To manually set tabs for the VT220 emulator:
1_ Click on the Manually Set Tabs selection_
A tabs ruler and blinking cursor are displayed below the Tabs Set-Up
screen where the Icon area was_ Screen 12-9 shows the current tab
settings_

Actions
Keyboal-d

Communications Display
Printer
••iI,,~,ll!Iiii

General

••••• Telephone

Clear All Tabs
Set 8 Column Tabs
Set Tab Interual
Manually Set Tabs
Receiue File: Idle
Send File: Idle
Printer: Hone
Modem: Hot Selected
Telephone: Talk Mode - Manual Answer
Insert/Replace: Replace
Communications: Comm Port 1 - Data leads Only

(Ok) r Cancel)

23456 7891....I!LI).U.:pII123456 789IUILI).'TiT.:WI123456 789IU"'LI).W:Pl!123456 789IU"'1I1;W':PII

12345678911 ..... LI).U.:pI1123456789IU... LI).1i!'.:pIl123456789U

Screen 12-9

Manually Setting VT220 Tabs

12-23

IIIII Using Set-Up With the VT220 Emulator
2. To move the blinking cursor to the desired tab setting, use the mouse
pointer.
3. Click on the desired tab setting.
A "T" is displayed where you clicked.
To erase a tab stop, click on the "T".
4. Repeat steps two and three until you have marked all desired tab stops.
NOTE

To cancel the tab settings you made and leave the tab settings
unchanged, click on the Cancel command button.
S. To exit the tabs ruler and save the tab settings, click on the Ok command button.
You are returned to the Tabs Set-Up selections.

12-24

Using ,",et- Up With the VT220 Emulator

IIIII

Telephone Screen
The telephone Set-Up screen lets you store and display telephone numbers
for automatic dialing.
To use the Telephone selections, you should have:
• Installed the integral modem option (This is not available for all
countries.)
• Selected and saved from the Communications screen:
The Integral Modem selection
The appropriate transmit and receive speeds
For more information on telephone settings, refer to the VAXmate Modem
User's Guide.

Actions
Keyboard

UT220 Emulator Set-Up
Communications Display
Printer
Tabs

Modem Answer
Telephone Numbers

Receive File: Idle
Send File: I dIe
Printer: None
Modem: Not Selected
Telephone: Talk Mode - Manual Ans\~e.
Insert/Replace: Replace
Communications: Comm Port 1 - Data Leads Only

Screen 12-10

VT220 Telephone

12-25

11111 Using Set-Up With the VT220 Emulator

Table 12-9 defines the Telephone Set-Up selections and, where applicable,
the settings.
Table 12-9

VT220 Telephone Set-Up

Selection

Function

Modem Answer

Selects automatic telephone answering by the terminal or
manual telephone answering by the user.

Manual
(default)

Leaves the integral modem in talk mode after disconnecting
from the host and allows you to answer the incoming call.
Manual answer is required for normal telephone operation.

Automatic

Leaves the integral modem in data mode after disconnecting
from the host and allows the terminal to automatically answer the incoming call.

Telephone Numbers

Displays a dialog box requesting you to enter phone numbers. Any previously entered phone numbers (A-J) are
remembered and displayed.
To enter phone numbers, click to the right of the desired
letter. An insertion point is displayed indicating where to
type in the phone number.
Type in a phone number or type over an existing phone
number.
Repeat the process until you have entered or changed all the
desired phone numbers.
After you type the phone number(s), click on the Ok command button. You save these settings by using the Save Parameters selection before exiting Set-Up.

12-26

Chapter 13
Using VT220
Special Features

This chapter tells you how to:
• Use configuration files
• Save and recall Set-Up selections
• Receive and autotype characters using files

Using Configuration Files
The VT220 emulator allows you to save Set-Up settings in a Set-Up configuration file. You can have several of these files, each specifying different
settings.

What the VT220 Emulator Does
When you start the VT220 emulator, it looks for the default Set-Up configuration file named DEFAULT. 220. When found, this file configures your VT220
emulator with the initial values of all Set-Up selections.
If the VT220 emulator does not find the DEFAULT.220 file, it configures your
VT220 emulator with the factory default settings instead.

What You Can Do
When starting the VT220 emulator, you can direct it to run a Set-Up configuration file other than DEFAULT.220.
You can also run configuration files after you start the VT220 emulator. To
do this, use the Recall Set-Up Parameters as described in this chapter.

13-1

IIIII Using VT220 SPecial Features
These Set-Up configuration files need not reside in the current directory. You
can precede configuration file names with a directory path. For more information about appropriate file naming, see Chapter 30.

Specifying Set-Up Configuration Files on Startup
To specify a Set-Up configuration file when you start the VT220 emulator, do
one of the following:
• Select the Run command.
A dialog box requests the name of the application you want to run.
Type VT220 followed by a space and the name of the desired configuration file. The .220 is the default extension if none is given.
Click on the Ok command button.
• The standard WIN.INI file distributed with your system associates the
file extension .220 with the VT220 emulator. This lets you run Set-Up
configuration files with a .220 extension as if they were the VT220
emulator.
You click on the Set-Up configuration file in the MS-DOS Executive
window and start the emulator with the settings contained in that
Set-Up configuration file.
You can also save or start Set-Up configuration files after you start the VT220
emulator. To do this, use either the Save Set-Up Parameters or the Recall
Set-Up Parameters selection from the Action screen.

Saving and Recalling Set-Up Files
After you select the desired Set-Up settings, you can save and recall them
from the default file, DEFAULT.220, or a file you specify.
When you start the VT220 emulator, it looks for one of these files and initializes the emulator to the values contained in that file.

Saving VT220 Selection Settings
To save your VT220 Set-Up selections:
1. Select on the Actions screen.
2. Click on the Save Set-Up Parameters.

13-2

Using VT220 Special Features

IIIII

A dialog box asking for a file name is displayed. The dialog box either
displays the default file name or the last file name you entered. You
may edit this file name or replace it.
NOTE
If you select a currently displayed file, any settings you made

replace any existing settings in that file.
3. To save your settings in the new or selected file, click on the Ok command button.

Recalling VT220 Selection Settings
To recall VT220 selection settings under Set-Up:
1. Select the Actions screen.
2. Click on the Recall Set-Up Parameters.
A dialog box is displayed asking for a file name. It will also either
display the default file name or the last file name you entered. You may
edit this file name or replace it.
3. To recall saved settings from the selected file, click on the Ok command button.

Receiving Characters From the Host Into a File
The status portion of your screen indicates whether session logging is active
or idle during this process.
To receive or log characters from a host into a file using session logging:
1. Select the Actions screen.
2. Click on the Receive File selection.
A drop-down menu displays the Receive .File options.
3. Select the Open File or the Open and Append File option.
A dialog box asks for the name of the file you want to receive the
characters.
4. Type in the file name.
5. To begin receiving characters into the file, click on the Ok command
button.

13-3

IIIII

Using VT220 Special Features

6. To stop receiving and close the file, select Close File from the Receive
File menu.
To suspend reception of characters without closing the file, you can
alternately select On and Off from the Receive File menu.

Autotyping Characters to the Host
The status portion of your screen indicates whether autotyping is active or
idle during this process.
When a file is autotyped to VMS, you must enable HOSTSYNC under VMS by
typing:
$

SET TERMINAL/HOSTSYNC

This prevents data overruns on a VMS host.
To autotype characters to the host from a file as if you entered them from the
keyboard:
1. Select the Actions screen.
2. Select Send File.
3. Select the Open File option.
A dialog box is displayed asking for the name of the file you want to
autotype.
4. Type in the file name.
S. To begin autotyping the specified file to the host, click on the Ok
command button.
File autotyping stops when the end of the file is reached.
You can also stop autotyping the file by selecting Close File from the
Send File menu.

13-4

Chapter 14
Using the VT240
Terminal Emulator

The VT240 terminal emulator is a standard MS-Windows application that
offers many Set-Up parameters or selections that you can change or set
depending on your needs. These selections are saved in a file the emulator
reads when it starts.
The VT240 terminal emulator replaces the MS-Windows Executive window
with a full screen and offers you two video modes: Fast Text Only and Text
and Graphics. The Text and Graphics mode is used for ReGIS graphics applications such as DECslide and DECgraph.
Wherever the words VT240 emulator are used, it means the VT240 terminal
emulator for the workstation.
The VT240 emulator allows you to:
• Run host applications including ReGIS applications
• Receive or send information to or from a host using files
• Save and recall Set-Up selection settings using Set-Up configuration files
The chapter covers:
• Starting the VT240 emulator
• Exiting from the VT240 emulator

14-1

IIIII Using the VT240 Terminal Emulator
Starting the VT240 Emulator
Start the VT240 emulator either by:
• Using the Run command from the File menu in the MS-DOS Executive
window
• Typing the name of the appropriate VT240 file at the MS-DOS operating
system prompt

Using the Run Command to Start
The following VT240 files are used with the Run command to start your
VT240 emulator:
• VT240 if you want to use the Network Terminal Services
• VT240CMl if you want to use serial communications port 1
• VT240CM2 if you want to use serial communications port 2 (integral
modem)
NOTE

When you make a selection of VT240CM2, you cannot change to
another port selection in Set-Up.
To start the VT240 emulator using the Run command:
1. Select the Run command from the File menu.
2. Type in the name of the desired VT240 emulator file.
Your workstation is now emulating a VT240 terminal, and your host
login information is displayed.
NOTE
If your host login information is not displayed, see your system

administrator.

14-2

Using the VT240 Terminal Emulator

IIIII

Starting From the MS-DOS Operating System
Mter the MS-DOS operating system prompt, type in the appropriate VT240
file name using the following format:
VT240 [comm type] [Network Terminal Service (1-4)][/S-configuration file]

Where:
• VT240 comm type is either:
- COMI: if you want to use serial communications port 1
- COM2: if you want to use serial communications port 2 (integral
modem)
- NET: if you want to use a Network Terminal Service. You must specify the service name in Set-Up.
NOTE

When you make a selection of COM2, you cannot change to
another port selection in Set-Up.
• Network Terminal Service (1-4) specifies the services which will be
defined in the Communications Set-Up screen. When you enter the
VT240 emulator the first service named becomes active. You can specify up to four services.
• jS=configuration file allows you to select a Set-Up configuration file
containing settings tailored for your particular needs.
Mter you have typed in the VT240 file name, your host login information is
displayed.
NOTE

If your host login information is not displayed, see your system
administrator.

14-3

IIIII Using the VT240 Terminal Emulator
Exiting the VT240 Emulator
To exit from the VT240 emulator:
1. Log off the host system.

2. Press:
~

FlO is labeled the Exit key on your workstation legend strip.

14-4

Chapter 15
Using the VT240
Emulator Keyboard

This chapter:
• Shows a diagram of the workstation keyboard.
• Describes the differences between the workstation keyboard for the
Vf240 emulator and an actual Vf240 terminal keyboard.

The VT240 Emulator Keyboard
The layout of the Vf240 emulator keys on a workstation keyboard is identical to the Vf240 keyboard except for:
• Labels for some keys
• Location of the " -, <, and >, and Compose key
The labels referred to are those on the standard United States legend strip. All
countries are supplied with a separate emulator legend strip and should
ensure that this is used with the Vf240 emulator.

Labels
Some labels for the workstation top-row function keys differ from those on a
Vf240 terminal keyboard. These keys are indicated in Figure 15-1.

15-1

11111l/sing the VT240 Emulator Keyboard

DDDDD
Dc:=:J DODD
••••
•••••
DDDDDDDDDDDDDD DDD DDDD
o

DDDDDDDDDDDDDO DDD DDDD
DDDDDDDDDDDDDD
D DDDD
c:=JDDDDDDDDDDDc=J DDD DDDO
CJI
CJD
I
Figure 15-1

Workstation Keyboard

Except for the Alt and Compose keys, the VT240 emulator keys function
exactly as they do for the VT240 terminal. The Alt key on your keyboard lets
you access special VT240 emulator features. For more information about the
Alt key, see Chapter 17.
Activating the Compose key for the VT240 emulator involves using KEYB. For
more information, see Chapter 32.

Top-Row Function Keys
Most of the top-row function keys have functions assigned to them by your
application software. Refer to your application software documentation for
their use.·
This section describes keys with fixed meanings for the VT240 emulator. The
labels in parentheses refer to the labels on the standard United States legend
strip.
F1 (Hold)

15-2

Pressing the Fl (Hold) key freezes the screen. It also
lights the Hold indicator. When the light is on, none of
the characters you type are displayed on the screen until
you press the Fl (Hold) key again.

Using the VT2,jO Emulator Keyboard

IIIII

Pressing the F2 (Print Screen) key sends the screen text
to the printer.
Pressing the Shift/F2 (Print Screen) keys sends the screen
image to the printer. You can print both text and graphics with the VT240 emulator.
Pressing the Ctrl/F2 (Print Screen) keys sets or resets
Auto Print Mode.
F3 (Set-Up)

Pressing the F3 (Set-Up) key allows you to enter and exit
Set-Up.

F4 (Data/Talk)

F5 (Break)

Pressing the F5 (Break) key transmits a break if you
enabled Break in Set-Up. You may use it with other key
combinations when the optional integral modem is installed. For more information, refer to the VAXmate
Modem User's Guide.

Pressing the FlO (Exit) key while you hold down the
Ctrl key ( Clrl/Exil »), exits you from the VT240 emulator.
This action also returns you to the MS-Windows screen
you were in if you started the emulator under
MS-Windows.

FII (ESC)

Pressing FIl (ESC) generates an escape character when
in VT52 and VT100 modes. In VT200 modes, FII (ESC)
is a function key.

15-3

IIIII

Using the VT240 Emulator Keyboard

F12 CBS)

Pressing F12 (BS) generates a backspace character when
in VT52 and VT100 modes. In VT200 modes, F12 (BS) is
a function key.

F13 (LF)

Pressing F13 (LF) generates a line feed character when in
VT52 and VT100 modes. In VT200 modes, F13 (LF) is a
function key.

15-4

Chapter 16
Using Set-Up With
the VT240 Emulator

This chapter describes:
• How to enter and exit Set-Up
• How to make or change Set-Up settings
• Each Set-Up screen and all the settings

Entering Set-Up
The VT240 emulator offers several Set-Up selections that affect such settings
as tab stops, screen background, or cursor style.
To enter Set-Up, press the F3 (Set-Up) key.

Understanding the VT240 Set-Up Screens
After you enter Set-Up, the VT240 emulator displays Screen 16-1, the Actions
Screen, the first of eight Set-Up screens. For this discussion the Actions
Screen is being treated as a general example of all eight screens.

16-1

11111

Using Set-Up With the VT240 Emulator

/'
Communications.

Display

Pr~nter

Tabs

General
Telephone

ACTIONS

R~;i~C1r Terminal
Clear Display
Clear Communications
Recall Set-Up Parameters
Save Set-Up Parameters
Set Default Set-Up Parameters
Show Status
To MS-DOS
EJ<it VT240

Press:

Next ..... D1splay next screen
Prey
.Display previous screen
Set-Up
Exit Set-Up

Screen 16-1

Down arrow ... Move down aline

Up arrow ..... Move up a line
Select.
.Make a sele~tion

VT240 Set-Up

Each Set-Up screen displays:
• A screen menu in the first two lines of the screen with the currently
selected screen highlighted. You change screens by pressing the Next or
Previous Screen keys.
• The current selections (left column) and settings selections (right column) in the mid section of the screen. Some selections are actions that
can be taken, while others represent settings with different values.
These selections vary depending on the selected screen.
NOTE

You do not see the right column setting selections in any of the
example screens. They display only when you highlight a selection
from the left column.
• The keys used in VT240 Set-Up at the bottom of the screen.
Table 16-1 describes each of the Set-Up screens.

16-2

Using Set-Up With the VT240 Emulator

Table 16-1

IIIII

VT240 Set-Up Screens

Set-Up Screen

Description

Actions

Contains selections relating to clearing the screen and resetting
the emulator, saving and recalling Set-Up settings, and showing
status.

Communications

Contains selections for defining the communications environment, such as speed, parity, and disconnect.

Display

Contains selections for defining screen display, such as columns, cursor style, and background.

General

Contains commonly used general operating selections, such as
local echo, character sets, and terminal 10.

Keyboard

Contains selections for defining keyboard operating characteristics, such as margin bell, break, and answerback.

Printer

Contains selections for defining printer operations, such as
print size, type of printer, and form feed.

Tabs

Contains selections for defining the tab settings.

Telephone

Lets you determine how telephone answering is done. You can
also enter the telephone numbers you want to use with the
modem.

From each Set-Up screen you can:
• View the current selections and settings
• Change the current settings to suit your needs
• Use the Next or Previous Screen keys to access any of the other Set-Up
screens
All settings can be saved in or recalled from Set-Up files. You can also recall
the factory default settings.

16-3

IIIII

Using Set-Up With the VT240 Emulator

Using the Keyboard in VT240 Set-Up
You make selections in the VT240 emulator by using the keyboard. Once you
are running the VT240 emulator you can no longer use the mouse.
A description of the keys used in theVT240 Set-Up scr-eens is at the bottom
of each VT240 Set-Up screen. Figure 16-1 shows these keys.

DDDDD DDDD

DDDDDDDDDDDDDD
DDDDDDDDDDDDDD
DDDDDDDDDDDDDD

c:=JDDDDDDDDDDDCJ
CJI
I
Figure 16-1

DODD
DDDD

DODD
DODD
0001
CJD

VT240 Set-Up Keys

The Next and Prey Keys
Pressing the Next key displays the next Set-Up screen. Pressing the Prev key
displays the previous Set-Up screen.
The Select Key
Pressing the Select key lets you make a selection from either side of the
Set-Up screens depending on which side of the screen the highlight bar is on.
The Arrow keys
Pressing the up and down arrow keys moves you up or down the list of
settings and selections in either of the columns on the Set-Up screens.

16-4

Using Set-Up With the VT240 Emulator

IIIII

Changing Settings in VT240 Set-Up
To choose a Set-Up screen and change a setting:
1. Use the Next or Prev keys to select the desired Set-Up screen.
2. Mter the desired screen is displayed, to view selections, use the up or
down arrow key.
The current settings are displayed in the left column. The setting selections are displayed in the right column. As noted earlier the example
screens do not display the right column.
NOTE
The Actions Set-Up screen displays a set of prompts or directions
instead of settings in the right column. Follow those directions.

3. To select a setting, move to the right column by pressing the Select key.
The selection in the left column is now bolded to indicate what selection you are setting.
4. To highlight the desired setting, use the up or down arrow key.
S. To enter the setting, press the Select key.
The new setting is now highlighted in the left column.
NOTE
Some settings take effect immediately; others take effect when you
exit Set-Up.

Exiting Set-Up
To exit Set-Up, press the F3 (Set-Up) key again.

16-5

11111

Using Set-Up With the VT240 Emulator

Using Set-Up Table Information
The information for each Set-Up screen is organized as follows:
• A description of the Set-Up screen
• The VT240 screen
• A table containing:
- Selection definitions
- Setting descriptions for each selection
- Default settings

16-6

Using Set- Up With the VT240 Emulator

IIIII

Actions Screen
Whenever you enter VT240 Set-Up, it displays the Actions Set-Up screen.

UAci~i.M"
Keyboard

Communications
Printer

Display

General
Telephone

Tabs

Il~T;!PN,~;
Reset Terminal
Clear DispLay
Clear Communications
Recall Set-Up Parameters
Save Set-Up Parameters
Set Default Set-Up Parameters
Show Status
To MS-DOS
Exit VT240

Press:

Next ..... Display next screen
Prevo .... Display previous screen
Set-Up ... Exit Set-Up

Screen 16-2

Down arrow ... Move down a line
Up arrow ..... Move up a line

Select.

.Make a selection

VT240 Actions

Table 16-2 defines the Actions Set-Up selections.

16-7

11111

Using Set-Up With the VT240 Emulator

Table 16-2

VT240 Actions Set-Up

Selection

Function

Reset Terminal

Resets many operating settings to power up default state.
Exits ReGIS.
Does not affect communication, NRC (National Replacement
Characters) and multinational modes, and user-defined keys.

Clear Display

Clears the screen and sends the cursor to home position
when you exit Set-Up.

Clear
Communications

Clears communication lines immediately and stops any print
operation in progress. It also exits printer controller mode.
Does not affect LAT communications.

Recall Set-Up
Parameters

Replaces all existing Set-Up settings with values you saved in
a default file called DEFAULT.240 or in a file you specify.

Save Set-Up
Parameters

Saves the Set-Up settings in a default file called
DEFAULT.240 or in a file you specify.

Set Default Set-Up
Parameters

Replaces all current Set-Up settings with factory default settings.

Show Status

Displays information on the state of such items as modems,
file sending or receiving, and communications ports.

To MS-DOS

Lets you temporarily leave the VT240 emulator while you
use the MS-DOS -operating system.
If there is not enough memory to run COMMAND.COM, a
message is displayed. If there is enough memory to run
COMMAND.COM, but not enough memory to use other
MS-DOS commands, you are returned to the emulator
Set-Up.
To return to the emulator you must type the MS-DOS EXIT
command.

Exit VT240

16-8

Allows you to .exit the emulator and return to MS-Windows.

Using Set-Up With the VT240 Emulator

IIIII

The VT240 Show Status
Status is available only from the VT240 Actions screen. It is a reporting area
only. When selected, the Show Status selection displays the following
information:
• Receiving or sending a file
- Idle or In Progress
• Printing
- Normal Print Mode, Auto Print Mode, Printer Controller Mode
• Modem usage (valid only if the optional integral modem is installed,
and you selected the integral modem)
- DSR or No DSR
• Telephone modes (valid only if the optional integral modem is
installed, and you selected the integral modem)
- Manual or Automatic Answer
• Insert/Replace mode
• Keyboard
- KEYB file in use
For more information on KEYB, see Chapter 32.
• Character Set
- Character sets in use
• Communications
- Comm Port 1, Comm Port 2, or Network Terminal Service

16-9

IIIII (Ising Set-Up With the VT24() Emu/atoJ"
Communications Screen
The Communications Set-Up screen lets you define the communications environment between the terminal and host.
Normally a terminal can only connect to a host using a serial port. Your
workstation Vr240 emulator allows you to connect to a host using either:
• A serial port

or
• Network Terminal Services/the ThinWire Ethernet port

Display
Tab$.

General
Telephone

Comm Port 1: Data Leads Only
Disconnect, 2 second delay
XOFF at 64

Speed
9600
8 Bits - No Parity
1 Stop Blt
Transmit = Receive

F'ress:

Next.
.I:risplay next screen
Prev ..... Display previous screen
Set-Up . . Exit Set-Up

Screen 16-3

16-10

Down arrow ... Move down aline
Up arrow ..... Move up a line
Select.
. .. Make a selection

VT240 Communications

(!silll~

Set·{lp Witb tbe VT2·-j() Emu/ator

IIIII

Table 16-3 defines the Communications Set-Up selections and, where applicable. the settings.
Table 16-3

VT240 Communications Set-Up

Selection

Function

Network
Communications Port

You must be connected to the Network to use Network
communications.
When selected. a list of services ( 1-4) is displayed in the
left column. You select or change a service by using the
Select, up. or down arrow keys to highlight a items listed
on the screen.
For more information about selecting services, see the
section following this table.

Comm Port I: Data
Leads Only (default)

Select when you connect to the host using serial commu·
nications.

Comm Port I: Full
Modem Control

Select if your workstation is connected to the host
through the communications port and an external modem
requiring modem control is used.

Comm Port 2: Data
Leads Only

Select when you connect to the host using serial commu·
nications.

Comm Port 2: Full
Modem Control

Select if your workstation is connected to the host
through the communications port and an external modem
requiring modem control is used.

Comm Port 2:
Integral Modem
Port

Select if the optional integral modem is installed, and the
workstation uses it to communicate with the host.

Note: The integral modem may not be available for your
country.

16-11

IIIII Using Set-Up With the VT240 Emulator
Table 16-3

VT240 Communications Set-Up (cont.)

Selection

Function

Disconnect Delay

Selects (when modem control is used) the amount of
time before the workstation disconnects from the communications line if the carrier detect is lost.

Disconnect, 2
second delay
(default)

Most countries except the United Kingdom use the twosecond delay.

Disconnect, 60 ms
delay

The 60 millisecond delay is for use in the United Kingdom.

XOFF Point

Selects the XOFF point or disables the automatic
XON/XOFF now control.
For most applications you should set XOFF at 64 or 256.
If you set XOFF greater than 256 and have a buffer overnow problem, set XOFF to the next lower value.

XOFF at 64
(default )

The settings for XOFF are: 64 (default), 256, 512, and
1024.

No XOFF

Characters are received continuously from the host. Some
characters may be lost.

Speed

Selects the rate at which characters are received or transmitted. The default is 9600 baud.

Data Bits and Parity

Selects the character format used for communication with
a host computer. The default is 8 bits - No Parity.

Stop Bits

Selects the number of stop bits (lor 2) used for communicating with the host. The default is 1 stop bit.

Transmit = Receive

Characters will either be received and transmitted at the
same or differing transmit and receive rates. These settings are usually equal.
As a default, the transmit rate is set equal to the receive

rate (speed setting). Otherwise, transmit can be set to
1200.

16-12

Using Set-Up With the VT240 Emulator

IIIII

Selecting a Network Terminal Service
To access Network Terminal Service 1:
1. Move to Service 1 in the left column.
The right column prompts you to press the Select key to display a list of
available services.
2. To display the available services, press the Select key.
3. Highlight the service you want to access in the right column.
4. To enter it as an assigned service, press the Select key.
The service is displayed in the left column.
The service is marked as inactive until you exit Set-Up at which time
the service becomes active and is available for use.
5. Repeat these steps to select any other services you desire up to a limit
of four.
Services should be assigned in the order in which you want to access them.
When you exit Set-Up, Service 1 is always the first one activated. To change
services, press the Shift/Next or Shift/Prev keys.
For more information on defining the table size for these services in the
MSNET.lNI, see the VAXmate System Administrator's Guide.

16-13

11111

Using Set-Up With the VT240 Emulator

Display Screen
The Display Set-Up screen lets you define screen display characteristics.
/'
Actions
Keyboard

Communications
Printer

Tab.

General
Telephone

c~~~~~
80 Columns
Auto Wrap Off

Dark Background

Block Cursor
Visibl. Cur".ior

Monochrome:
1'10: Black

Ml: Ma;enta
1'12: Cyan
1'13: White

Fast Text Only Video Mode

Press:

Next ..... Display next screen
Prevo .... Display previous screen
Set-Up ... Exit Set-Up

Down arrow. , .Move down a line
Up arrow.
. .Move up a line
Select ....... Make a selection

Screen 16-4 VT240 Display
Table 16-4 defines the Display Set-Up selections and, where applicable, the
settings.

16-14

Using Set-Up With the VT24() Emulator

Table 16-4

IIIII

VT240 Display Set-Up

Selection

Function

Columns

Selects an 80- or I 32-column screen for text. A change to
this setting takes effect on exiting Set-lip.

80 Columns
(default)

Selects an 80-column screen.

132 Columns

Selects a 132-column screen. Fast Text can only display
80 columns at a time so the screen must be panned to
display the rest of the data. In Graphics Mode the font
size changes so that all 132 columns can be seen.

Auto Wrap

Selects whether text automatically wraps on the screen.

Auto Wrap On

Causes characters that reach the right margin to automatically be displayed in the first character position of the
next line.

Auto Wrap Off
(default)

Causes characters that go beyond the right margin to
overwrite the last character position of the current line.

Background

Selects the screen display type.

Dark Background
( default)

Selects a normal screen display (light text on a dark
background) .

Light Background

Selects reverse video screen display (dark text on a light
background) .

Cursor Style

Selects the text cursor style.

Block Cursor
(default )

Displays block cursor.

Underline Cursor

Displays underline cursor.

Text Cursor

Selects whether to display the text cursor in text mode.

Visible Cursor
( default)

Displays the cursor.

No Cursor

Does not display the cursor.

16-15

11111

Using Set-Up With the VT240 Emulator

Table 16-4

VT240 Display Set-Up (cont.)

Selection

Function

Monochrome

Selects the type of monitor you have.

Color

Selects the degree of intensity for character display; black
being the darkest and intense white the lightest.

One of the four degrees of gray used in text and graphics
mode. When Monochrome is the setting, this is the shade
of your text background.

One of the four degrees of gray used in text and graphics
mode. For both Monochrome and Color settings, this is
the shade for dimmed or reverse video.

One of the four degrees of gray used in text and graphics
mode. When Monochrome is the setting, this is what
shade your text is.
When Color is the setting, this is the shade for bolded
text.

One of the four degrees of gray used in text and graphics
mode. When Monochrome is the setting, this is the shade
for bolded text.
When Color is the setting, this is what shade your text is.

Video Mode

Determines how characters are displayed on your screen.

Fast Text Only Video
Mode (default)

Selects 80 X 25 text mode.

Text & Graphics
Video Mode

Selects 800 by 250 ReGIS graphics mode. Upon selection
it offers you the following additional settings:
A visible or invisible graphics cursor.

Sending or not sending the contents of a macro report in
response to the ReGIS Report Macrograph command
R(M ... ).
Printing or not printing the background color. It has no
effect on monochrome print mode.
A selection of: a compressed print image of 6 by 3
inches; expanded print image of 12 by 8 inches; or an
image printed in 8 by 12 inches and rotated 90 degrees.

16-16

Using Set.Up With the VT240 Emulator

IIIII

Using VT240 Video Modes
The Fast Text Only mode operates faster than the ReGIS Text and Graphics
mode. However, there are differences in the way each displays:
• ReGIS
• 132 columns
• Some of the line attributes
When operating the VT240 emulator in Text & Graphics mode, 132-column
displays appear exactly as they would on a VT240 Terminal.
When operating the VT240 emulator in the Fast Text Only mode, all 132
columns cannot be viewed at the same time. Only the first 80 of the 132
columns are displayed.
To view the rest of the columns:
( Shift/right arrow)

Displays the columns 53-132

( Shift/left arrow)

Displays columns 1-80

Displaying Line Attributes
When using the VT240 emulator in the Text & Graphics mode, all line attrib·
utes are displayed as they would on a VT240 Terminal.
When using the VT240 emulator in Fast Text Only mode, some line attributes
are displayed differently for double width and double height/double width.

16-17

IIIII Using Set· Up With the VT240 Emulator
Double Width Lines for Fast Text Only
When using double width characters in the Fast Text Only mode, they are
displayed as that character followed by a space. For example:
t est

Double Height/Double Width Lines for Fast Text Only
When using double height/double width characters in the Fast Text Only
mode, they are displayed as that character followed by a space with a blank
line inserted before the next line of characters.
For example, entries of the word "test" on two separate lines would display
as:
t est
t est

Since double height takes up two lines the text is on the first line followed
by a blank line on the second line.

Displaying Character Attributes
All of the character attributes for a VT240 Terminal are supported. The
exception:
When operating in the Fast Text Only mode, characters intended to be under·
lined will be displayed without the underlining.

16-18

Using Set-Up With the VT240 Emulator 11111

General Screen
The General Set-Up screen lets you define a group of commonly used general
operating settings.

Actions
Keyboard

Communications
Printer

General
Telephone

Display
Tab,,;,

CURRENT SETTINGS
On-Line
Local Echo 011
No New Line
DEC Multinational Character Set
VT2C)O - 7 bit controls
User Defined Keys Unlocked
User Features Unlocked

Press:

Next ..... D splay next screen
Prev. . .. 0 sp lay prey ious screen
Set-Up ... E it Set-Up

Screen 16-5

Down arrow ... Move down a line
Up arrow ..... Move up aline

Select.

. .Make a selection

VT240 General

Table 16-5 defines the General Set-Up selections and, where applicable, the
settings_

16-19

11111

Using Set·Up With the VT240 Emulator

Table 16-5

VT240 General Set-Up

Selection

Function

Line Mode

Lets you select the mode of operation.

On·Line
(default)

Lets the workstation communicate with a host computer.

Local

Puts a host computer on hold. Data entered at the keyboard goes directly to the workstation screen only.

Local Echo

Enables or disables the local echo setting.

Local Echo Off
(default)

Directs characters from the keyboard to a host computer
only. The host in turn mayor may not send the charac·
ters back to the screen.

Local Echo On

Directs characters from the keyboard to the screen as
well as to the host computer. It is used when the host
does not send characters back to the screen.

New Line

Selects whether the Return key generates a carriage return only or a carriage return and a line feed.

No New Line
(default)

Generates a carriage return only. Received carriage reo
turns do not cause a new line operation.

New Line

Generates a carriage return and a line feed. Received carriage returns cause a new line operation.
Note: When the VT240 emulator is in numeric keypad
mode, this setting affects the Enter key in the same way it
does the Return key.

Multinational Character
Set

Allows you to choose either the ISO Latin· I or the DEC
Multinational character set.

ISO Latin·l
Character Set

Selects the 8-bit ISO Latin-I character set.

DEC Multinational
Character Set
(default)

Selects the 8-bit DEC Multinational character set.

16-20

Note: This selection is disabled when you select NRC
mode.

Using Set-Up With the VT240 Emulator 11111

Table 16-5

VT240 General Set-Up (cont.)

Selection

Function

Multinational Mode

Determines character set mappings used by the terminal.

NRC

Selects the 7-bit NRC (National Replacement Character)
mode. The NRC set depends on the keyboard loaded by
KEYB. For more information on KEYB, see Chapter 32.

Multinational
( default)

Selects the 8-bit MCS (Multinational Character Set, including the 7 -bit ASCII character set.
Note: This selection is disabled when an MCS or ISO
Latin-! keyboard is loaded.

Terminal Emulation

Identifies your terminal as a VT52, VT100, VT200 with
7-bit controls (default), or VT200 terminal with 8-bit
controls.

User Defined Keys

Selects whether a host can change user-defined key
(UDK) definitions.

User Defined Keys
Locked

Prevents new UDKs from being changed.

User Defined Keys
Unlocked (default)

Allows new UDKs to be changed.

User Features
User Features
Locked
User Features
Unlocked (default)

Selects whether a host can change certain user features.
Prevents a host from changing certain user features.
Lets a host change certain user features.
The following user features are at1"ected by this feature:
Auto Repeat, Light/Dark Screen, Tab Stops, and Keyboard
Lock.
Note: Some software applications expect to control these
user features. If this applies to your particular software
application, select User Features Unlocked.

16-21

IIIII Using Set-Up With the VT240 Emulator
Keyboard Screen
The Keyboard Set-Up screen lets you define keyboard operating features.

Actions

."'" ":":!!,;!I¥ji!l;<~'iit.·"r'· ..•

Communications
Printer

Display
Tab.,;

General
Telephone

CURRENT SETTINGS
o

;:';'~' X :,i~;

<0 t;;,' >/;;<r:~"J /

Numeric keypad
Normal Cursor Keys
Margin Bell
Warning Bell
Break
Auto AnswerbacK
Answerback Not Concealed
Answerback String
Cap''; Lock

Fast Auto Repeat
Normal keyclick

Press:

Next
" .Display next screen
Prevo
.. Display previou$ screen
Set-Up ... Exit Set-Up

Down arrow.
Move down a line
Up arrow .... Move up a line
Select . . . . . . Make a selection

Screen 16-6 VT240 Keyboard
Table 16-6 defines the Keyboard Set-Up selections and, where applicable, the
settings.

16-22

Using Set· Up With the VT240 Emulator

IIIII

Table 16-6

VT240 Keyboard Set-Up

Selection

Function

Keypad Mode

Sets the terminal keypad for using either numbers or con·
trol codes.

Numeric Keypad
( default)

Sends numbers from the numeric keypad.

Application
Keypad

Sends escape sequences from the numeric keypad.

Cursor Keys

Selects the kind of control codes sent. It is disabled if the
terminal is in VT52 mode.

Normal Cursor
Keys
(defau It)

Sends ANSI cursor control sequences for cursor keys (up,
down, left and right).

Application
Cursor Keys

Sends application program control functions for cursor
keys.

Margin Bell

Determines whether the terminal sounds a bell tone
when the text cursor approaches the right margin.

Margin Bell
( default)

Selects the margin bell setting.

No Margin Bell

Turns off the margin bell setting.

Warning Bell

Determines whether the terminal generates a bell tone
such as for operator errors, mail messages, or system
messages.

Warning Bell
(default)

Turns on the warning bell setting.

No Warning Bell

Turns off the warning bell setting.

Break

Enables or disables the Break key function.

Break
(default)

Turns on the Break key function.

No Break

Turns off the Break key function.

16-23

11111

Using Set- Up With the VT240 Emulator

Table 16-6

VT240 Keyboard Set-Up (cont_)

Selection

Function

Auto Answerback

Selects whether the answerback message is automatically
sent to a host -computer after a communi-cation line connection.

No Auto
Answerback

Turns off the answerback message.

Auto Answerback
( default)

Turns on the answerback message.

Answerback

Selects whether your answerback message entry is displayed on the screen.

Answerback
Concealed

Your answerback message is not displayed on the screen.
so it will not be revealed. You cannot reset the setting to
Not Concealed, except by entering a new answerback
message.

Answerback Not
Concealed
( default)

Displays the answerback message as entered.

Answerback String

Allows an answerback message entry.
The emulator sends an answerba('k message when it receives an ENQ (enquiry control character), or if you or
the host send a Ctrl/llreak. In the case of ENQ, the message you enter is sent to a host without affecting screen
data or requiring further operator action.
When you make this selection, a cursor displays in the
right column. You can enter any keyboard character, lip
to a 30-character limit.

16-24

Using Set-Up With the VT240 Emulator 11111

Table 16-6 VT240 Keyboard Set-Up (cont.)
Selection

Function

Caps Lock

Determines the function of the Lock key. Pressing the
Lock key turns on the Lock indicator on the keyboard. To
clear the lock function, simply press the Lock key again.
Sends uppercase characters only for the alphabetic keys.

Shift Lock

The alphabetic keys send uppercase characters, and the
numeric/symbol keys send the top characters only.

Auto Repeat

Determines whether keystrokes automatically repeat
when you press and hold down a key.

No Auto Repeat

Sends only one character when you press and hold down
a key.

Fast Auto Repeat
(default)

Sends the character repeatedly if you press and hold it
down. Sending stops when the key is released. You can
select Slow, Normal, or Fast.
Note: If you are in VT100 mode, running EDT under
VMS, and hold down a key, autorepeating stops. It
resumes only when you release the key, and then press it
again. To prevent this from happening, after the VMS
prompt type:
$ SET TERMINAL/DEVICE=VT200
$ SET TERMINAL/INQUIRE

Keyclick

Determines the volume of your keyclicks.

Normal Keyclick
(default)

The settings here are Soft, Normal, and Loud.

No Keyclick

Keyclicks do not sound.

16-25

11111 Using Set- Up With the VT240 Emulator

Printer Screen
The Printer Set-Up screen lets you define printer (or auxiliary device) operations with the emulators.

/
Actions
Keyboard

Display

General

Tabs

Telephone:

Print Full Page

[lEC Printer
Print File Name
Normal Print Mode
Print Terminator: Form Feed

Press:

Next ..... Display next screen
Prevo .... Display previous screen
Set-Up ... Exit Set-Up

Screen 16-7

Down arrow ... Move down a line
Up arrow ..... Move up a line
Select ....... Make a selection

VT240 Printer

Table 16-7 defines the Printer Set-Up selections and, where applicable, the
settings.

16-26

Using Set-Up With the VT240 Emulator 11111

Table 16-7

VT240 Printer Set-Up

Selection

Function

Print Extent

Determines how much of the screen is printed during a text print operation_

Print Full Page
(default)

Prints the full screen_

Print Scroll Region

Prints only the scrolling region_

Printer Type

Lets you select the printer you want to use_

DEC Printer
( default)

The selections arc: DEC and Other. Other would be
any non-DIGITAL printer.

Print File Name

Used when you want to send the text on your
screen to a file. When selected you are prompted to
select either the default PRN file or to enter the
name of the file.
After you exit Set-Up. you press the Print Screen key
to send the text to the file.

Print Mode

Selects the operating mode for the printer.

Normal Print Mode
(default )

Only sends information to the printer when you invoke print functions from the keyboard.

Auto Print Mode

Prints the current text line when the terminal receives a line feed. form feed, or vertical tab code
from a host.

Printer Controller
Mode

Causes the printer port to treat the device connected to it as a terminal, while the VT240 emulator
monitors traffic. (The printer and host computer
transfer data without displaying the data on the
screen.)

Print Terminator

Selects whether a form feed terminator is sent at the
end of a print screen operation.

Print Terminator: None

Selects no terminator.

Print Terminator:
Form Fced
(default)

Selects the form feed terminator.

16-27

IIIII Using Set.Up With the VT240 Emulator
Tabs Screen
The Tabs Set-Up screen lets you set the terminal tab stop settings.
/
Actions

Communications

Keyboard

Printer

Display

General
Telephone

TABS

Clear All Tabs
Set e Column Tabs
Set Tab Int.rval
Manually Set Tabs

Press;

Next ..... Display next screen
Prevo .... Di.play previou. $crean

Down arrow ... Move down a line
Up arrow ..... Move up a line

Bet-Up ... Exit Set-Up

Select.

. .Make a selection

Screen 16-8 VT240 Tabs
Table 16-8 defines the Tab Set-Up selections and, where applicable, the
settings.

16-28

Using Set·Up With the VT240 Emulator 11111

Table 16-8

VT240 Tab Set-Up

Selection

Function

Clear All Tabs

Clears all tab settings.

Set 8 Column Tabs

Sets tabs every 8 columns, starting with column 9.

Set Tab Interval

When selected, the right column displays an Interval prompt
with the default value of eight. A tabs ruler is also displayed.
The default is changed by typing a new value in and pressing
the Select key.

Manually Set Tabs

Allows you to change individual tab stops. The tab intervals
are updated in a displayed ruler.

Setting VT240 Tabs Manually
To manually set tabs for the VT240 emulator:
1. Select the Manually Set Tabs option using the up or down arrow key.
2. Press:

A blinking cursor is now in the tabs ruler at the bottom of your Tabs
Set-Up screen.
See Screen 16-9 the Manually Setting Tabs screen.

16-29

IIIII Using Set-Up With the VT240 Emulator
/
General
Telephone.

Actions
Keyboard
TABS

Clear All Tabs
Set 8 Cel~ Tabs
Set Tab Interval

ifitil~1i~ii~i2~~~~~~~}&~~~~~rb~~~
~;g;~~:rB~~~.y~'i~~~~i~~~:~~~J~';
Press:

NeKt.
.Display next screen
Prevo ... . Display previous screen
Set-Up-... Exit Set-Up

Screen 16-9

Down arrow ... Move down a line
Up arrow .. .. . Move up a line
Select ....... Make a selection

Manually Setting VT240 Tabs

3. To position the cursor on the desired tab stop setting, use the right or
left arrow key.
NOTE

If you want to erase a tab stop, position the cursor on the tab
setting using the left or right arrow key, then press the Enter key.

4. To set the tab, press:

S. To exit manual tab setting, press:

16-30

Using Set-Up With the VT24() Emulator

IIIII

Telephone Screen
The Telephone Set-Up screen lets you store and display telephone numbers
for automatic dialing.
To use the Telephone selections, you should have:
• Installed the integral modem option (This is not available for all
countries. )
• Selected and saved from the Communications screen:
The Integral Modem selection
The appropriate transmit and receive speeds
For more information on telephone settings, see the VAXmate Modem User's
Guide.

/
Actions
Keyboard

Communications

Display

Printer

Tabs

General

',::" ::rel"",lI"ne,,;,

CURRENT SETTINGS
:::

""',:.,

,
"

,',

Manual Answer

A =
B

C =
D =

E =

=
=
J =

G =

H
I

PreS$:

Next.

Display next screen

Prey
.Display previous screen
Set-Up ... Exit Set-Up

Down arrow ... Move down a line
Up arrow, .... Move up a line
Select ....... Make a select ion

Screen 16-10

Telephone Set-Up

16-31

11111

Using Set-Up With the VT240 Emulator

Table 16-9 defines the Telephone Set-Up selections and, where applicable,
the settings.
Table 16-9

Telephone Set-Up

-----------------------------------------

Selection

Function

Modem Answer

Selects automatic telephone answering by the emulator, or
manual telephone answering by the user.

Manual Answer
(default)

Leaves the integral modem in talk mode after disconnecting
from the host and allows you to answer the incoming call.
Manual answer is required for normal telephone operation.

Auto Answer

Leaves the integral modem in data mode after disconnecting
from the host and allows the terminal to automatically answer the incoming call.

A-J =

Indicates that ten telephone numbers (A-J) can be stored for
automatic dialing.
Each time you select a letter from the left column, the right
column prompts you to enter a phone number.
To change or enter a phone number, move to the right column and type over the old one.
Repeat this process until you enter or change all the desired
phone numbers.
When you return to the left column, the phone numbers are
displayed in the left column along with their respective
letter A-J.
You save these settings by using the Save Parameters selection before exiting Set-Up.

16-32

Chapter 17
Using VT240
Special Features

This chapter tells you how to:
• Use configuration files
• Save and recall Set-Up selections
• Send or autotype characters to a host
• Receive characters from a host into a file using session logging

Using Configuration Files
The VT240 emulator allows you to save Set-Up settings in a Set-Up configuration file. You can have several of these files each specifying different
settings.

What the VT240 Emulator Does
When you start the VT240 emulator, it looks for the default Set-Up configuration file named DEFAULT.240. When found, this file configures your VT240
emulator with the initial values of all Set-Up selections.
If the VT240 emulator does not find the DEFAULT.240 file, it configures your
VT240 emulator with the factory default settings instead.

What You Can Do
When starting the VT240 emulator, you can direct it to run a Set-Up configuration file other than DEFAULT. 240.
You can also run configuration files after you start the VT240 emulator. To
do this use the Recall Set-Up Parameters selection as described in this
chapter.

17-1

IIIII

Using VT240 Special Features

These Set-Up configuration files need not reside in the current directory. You
can precede configuration file names with a directory path. For more information about appropriate file naming, see Chapter 30.
You can also save or start Set-Up configuration files after you start the VT240
emulator. To do this, use either the Save Set-Up Parameters or the Recall
Set-Up Parameters selection from the Action Set-Up screen.

Saving and Recalling Set-Up Files
After you select the desired Set-Up settings, you can save and recall them
from the default file, DEFAULT.240, or a file you specify.
When you start the VT240 emulator, it looks for one of these files and initializes the emulator to the values contained in that file.
The VT240 emulator also lets you create files in which you save Set-Up
settings. After making the desired Set-Up changes, you select the Save Set-Up
Parameters selection from the Actions screen. You can then create Set-Up
files with settings tailored to your:
• User preferences
• Applications
You can select any of these files while running the VT240 emulator by
choosing the Recall Set-Up Parameters selection from the Actions screen.

Saving VT240 Selection Settings
To save all your VT240 Set-Up selections:
1. Select the Actions screen.
2. Select the Save Set-Up Parameters.
3. To make a selection from the right column, press:

Either the default file name DEFAULT.240 or the name of the most
recently created save file is displayed in the right column.

17-2

Using VT240 Special Features

IIIII

4. To save your selections, do one of the following:
• Select the DEFAULT.240 file
• Select the currently displayed file
• Type in a new file name
NOTE

If you select a currently displayed file, the new values you set
replace the existing values in that file.
5. To save your selections in the new or selected file, press:

Recalling VT240 Selection Settings
. To recall VT240 selection settings under Set-Up:
1. Select the Actions screen.
2. Select the Recall Set-Up Parameters.
3. To make a selection from the right column, press:

Either the default file name DEFAULT.240 or the name of the most
recently created save file is displayed in the right column.
4. To recall your selections, do one of the following:
• Select the DEFAULT.240 file
• Select the currently displayed file
• Type in a file name to contain Set-Up values
5. To recall your saved Set-Up selections from the selected file, press:

17-3

IIIII

Using VT240 Special Features

Receiving Characters From the Host Into a File
Show Status in the Actions screen indicates whether session logging is active
or idle.
To receive or log characters from the host into a file using session logging:
1. Press:

The following prompt is displayed on the bottom line:
Receive filename:

2. Type in a file name into which characters logged in from a host will be
stored.
If the file name already exists, another prompt is displayed on the
bottom line asking you to do one of the following:
- Replace an existing file.
- Append to an existing file.
- Cancel the file logging.
3. To stop characters from logging into the file, press:

If you press these keys again, logging resumes. Pressing the Alt/Fll keys

is like using an on and off switch. You can use it to be selective about
the parts of a file you want to log.
4. To close the Receive file, press:

17-4

Using VT2·jO Special Features

IIIII

Autotyping Characters to the Host
Show Status in the Actions screen indicates whether autotyping is active or
idle.
When a file is autotyped to VMS, you must first enable HOSTSYNC under VMS
by typing:
$

SET TERMINAL/HOSTSYNC

This prevents data overruns on a VMS host.
To autotype characters to the host from a file as if you entered them from the
keyboard:
1. Press:

The following prompt is displayed on the bottom line:
Send filename:

2. Type in the name of the file which will be autotyped to the host.
File autotyping stops when the end of the file is reached.
You can also press the Alt/F 12 keys again to stop autotyping the file.

17-5

Chapter 18
Using Notepad

MS-Windows Notepad is a desktop application that lets you create, modify,
and display text files. Although you usually use Notepad to write notes or
short memos, you can also create and edit batch files.
This chapter contains information on how to:
• Start Notepad
• Type and format text
• Scroll
• Edit Notepad text
• Work with Notepad files

Starting Notepad
To start Notepad when it is neither in a window nor set aside as an icon in
the icon area, you must start it from its file name.
You use the MS-DOS Executive window, which is available either as an icon
or in a window. If it is not a window, you must first expand its icon into a
window.
To start Notepad:
1. Select the Run command from the File menu in the MS-DOS Executive
window.
MS-Windows displays a dialog box.
2. Type:
NOTEPAD

18-1

IIIII Using Notepad
3. Select the Ok command button.

When you start Notepad, it creates an empty, untitled window in which you
can type text. Figure 18-1 shows the Notepad window.
Flashing insertion point

Note ad - (untltled)

Figure 18-1

::I

Notepad Window

Typing Text
You can type in the Notepad window whenever it is active. Notepad enters
text at the insertion point, which initially is displayed in the upper-left corner of the Notepad window. It moves to the right as you type.
Text is encoded in its ANSI representation. For more information about ANSI
text representations, see Appendix G.

18-2

Using Notepad

11111

Formatting Text
To format text with Notepad, type the text as you want it to display. Figure
18-2 shows how to format text with the Return and Tab keys.

Press the Return key
twice to insert a space
between paragraphs.

Press the Return
key to end a line.

Note ad - MEMO. TXT

COMpany t1eeting
Friday, DeceMber 7
8:00 PM
Pancho s Uilla Restaurant
I

At our Quarterly cOMpany Meeting this Friday, the following eMployees
will receive a special award for perforMance in the last Quarter:
Lisa La FlaMMe

Sales

SOx over Quota

R&D

New Technique

Press the Tab key to indent
a line.

Figure 18-2

Press the Tab key to insert
tab stops.

Formatting With the Return and the Tab Keys

You can also wrap text automatically at the right edge of the window to
continue to the next line. To wrap text, use the Word Wrap command from
the Edit menu. To cancel wrapping, use the Word Wrap command again.

18-3

11111

Using Notepad

Scrolling
If you have not set text to wrap and you type beyond the borders of the
window, Notepad automatically scrolls the text, to the left or lip, so the
insertion point remains visible in the window.

When text is too long or too wide to be displayed at one time, you can scroll
through the file to view the text.
To scroll a Notepad file, use scroll bars. Figure 18-3 shows the scroll bars.
The position of the scroll box corresponds to where
you scroll in the file. To scroll to the middle of your
file, drag the scroll box to the middle of the scroll bar.

At our Quarterly cOl'lpany I'Ieeting this Friday, the following el'lployees
will receive a special award for perforMance in the last QUal'ter:
lisa LaFlal'll'le

Sales

50/, over Quota

Jal'les Gregory

R&D

New Technique

Chuck Silvers

Service -

20 years

I hope you will join I'Ie in congratulating these individuals for their
achievel'lents, and in the festivities to follow,

Click in the gray area to scroll one screen.
Click on the up or down scroll arrow to scroll one line.
Click on the left or right scroll arrow to scroll one character.

Figure 18-3

Scrolling

To use the keyboard, press the arrow keys to move the insertion point in the
direction you want to scroll. When you reach the edge of the window, press
the arrow key again to scroll the window in that direction. Press the Pg Up
key to scroll lip one screen; press the Pg Dn key to scroll down one screen.

18-4

Using Notepad

11111

Editing in Notepad
To edit text in the Notepad window, use commands from the Edit menu. You
can delete text, move or copy text to a new location, and search for text
within a Notepad file.
You can also transfer text between Notepad and other applications using the
Clipboard. When you delete or copy text with the Notepad Cut or Copy
command, Notepad puts the text in the Clipboard. The Notepad Paste command copies information from the Clipboard back into your Notepad file.
The following sections describe how to:
• Move the insertion point
• Select text
• Edit text using the commands from the Edit menu.

Moving the Insertion Point
When you open a Notepad window, an insertion point is displayed. When
you work in another window and return to Notepad, the insertion point is
displayed where you left: it in the Notepad window.
You can move the insertion point whenever there is text or spaces. To move
the insertion point, click on the location where you want it.
To use the keyboard, press the arrow keys. Pressing the up or down arrow
keys once moves the insertion point up or down one line. Pressing the right
or left arrow keys once moves the insertion point one character to the right
or left.

18-5

IIIII Using Notepad
Selecting Text
Before selecting a command from the Edit menu, first select the text you
want the command to affect. You select text either with the mouse or the
keyboard or with the Select All command fmm the Edit menu. Figure 18-4
shows selected text.

:'I

Note ad - 11Etl0, TXT

Subj ect: COMpany Meeting
Friday, DeceMber 7
8:00 PM
Pancho I s Villa Restaurant
At our Quarterly cOMpany Meeting this Friday, the following eMPloyees
will receive a special award for perforMance in the last Quarter:
Lisa La Fl aMMe

Sales

S0X over Quota

JaMes Gregory

R&D

New Technique

Chuck ~ilvers

Service -

20 years
individuals for their

Figure 18-4

Selected Text

Selecting Text With the Mouse or Keyboard

To select text:
1. Point to the beginning of the text you want to select.
2. Drag the mouse over the text you want to select.
Notepad highlights the selected text.

18-6

Using Notepad

IIIII

To use the keyboard:
1. Press the arrow keys to move the insertion point to one end of the text
you want to select.
2. While holding the Shift key, press the arrow keys to move the insertion
point to the other end of the text you want to select.
Notepad highlights the selected text.

Selecting Text with the Select All Command
To select all the text in the file, use the Select All command from the Edit
menu.

Canceling an Edit
To cancel the most recent edit you made, use the Undo command from the
Edit menu. You must use this command immediately after the edit and before
you perform any other editing function.

Deleting Text
To delete text:
1. Select the text you want to delete.

2. Select the Clear command from the Edit menu.
To use the keyboard, press the Shift/Del keys.
Notepad deletes the selected text.
You can also delete text by copying it to the Clipboard. However, each time
you put text in the Clipboard, the new text replaces any information already
in the Clipboard. You can copy or paste this text later.
To delete text from Notepad and copy it to the Clipboard:
1. Select the text you want to delete.
2. Select the Cut command from the Edit menu.
To use the keyboard, press the Del key.
Notepad copies the text to the Clipboard.

18-7

IIIII Using Notepad
To paste text from the Clipboard into any part of any document:
1. Move the insertion point where you want the text.
2. Select the Paste command.
To use the keyboard, press the Ins key.
Notepad pastes the text at the insertion pOint.

Moving Text
To move text:
1. Select the text you want to move.
2. Select the Cut command from the Edit menu.
To use the keyboard, press the Del key.
Notepad moves the selected text to the Clipboard.
3. Move the insertion point where you want the text.
4. Select the Paste command from the Edit menu.
To use the keyboard, press the Ins key.
Notepad places the text at the insertion point.

Copying Text
To copy text:
1. Select the text you want to copy.
2. Select the Copy command from the Edit menu.
Notepad copies the selected text to the Clipboard.
3. Move the insertion point where you want the copied text.
4. Select the Paste command from the Edit menu.
To use the keyboard, press the Ins key.
Notepad displays the text at the insertion point.

18-8

Using Notepad

IIIII

Finding Text
You can find and change text in a Notepad file with the commands from the
Search menu. When you use a Search menu command, you can start searching for text at any point. You can also specify whether Notepad matches
uppercase and lowercase characters. The Search menu commands do not
search for text in the index line.
To find text:
1. Move the insertion point where the search begins.
2. Select the Find command from the Search menu.
To use the keyboard, press CtrljF.
Notepad displays the Find dialog box. Figure 18-5 shows the Find dialog box.

Search for:

o Match Case

Ok]
(Cancel )

Figure 18-5

Find Dialog Box

3. In the Search For text box, type the text you want Notepad to find.
Notepad ignores capitalization when it searches for text unless you tell
it otherwise.
To find occurrences of text that have the same arrangement of
uppercase and lowercase letters, select the Match Case command.
4. Select the Ok command button to start searching.
Notepad searches forward from the insertion point and highlights the
first occurrence of the specified text. Notepad tells you if the text does
not occur after the insertion point.
5. To find further occurrences of the specified text, use the Find Next
command from the Search menu.
To use the keyboard, press the F3 key.

18-9

IIIII

Using Notepad

If you use the Find Next command, Notepad immediately searches for the
last specified text. With the Find Next command, you can find and edit
repeated occurrences of the text you specified with the Find command.
NOTE
If you use the Find Next command without first using the Find

command, Notepad displays the Find dialog box. Type the text you
want Notepad to find.

Working With Notepad Files
With commands from the File menu in the Notepad window, you can:
• Open a file
• View files in other directories
• Save a file
• Print a file
You delete files with commands from the File menu in the MS-DOS Executive
window. The following sections describe how to use Notepad files.

File Size
As you edit a file, Notepad records how large it is. Notepad shows the size of
the file as the percentage of remaining free space. When a file has less than
10 percent free space, you should separate the file into smaller files.
NOTE

Free space does not refer to the amount of available memory. It
refers only to the amount of text you can have in a file.
To see how much free space remains, use the About command from the
System menu.
Notepad displays the amount of free space.

18-10

Using Notepad 11111

Opening a File
You can open new or existing files in the Notepad window. If you open a
Notepad file when another file is already open, Notepad closes the file that
was already opened. If you have changes that are not saved in the file that
was already open, Notepad asks you if you want to save them before it closes
the file. Table 18-1 shows what you can reply to Notepad and what the
resulting action is.
Table 18-1

Replies for Opening a File

Action

Yes

Saves the changes

Discards the changes

Cancel

Continues working in the current file

Opening a New File
To open a new, blank Notepad file, use the New command from the File
menu.
Notepad opens a new file in the Notepad window.
Opening an Existing File
You should only open text (ASCII) files in the Notepad window. Text files
generally have one of the following file extensions: .TXT, .BAT, or .IN!. If
you do not specify a file extension, Notepad appends a default file extension.
To override the default, you must end the file name with".". For example,
to open the file C:\TESTCHAR, you must type:
C;\TESTCHAR.

You can open an existing file from either the Notepad window or from the
MS-DOS Executive window.
If you try to open a file that is not a text file, Notepad sends the message

"Not a valid Notepad file."

18-11

11111 Using Notepad

To open an existing file with the Notepad Open command:
1. Select the Open command from the File menu.
Notepad displays the Open dialog box. Directories and drives are
enclosed in brackets. Figtii'e 18-6 shows the Open dialog box.

File name

~CU".n' d;""o,y path

File naMe: IJUltJ
I~E~OI IXI'

+: \windows

[., ]

]1 ( Cancel )

[I-A-I~
-B-]
[-C-]

(

Open

Drives
Parent directory

Figure 18-6 Open Dialog Box
2. From the list of file names, select the file name you want to open, or
type a path name and a file name in the text box at the top of the
dialog box.
The file name can include wildcard characters.
You can also double-click on the file name you want to open.
3. Select the Open command button.
Notepad opens the specified file.
To open an existing file from the MS-DOS Executive window, double-click on
the file name you want to open or select the file name and press the Return
key.
MS-Windows starts Notepad and opens the file.

18-12

Using Notepad

IIIII

Creating a Time Log File

Notepad can create a time log file to keep track of how you spend your time
during the day. To create a time log file, type .LOG as the first line in a
Notepad file and save the file. Notepad automatically appends the current
date and time to the end of the file every time you open it.
To add the current date and time to a file you already have open, use the
Time/Date command from the Edit menu.
To use the keyboard, press the FS key.
To create an accurate log of how you spend your time, edit the file to add
text after each date and time.

Viewing Files in Other Directories
Initially, Notepad displays only text files (.TXT), as well as drives and directories. You can view files other than text files in other directories or drives.
To view files in other directories:
1. Select the Open command from the File menu.
Notepad displays the Open dialog box.
2. In the text box, type the directory, drive, or file name you want to read.
For example, you can type· .BAT to list all the files having the file
extension .BAT.
To move between directories, you can also double-click on the drive
letter symbols, the directories, or the [oO] symbol.
3. Select the Open command button.
Notepad lists the specified files.
The Open dialog box remains on the screen until you open a specific
file or cancel the command.

18-13

IIIII Using Notepad
Saving a File
When you create a new file or when you finish editing a file, you can save it
and open it later. To save a Notepad file, you can use one of two commands
from the File menu:
• Save As - Saves and names a new file
• Save - Saves a current file

Saving a New File
The Save As command names and saves a new file. It can also save the current file under a new file name and retain the original copy of the file on the
disk under the old file name.
To save a new file:
1. Select the Save As command from the File menu.
Notepad displays the Save As dialog box. Figure 18-7 shows the Save As
dialog box.

Save file as:

C:\windows
IL.;.;ME;;;.;MO~_ _ _ _-JI [ Save)
( Cancel )

Figure 18·7 Save As Dialog Box
2. Type a name for the file.
If you do not type a file extension, Notepad automatically adds .TXT to
the file name.

18-14

Using Notepad

IIIII

3. Select the Save command button.
Notepad saves the file on the disk. The file remains on the screen so
that you can continue editing it. Notepad displays the name of the file
in the title bar of the Notepad window.
NOTE
If you type the name of a file that already exists, Notepad asks if

you want to replace the existing file with the file you are saving.
To replace the existing file, select the Yes command button.
Otherwise, select the No command button and type a different file
name.
Saving Changes
The Save command saves your changes to the current tile on the disk. To
save changes to the current file, use the Save command from the File menu.
Notepad replaces the file on the disk with the current file.

Printing a File
The Print command prints your Notepad files. To print a file, use the Print
command from the File menu.

Deleting a File
You can delete a Notepad file when you no longer want it or to make room
for other files on your disk. To delete a file, use the Delete command from
the File menu.

18-15

Chapter 19
Using Cardfile

MS-Windows Cardfile is a desktop application that organizes information such
as names, addresses, phone numbers, and directions. Cardfile operates on a
file of cards that are organized alphabetically. As you use Cardfile, the cards
sort themselves automatically to remain alphabetized.
This chapter describes how to:
• Start Cardfile
• Create a card file
• Move through a card file
• Edit cards in a card file
• Work with card files

Starting Cardfile
To start Cardfile when it is neither in a window nor set aside as an icon in
the icon area, you must start it from its file name.
You use the MS-DOS Executive window, which is available either as an icon
or in a window. If it is not a window, you must first expand its icon into a
window.
To start Cardfile:
1. Select the Run command from the File menu in the MS-DOS Executive
window.
The MS-DOS Executive window displays a dialog box.

19-1

11111l/sing CardJUe
2. Type:
CARDFILE

3. Select the Ok command button.
When you start Cardfile, it displays an untitled window in which you create
cards and edit them. Figure 19-1 shows the Cardfile window.
Flashing insertion point

Figure 19-1

19-2

Index line

Cardfile Window

Using Card/ile

IIIII

Creating a Card File
Cardfile displays a new file as a single, blank card. This section describes:
• Index line
• Typing text
• Formatting text
• Adding new blank cards

Index Line
The index line is a bar at the top of each card. Cardfile uses the text you
place in the index line to sort the cards alphabetically.
To place text in the index line:
1. Select the Index command from the Edit menu, or double-click on the
card's index line.
Cardfile displays the Index dialog box. Figure 19-2 shows the Index
dialog box.

Index Line: ...
11 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _......
[

Figure 19-2

]

( Cancel)

Index Dialog Box

2. Type text in the text box.
3. When you finish editing the text, select the Ok command button.
The text becomes the index line.

19-3

IIIII Using Cardfile
Typing Text
After you create an index line, you can add text to a card; however, the
Cardfile window must be active. When you have more than one card in your
file, Cardfile places the text on the front card.
Cardfile enters text at the insertion point, which initially is displayed at the
upper-left corner of the card. The insertion point moves to the right as you
type.
Text is encoded in its ANSI representation. For more information about ANSI
text representations, see Appendix G.

Formatting Text
Type the text as you want it to display. Figure 19-3 shows how to format text
with the Return and Tab keys.
Press the Tab key to indent a line.
Press the Return key to end a line.

-Great food
-Reasonable prices
-Conference and party facilities
-Uery authentic atMosphere

Figure 19-3 Formatting With the Return and Tab Keys

19-4

Using Cardfile

IIIII

Adding a Card
You can add a new card to a file at any time. To add a new card:
1. Select the Add command from the Card menu.
Cardfile displays the Add dialog box.
2. Type the text for the new card's index line.
3. Select the Ok command button.
Cardfile adds the new card to your file in alphabetical order and scrolls
the file to display the new card at the front.

Moving Through a File
Cardfile commands affect only the front card. To look at or act upon a card,
you must move the card to the front of the file.
To move through the file, you can:
• Scroll
• Move a specific card directly to the front
• Search for a specific occurrence of text
Cardfile, however, always keeps the cards in alphabetical order.

19-5

IIIII Using Cardfile
Scrolling
The Cardfile window has a horizontal scroll bar at the bottom of the window.
Figure 19-4 shows how to scroll through a file.

127-1958 for reservations
-Gmt food
-Reasonable prices
-Conference facilities
-Uery authentic atMosphere

Click here with the
mouse or press the
Pg Up key to
display the previous
card.

Drag the scroll box
with the mouse to
move within the file.

Click here with the
mouse or press the
Pg Dn key to
display the next card

Figure 19-4 Scrolling Through a File
The scroll box in the horizontal scroll bar shows your relative pOSition in the
file. When the first card of the file is displayed in front, the scroll box is
displayed at the far left of the scroll bar. When the last card is displayed at
the front, the scroll box is displayed at the far right.

19-6

Using Cardfile

IIIII

Moving a Card to the Front
To move a specific card to the front of a file:
1. Select the Go To command from the Search menu.
Cardfile displays the Go To dialog box. Figure 19-5 shows the Go To
dialog box.

Goto:

[

1,,-1_ _ _- - - '

Figure 19-5

] (Cance 1 )
Go To Dialog Box

2. In the text box, type the index line for the card you want to move to
the front.
You only have to type enough text to distinguish the card from the
other cards.
3. Select the Ok command button.
The card moves to the front of the file.
If you can see a card's index line, you can move the card to the front of the
file by clicking on the index line.

To use the keyboard, press the Ctrl key to move a card to the front. When
you press the Ctrl key and a letter on the keyboard, Cardfile scrolls to display the first card that has that letter as the first letter of its index line.

Changing the Index Line
To change the text in the index line:
1. Move the card you want to change to the front of the file.
2. Select the Index command from the Edit menu, or double-click on the
card's index line.
Cardfile displays the Index dialog box with the text from the current
index line in the text box.

19-7

IIIII Using Cardfile
3. Type the new text.
4. Select the Ok command button.
The new text becomes the card's index line.
Cardfile automatically replaces the card in the correct alphabetical order in
the file, then scrolls the file to display the card at the front.

Editing Cards
You edit text in a card with commands from the Edit menu. You can change
or delete text, or move or copy text to a new location.
You can also transfer text between Cardfile and other applications by using
the Clipboard and the Cut, Copy, and Paste commands.
The following sections describe how to move the insertion point, select text,
and edit cards.

Moving the Insertion Point
When you open a card file, an insertion point is displayed. When you work
in another window, then return to the card file, the insertion point is displayed where you left it in the Cardfile window.
To move the insertion point, point where you want it and click the mouse
button.
To use the keyboard, press the arrow keys. Pressing the up and down arrow
keys moves the insertion point up or down one line. Pressing the right and
left arrow keys moves the insertion point one character to the right or left.

19-8

Using Cardfile

IIIII

Selecting Text
Before you use a command from the Edit menu, first select the text you want
the command to affect. Figure 19-6 shows selected text.

Corner of H,E, 8th and Main streets
in Bellevue

Figure 19-6 Selected Text
To select text:
1. Point to the beginning of the text you want to select.
2. Drag to the end of the text you want to select.
Cardfile highlights the selected text.
To use the keyboard:
1. Press the arrow keys to move the insertion point to the beginning of the
text you want to select.
2. While holding the Shift key, press the arrow keys to move the insertion
point to the end of the text you want to select.
Cardfile highlights the selected text.

19-9

IIIII Using Cardfile
Canceling an Edit
To cancel the most recent edit you made, use the Undo command from the
Edit menu. You must use this command immediately after the edit.

Deleting Text
To delete text from a card:
1. Select the text you want to delete.
2. Select the Cut command from the Edit menu.
To use the keyboard, press the Del key.
Cardfile deletes the text.
The deleted text is placed in the Clipboard. Each time you place text in the
Clipboard, however, the text replaces the previous information.
To replace deleted text, use the Paste command. To use the keyboard, press
the Ins key.

Moving Text
You can move text from one place to another in a card by first deleting it,
then pasting it into its new location. You can move text within the same card
or to another card.

Moving Text Within the Same Card
To move text on the same card:
1. Select the text you want to move.

2. Select the Cut command from the Edit menu.
To use the keyboard, press the Del key.

3. Move the insertion point where you want the text to be moved.
4. Select the Paste command from the Edit menu.
To use the keyboard, press the Ins key.
Cardfile moves the text to the insertion point.

19-10

Using Cardfile

IIIII

Moving Text to Another Card
To move text to another card:
1. Select the text you want to move.
2. Select the Cut command from the Edit menu.
To use the keyboard, press the Del key.
3. Move the card on which you want to place the text to the front.
4. Move the insertion point where you want to place the text.
5. Select the Paste command from the Edit menu.
To use the keyboard, press the Ins key.
Cardfile moves the text to the new card.

Copying Text
To copy text more than once in a file, copy the text to the Clipboard, then
paste the text where and as often as you want it.
Copying Text to the Same Card
To copy text to the same card:
1. Select the text you want to copy.
2. Select the Copy command from the Edit menu.
Cardfile copies the selected text to the Clipboard.
3. Move the insertion point where you want the copied text.
4. Select the Paste command from the Edit menu.
To use the keyboard, press the Ins key.
Cardfile copies the text at the insertion point.
Copying Text to Another Card
To copy text to another card:
1. Select the text you want to copy.
2. Select the Copy command from the Edit menu.

19-11

Using Cardfile

IIIII

If you use the Find Next command, Cardfile immediately searches for the last
specified text. With the Find Next command, you can find and edit repeated
occurrences of the text specified with the Find command.

Adding Information From Other Applications
Cardfile can transfer both text and artwork between a card and another application. For example, you can create a small map in MS-Paint, then transfer it
to a card containing a friend's address. The amount of information you can
transfer is limited by the size of the card.
To add information from other applications:
1. Place the information in the Clipboard.
Usually, you select the Cut or Copy command from the Edit menu of
the other application.
2. If you are transferring artwork, move to the Cardfile window and select
the Picture command from the Edit menu.
If you transfer a picture, you must use the Text command from the Edit

menu to process text again.
3. On the card, move the insertion point where you want the information.
4. Select the Paste command from the Edit menu.
To use the keyboard, press the Ins key.
Cardfile moves the information to the insertion pOint.

Restoring a Card
You can restore a card to its original condition as long as it remains at the
front of the file. Once you scroll, you cannot reverse any changes.
To restore a card, use the Restore command from the Edit menu.

19-13

11111

Using Cardfile

Deleting a Card
You can delete a card from a file. However, you can only replace a deleted
card by retyping the entire card.
To delete a card:
1. Move the card you want to delete to the front of the file.
2. Select the Delete command from the Card menu.
Cardfile deletes the front card.

Copying a Card
To copy the information in a card to another card:
1. Move the card you want to copy to the front of the file.
2. Select the Duplicate command from the Card menu.
Cardfile appends an exact copy of the front card to the front of the file.

Working With Card Files
With commands from the File menu, you can:
• Open a file
• View files in other directories
• Save a file
• Print a card or a file
• Merge files
You delete files with the File menu in the MS-DOS Executive window.

File Size
As you edit a file, Cardfile records its size. Cardfile shows the size of a file as

the number of cards in the file.
To find out how many cards are in a file, use the About command from the
System menu.
Cardfile displays the number of cards in the file.

19-14

Using Cardfile

IIIII

Opening a File
You can open a new or existing file in the Cardfile window. If you open a
file when another is already open, Cardfile closes the current file. If you
have changes that are not saved in the current file, Cardfile asks if you want
to save them before it closes the file. Table 19-1 shows what you can reply
to Cardfile and what the resulting action is.
Table 19-1

Replies for Opening a File

Action

Yes

Saves the changes

Discards the changes

Cancel

Continues working in the current file

Opening a New File
To create a new file from the Cardfile window, use the New command from
the File menu.
Cardfile opens a new file in the Cardfile window. The name "untitled" is
displayed in the title bar of the window.

Opening an Existing File
You can open an existing file from either the Cardfile window or from the
MS-DOS Executive window.
To open an existing file from the Cardfile window, use the Open command
or double-click on the file name in the list box. Usually, these files have the
file extension .CRD.

19-15

IIIII Using Cardfile
To open an existing file with the Open command:
1. Select the Open command from the File menu.
Cardfile displays the Open dialog box. Directories and drives are
enclosed in brackets. Figure 19-8 shows the Open dialog box.
File name

~u'''nt d;""o"

File naMe: [iii IiI!l
[-A-]
[-C-]

, CKIV

[" ]

BIN]

path

+ :\windows
~:

!ii::;
iii:!:

Open

( Cancel )

Drives
Parent director y

Figure 19-8

Open Dialog Box

2. From the list of file names, select the file name you want to open, or
type a path name and a file name in the text box at the top of the
dialog box.
3. Select the Open command.
Cardfile opens the specified file.
To open an existing file from the MS-DOS Executive window, double-click on
the file name you want to open or select the file name and press the Return
key. Generally, you can open files with the file extension .CRD.

19-16

Using Cardfile

IIIII

Viewing Files in Other Directories
Initially, Cardfile displays only the names of the card files as well as drives
and directories. You can view files, other than card files, in other directories
or drives.
To view files in other directories or drives:
1. Select the Open command from the File menu.
Cardfile displays the Open dialog box.
2. In the text box, type the directory, drive, or file name you want to read.
For example, you can type' .TXT to read all the files having the file
extension .TXT.
To move between directories, you can also double-click on the drive
letter symbols, the directories, or the [.. ) symbol.

3. Select the Open command.
Cardfile lists the specified files.
The Open dialog box remains on the screen until you open a specific file or
cancel the command.

19-17

11111

Using Cardfile

Saving a File
When you create a new file, or when you finish editing a file, you can save it
and open it later. To save a card file, you can use one of two commands:
.. Save As - Saves and names a new file
• Save - Saves a current file

Saving a New File
The Save As command names and saves a new file. It can also save the current file under a new file name and retain the original copy of the file on the
disk under the old file name.
To save a new file:
1. Select the Save As command from the File menu.
Cardfile displays the Save As dialog box. Figure 19-9 shows the Save As
dialog box.

Save File as:

C:\windows

ImBU::":SI:O::::HE'l:':SS-------.1 [ Save]

(Cancel )
Figure 19-9

Save As Dialog Box

2. Type a name for the file.
If you do not type a file extension, Cardfile automatically adds .CRD to

the file name.
3. Select the Save command button.
Cardfile saves the file on the disk. The file remains on the screen so
that you can continue editing it. Cardfile displays the name of the file
in the title bar of the Cardfile window.

19-18

Using Cardfile 11111
NOTE

If you type the name of a file that already exists, Cardfile asks if

Saving Changes
The Save command saves the changes to the current file on the disk.
To save changes to the current file, use the Save command from the File
menu.
Cardfile replaces the file on the disk with the current file.

Printing in Cardfile
You can print a single card or an entire file (all the cards).

Printing a Card
To print a single card:
1. Move the card you want to the front of the file.
2. Select the Print command from the File menu.
Cardfile prints the card on the default MS-Windows printer.

Printing an Entire File
To print an entire file (all the cards), select the Print All command from the
File menu.
Cardfile prints the file on the default MS-Windows printer.

Deleting a File
You can delete a card file when you no longer want it or when you want to
make room for other files on your disk. To delete a cardfile, use the Delete
command from the File menu.

19-19

11111 Using Cardfile

Merging Files
To consolidate your information, you can merge another file into the current
file.
To merge two files:
1. Select the Merge command from the File menu.
Cardfile displays the Merge dialog box. Figure 19-10 shows the Merge
dialog box.

IZ!i!.!l
.CRD +C: \windows
r

Filf nallf:
[-A-]

[-Co]
[.. ]

[BIN]

Figure 19-10

[

HU9f

]

( Caned )

Merge Dialog Box

2. Select the file you want to merge with the current file.
3. Select the Merge command.
Cardfile merges the cards from the other file with the cards in the
current file and sorts all the cards alphabetically.

Viewing a File as a List
You can view a file as a list as well as a series of cards. When the cards are
listed, Cardfile displays the index line of every card in the file. For example,
you can create a phone directory by including a name and phone number in
the index line of each card in a file, then display the file as a list.
To display the file as a list, use the List command from the View menu.

19-20

Using Cardfile

IIIII

Automatic Dialing
Automatic dialing works through a DIGITAL PC50-MA or a Hayes-compatible
modem. These may not be available in your country.
If you have a DIGITAL PC50-MA or a Hayes-compatible modem, Cardfile can

dial a number for you.
To dial a number:
1. Select the entry you want.
You can display a list of the file or move the card you want to the front
in the Card view.
2. Select the Autodial command from the Card menu.
Cardfile displays the Autodial dialog box. Figure ] 9-11 shows the
Autodial dialog box.

Dial:l~

Dial T,pe
Port
Baud Rate

@Tone
@COH1
@1298

o Pulse

(I)

[Cancel)

Figure 19-11

OCOH2
03110

Autodial Dialog Box

3. Change the dialog box options if necessary.
Table 19-2 describes the dialog box options.
4. Select the Ok command button.
Cardfile dials the number in the Dial text box.

19-21

IIIII Using Cardfile
Table 19-2

Autodial Options and Functions

Option

Function

Baud rate

Represents the speed of transmission for your telephone. The baud
rate is determined by your modem and the communications Hne or
network. For the correct setting, consult the owner's manual for your
modem.

Dial

Searches for a phone number in the specified card, beginning with
the index line, then places the first phone number found into the
Dial text box.
To locate a number other than the first number on the card, select
the number before you select the Autodial command. To change the
number in the Dial text box, retype or edit the number.

Dial Type

Selects the dial type of your phone. If you normally hear a tone for
each number you dial, you have a tone telephone. If you .hear a
clicking sound, you probably have a pulse telephone. Generally, push
button telephones have tone dialing; rotary dial telephones have
pulse dialing.

Port

Selects the port to which your modem is connected.

19·22

Chapter 20
Using Calendar

MS-Windows Calendar is a desktop application that resembles a desktop calendar or an appointment book. Calendar gives you two views of time. In the
Day view, you enter, display, or edit your appointments for each day. In the
Month view, select the day for which you want to see appointments.
You can maintain more than one Calendar file; for example, you can view or
edit more than one person's appointments. You can also set alarms to remind
you of particular appointments.
This chapter describes how to:
• Start Calendar
• Edit the day view
• Set the alarm for your calendar
• View different times or days
• Customize your calendar
• Work with Calendar files

Starting Calendar
To start Calendar when it is neither in a window nor set aside as an icon in
the icon area, you must start it from its file name.
You use the MS-DOS Executive window, which is available either as an icon
or in a window. If it is not a window, you must first expand its icon into a
window.

20-1

IIIII Using Calendar
To start Calendar:
1. Select the Run command from the File menu in the MS-DOS Executive

window.
The MS-DOS Executive window displays a dialog bux.
2. Type:
CALENDAR

3. Select the Ok command button.
When you start Calendar, the daily appointment window (the Day view) is
displayed for the current date. Calendar uses the date and time set when you
started your workstation. Figure 20-1 shows the Day view that is displayed
when you open the Calendar window.
You can reset the date and time using the Control Panel.
Click on an arrow to view the appointments
for the next or previous day.
Date line

Appointment area

Figure 20-1

20-2

Calendar Window: Day View

Using Calendar

IIIII

Editing the Day View
You enter appointments in the Day view. If you are in the Month view, use
the Day command from the View menu.

Selecting a Time
The Day view initially lists times at one-hour intervals, beginning with 8 a.m.
Before typing the description of an appointment, you must select the
appointment time.
To select a time:
1. Point to the desired time.
2. Click on the mouse button.
Calendar highlights the selected time.
To use the keyboard, press the down arrow key to move to the next hour.
Press the up arrow key to move to the previous hour.
To schedule an appointment for a time not displayed on the screen, scroll
the display before selecting the time. For details on scrolling, see "Viewing
Different Times" in this chapter.

Entering an Appointment
To enter an appointment in the Day view:
1. Select the time of the appointment.
2. Type a description of the appointment.
You are limited to 40 characters.
For example, you can type:
Lunch with Lydia

3. Press the Return key to select the time for the next appointment you
want to enter.
Text is encoded in its ANSI representation. For more information about ANSI
text representations, see Appendix G.

20-3

IIIII

Using Calendar

Selecting Text
You can change any existing entry for an appointment. However, manyediting features require that you first select the text of the entry.
To select text:
1. Point to the first character of the text to be selected.
2. Drag to the end of the text.
Calendar highlights the selected text.
To use the keyboard:
1. Press the arrow keys to move the insertion point to the beginning of the
text you want to select.
2. While holding the Shift key, press the arrow keys to move the insertion
point to the end of the text you want to select.
Calendar highlights the selected text.

Editing an Entry
You can edit an existing entry that is selected. To edit the text of an entry:
1. Select the text of an entry.
2. Type the new text.
Calendar deletes the old entry when you type the first character of the
new one.

Copying an Entry
To place the same entry more than once in a calendar, copy the text to the
Clipboard, then paste the text where you want it in the calendar. You can
copy text from either the appointment area or the scratch pad.
To copy text:
1. Select the text.
2. Select the Copy command from the Edit menu.
Calendar copies the text to the Clipboard.

20-4

Using Calendar

IIIII

3. Move the insertion point where you want the copied text.
You can move it to a time in the appointment area or to the scratch
pad.
4. Select the Paste command from the Edit menu.
Calendar displays the text at the insertion point.

Deleting an Entry
You can delete text from either the appointment area or the scratch pad. You
replace a deleted entry only by retyping it.
To delete an entry:
1. Select the text.
2. Select the Cut command from the Edit menu.
Calendar copies the text to the Clipboard, then deletes it from
Calendar.

Setting the Alarm
You can set the alarm for as many appointments in your calendar as you
want. The alarm sounds at the time you specify.

Turning On the Alarm
To set the alarm:
1. Select the time at which you want an alarm to ring.

2. Select the Set command from the Alarm menu.
Calendar sets the alarm.
The alarm clock symbol, a small bell, is displayed to the left of the selected
time. When the alarm sounds, Calendar displays a dialog box reminding you
of the appointment. If the Calendar window is inactive, the title bar at the
top of the Calendar window flashes. If Calendar is an icon when the alarm
sounds, the icon flashes .

20-5

IIIII Using Calendar
Setting the Alarm for Sound
You can control whether the alarm makes a sound. Initially, the alarm is set
for sound; it rings unless you set it to be silent.
To turn otJ the sound or to reset the sound for an alarm:
1. Select the Controls command from the Alarm menu.
2. Select the Sound option.
3. Select the Ok command button.
If the alarm is set for sound, Calendar sets it for silence. If you select

the Sound option again, Calendar resets the sound.

Setting the Alarm to Ring Early
To set the alarm to ring early:
1. Select the Controls command from the Alarm menu.
2. Select the Early Ring text box.
3. Type a number between 0 and 10. This number represents the number
of minutes before your appointment that the alarm rings.
4. Select the Ok command button.
Calendar sets the alarm.

Turning Off the Alarm
When the Calendar box is active, Calendar displays the Alarm Dialog box. If
the Calendar window is inactive, the title bar flashes. If Calendar is an icon,
the icon flashes.
You can turn off an alarm, letting the time remain set. You can turn on the
alarm again later.
To turn off the alarm:
• If the Calendar window is active, select the Ok command button in the

Alarm dialog box.
• If the window is inactive, or if Calendar is an icon, select the window

or icon.
Mter Calendar displays the Alarm dialog box, select the Ok command
button.

20-6

Using Calendar

IIIII

To use the keyboard:
• If the Calendar window is active, press the Return key.
• If the window is inactive, or if Calendar is an icon, press Alt/Tab until

Calendar is selected.
After Calendar displays the Alarm dialog box, press the Return key.

Removing an Alarm
To remove an alarm:
1. Select the time the alarm is set for.
2. Select the Cancel command from the Alarm menu.
Calendar cancels the alarm.

Viewing Different Times or Dates
You can move through Calendar to display the appointments you have
entered or to select a day other than the one currently displayed in the Day
view.

Viewing Different Times
The Day view displays only a few of the day's appointments. Therefore, to
see a particular appointment, scroll through the Day view. Table 20-1
describes how to scroll to view different times with the mouse and keyboard.
Table 20-1

Scrolling to View Different Times

To view_ ..

With the Mouse...

With the Keyboard ...

Different appointments

Click on the arrows at the
end of the scroll bar

Press the up and down arrow
keys

The list of appointments
scroll in the direction the arrow points.

When you reach the last visible appointment, press the up
or down arrow key to scroll
the window to the next appointment.

The next screen

Click below the scroll box

Press the Pg On key

The previous
screen

Click above the scroll box

Press the Pg Up key

20-7

IIIII

Using Calendar

Viewing Different Dates
To change the date or month that is displayed, use the commands from the
Show menu. These commands apply to dates when in the Day view, and to
months when in the Month view. Table 2{}-2 describes how to scroll to view
different dates.
Table 20-2

Scrolling to View Different Dates

To display...

With the Mouse ...

With the Keyboard ...

Current date or month

Select the Today command
from the Show menu

Press the Home key

Previous date or month

Select the Previous com·
mand from the Show menu

Press Ctrl/Pg Up

Next date or month

Select the Next command
from the show menu

Press Ctrl/Pg Dn

Viewing Different Dates Using the Month View
In the Month view, select the day for which you want to enter, edit, or
display appointments.
To display the Month view, use the Month command from the View menu or
click on the date line.
Table 20·3 describes how to move in the Month view and select with the
mouse a day you want to view.
Table 20-3

Moving in Month View With the Mouse

To select...

Click on ...

Another day

Desired day

Next month

Scroll arrow at the bottom of the vertical scroll bar

Previous month

Scroll arrow at the top of the vertical scroll bar

Next year

Gray area below the scroll box

Previous year

Gray area above the scroll box

20-8

Using Calendar

IIIII

Table 20-4 describes how to move in the Month view and select with the
keyboard a day you want to view.
Table 20-4 Moving in Month View With the Keyboard
To Select ...

Press ...

Next date

Right arrow key

Previous date

Left arrow key

Date directly below the current date

Down arrow key
If the current date is in the bottom row of the
calendar, pressing the down arrow key selects
the next month.

Date directly above the current date

Up arrow key
If the current date is in the top row of the
calendar, pressing the up arrow key selects
the previous month.

Next month

Pg Dn key

Previous month

Pg Up key

Once you select the day you want, you return to the Day view by doubleclicking on the selected day, pressing the Return key, or using the Day command from the View Menu.

Viewing a Specific Date
To display a specific date:
1. Select the Date command from the Show menu.
2. In the text box, type the date you want Calendar to display.
3. Select the Ok command button.
Calendar displays the date.
You can type any date between January 1, 1980 and December 31, 2099.
Type dates in the following format: mm/dd/yyyy or mm-dd-yyyy. You do not
need to type leading zeros for days or months.
NOTE

You can specify the date format that is prevalent in your country
through the Control Panel.

20-9

11111 Using Calendar

If you type a two-digit number for the year, Calendar assumes the 20th century. Table 20-5 shows acceptable entries
Table 20-5

Acceptable Entries for Dates

Date

Typed Representation

January 19, 1985

1/19/85

November 7, 1985

11-7-85

January 1, 2010

1/1/2010

Customizing Your Calendar
You can customize the Day view of your calendar with commands from the
Options menu. For example, you can change the day settings or add notes to
your appointments.

Changing Day Settings
The day settings control the display of the Day view.
To change the day settings:
1. Select the Day Settings command from the Options menu.
Calendar displays the Day Settings dialog box. Figure 20-2 shows the
Day Settings dialog box.

Da, Settings
Interval 015 039 @iB
Hour Fomat @ 12 0 24
lOkI

Starting Tille: I 8: I18aM
Figure 20-2

(Cancel )

Day Settings Dialog Box

2. Select the options you want: Interval, Hour Format, or Starting Time.
Interval controls the interval for daily appointments. You can select 15minute, 30-minute, or 60-minute intervals.

20-10

Using Calendar

IIIII

Hour Format represents the Calendar clock: a standard 12-hour clock or
a 24-hour clock.
Starting Time is the earliest listed time when the Day view is displayed.
3. Select the Ok command button.
Calendar changes the day setting to the option you specified.

Using Special Times
You can enter appointments for special times. A special time is any time that
falls between the intervals set with the Day Settings command on the Options
menu. For example, 11: 1 0 is a special time.

Adding Special Times
To add a special time:
1. Select the Special Time command from the Options menu.
Calendar displays the Special Time dialog box.
2. Type the desired time in the text box.
3. Select the Insert command.
Calendar adds the new time.

Deleting Special Times
To delete a special time:
1. Select the time you want to delete.
2. Select the Special Time command from the Options menu.
Calendar displays the Special Time dialog box with the selected time in
the text box.
3. Select the Delete command.
Calendar deletes the selected time.

20-11

11111 Using Calendar

Adding Notes
The daily appointment window has a scratch pad, located at the bottom of
the Calendar window, to which you can add notes.
To add notes:
1. Move the insertion point to the scratch pad area and click.
To use the keyboard, press the Tab key.
Calendar displays an insertion point.
2. Type your notes.
3. To return to the appointment area, move the insertion point. To use the
keyboard, press the Tab key to move the insertion point.
Calendar displays the notes in the scratch pad.

Marking Dates
You can mark dates in the Month view. For example, you can mark dates of
special occasions.
Marking a Date
To mark a date in the Month view:
1. Point to the date you want to mark and click, or press the arrow keys to
move to the date.
2. Select the Mark command from the Options menu.
Calendar puts a small box around the number.

20-12

Using Calendar

IIIII

Unmarking a Date

When a marked date is highlighted, the Mark command from the Options
menu has a check mark next to it.
To unmark a marked date:
1. Select the date you want to unmark.
2. Select the Mark command from the Options menu.
Calendar removes the box around the number.

Working With Calendar Files
With commands from the File menu in the Calendar window, you can:
• Open a file
• View files in other directories
• Save a file
• Print a file
• Remove appointment dates
You delete Calendar files with commands from the File menu in the MS-DOS
Executive window.

Opening a File
You can have many different Calendar files. For example, you can have two
files to record two different people's appointments.
Opening a New File

To create a new calendar file, use the New command from the File menu.

20-13

IIIII Using Calendar
Opening an Existing File
You can open an existing file from either the Calendar window or from the
MS-DOS Executive window.
To open an existing file with the Open command:
1. Select the Open command from the File menu.
Calendar displays the Open dialog box. Directories and drives are
enclosed in brackets. Figure 20-3 shows the Open dialog box.

File naMl!:

Open]
Cancel

Figure 20-3

Open Dialog Box

2. From the list of file names, select the file name you want to open, or
type a path name and a file name in the text box at the top of the
dialog box.
You can also double-click on the file name you want to open.
3. Select the Open command button.
Calendar opens the specified file.
To open an existing file from the MS-DOS Executive window, double-click on
the file name you want to open or select the file name and press the Return
key. Usually, these files have the file extension .CAL.
MS-Windows starts Calendar and opens the file you selected in the MS-DOS
Executive window.

20-14

Using Calendar 11111

Viewing Files in Other Directories
Initially, Calendar displays only the names of the calendar files as well as
drives and directories. You can view files, other than calendar files, in other
directories or drives.
To view files in other directories:
1. Select the Open command from the File menu.
Calendar displays the Open dialog box.
2. In the text box, type the directory, drive, or file name you want to read.
For example, you can type' .TXT to list all the files having the file
extension .TXT.
To move between directories, you can also double-click on the drive
letter symbols, the directories, or the [.. ] symbol.
3. Select the Open command.
Calendar lists the specified files. The Open dialog box remains on the
screen until you open a specific file or cancel the command.

Saving a File
When you create a new file, or when you finish editing a file, you can save it
and open it later. To save a command file, use one of two commands from
the File menu:
• Save As - Saves and names a new file
• Save - Saves a current file

20-15

IIIII Using Calendar
Saving a New File

The Save As command names and saves a new file. It can also save the cur·
rent file under a new file name and retain the original copy of the file on the
disk under the old file name.
To save a new file:
1. Select the Save As command from the File menu.
Calendar displays the Save As dialog box. Figure 20·4 shows the Save As
dialog box.

Saue file as:

C: \lIindows
IJOH=HS=ON:-::------,It
.....
Saue ]
(Cancel )
Figure 20-4

Save As Dialog Box

2. Type a file name for the file. If you do not type an file extension,
Calendar adds .CAL to the file name.
3. Select the Save command button.
Calendar saves the file on the disk. The file remains on the screen so
that you can continue editing it. Calendar displays the name of the file
in the title bar of the Calendar window.
NOTE

If you type the name of a file that already exists, Calendar asks if
you want to replace the existing file with the file you are saving.
To replace the existing file, select the Yes command button.
Otherwise, select the No command button and type a different file
name.

20·16

Using Calendar

IIIII

Saving Changes
To save changes to the current file, use the Save command from the File
menu.
Calendar replaces the file on the disk with the current file.

Printing Appointments
To print appointments:
1. Select the Print command from the File menu.
Calendar displays the Print dialog box. Figure 20-5 shows the Print dialog box.

Print Appointments
Fr 0111: IlrMI,,:r;1

(

To:

( Cancel)
Figure 20-5

)

Print Dialog Box

2. In the From text box, type the first date you want to print.
3. Press the Tab key to move the cursor to the To text box.
4. Type the last date you want to print.
To print a single date's appointments, leave the To text box blank.
5. Select the Ok command button.
Calendar prints the text for the selected dates.

20-17

11111

Using Calendar

Removing Appointment Dates
You can delete a single date or a range of dates to make room for other dates
on your disk.
To remove appointment dates:
1. Select the Remove command from the File menu.
Calendar displays the Remove dialog box. Figure 20-6 shows the
Remove dialog box.

Re",ove Appoint",ents

Fro",: Inm
To:

I ( Ok )
'--_---'I (Cancd)

Figure 20-6 Remove Dialog Box
2. In the From text box, type the first date you want to remove.
3. In the To text box, type the last date you want to remove.
To remove a single date's appointments, leave the To text box blank.
4. Select the Ok command button.
Calendar removes the text for the dates you selected.

Deleting a File
You can delete a file to make room for other files on your disk. To delete a
file, use the Delete command from the File menu.

20-18

Chapter 21
Using Calculator

The MS-Windows Calculator is a desktop application that works as a handheld calculator. It has many basic arithmetic functions and a memory.
This chapter describes how to:
• Start Calculator
• Use Calculator

Starting Calculator
To start Calculator when it is neither in a window nor set aside as an icon in
the icon area, you must start it from its file name.
You use the MS-DOS Executive window, which is available either as an icon
or in a window. If it is not a window, you must first expand its icon into a
window.
To start Calculator:
1. Select the Run command from the File menu in the MS-DOS Executive
window.
The MS-DOS Executive window displays a dialog box.
2. Type:
CALC

3. Select the Ok command button.

21-1

IIIII Using Calculator
When you start Calculator, it creates a window with a calculator in it. Figure
21-1 shows the Calculator window.

Figure 21-1

21-2

Calculator Window

Using Calculator 11111

Using Calculator
Calculator performs standard calculations. It also has access to the Clipboard.
To use Calculator, point to the keys in the Calculator window and click.
To use the keyboard, use the keys shown in Figure 21-2. You can type the
digits 0 through 9 and the plus, minus, multiplication, division, and equal
signs on the keyboard or on the numeric keypad. If you use the numeric
keypad, the Num Lock key must be enabled.

M and C

M and R

M and +

M and-

Figure 21-2

Using Calculator With the Keyboard

Using the Memory
Calculator has its own memory, which initially is set to zero. You can add to
or subtract from this value. You can also display or clear the memory. Table
21-1 shows the mouse and keyboard procedures for using memory.
Table 21-1

Using Memory With the Mouse and Keyboard

To...

With the Mouse ...

With the Keyboard ...

Clear the memory

Click on MC

Press MjC

Display the value in memory

Click on MR

Press MjR

Add the displayed value to memory

Click on M+

Press Mj+

Subtract the displayed value
from memory

Click on M-

Press Mj-

21-3

IIIII

Using Calculator

Using the Clipboard
You can use the Clipboard to copy numbers from other applications into the
Calculator display, and from the Calculator display into other applications.
Copying to the Clipboard
To copy the displayed value to the Clipboard, use the Copy command from
the Edit menu.
Calculator copies the displayed value to the Clipboard.
Copying from the Clipboard
To add data from the Clipboard to the displayed Calculator value, use the
Paste command from the Edit menu.
To use the keyboard, press the Ins key.
Calculator adds the data from the Clipboard to the displayed Calculator
value. If the Clipboard does not contain a number, Calculator does nothing.
If the Clipboard contains a formula, that is, a legitimate series of calculatory
entries such as 2X3-4, Calculator pastes the result of the formula.

21-4

Chapter 22
Using Clock

The MS-Windows Clock is a desktop application that acts as a standard clock
and shows the current time.
This chapter describes how to:
• Start Clock
• Set Clock

Starting Clock
To start Clock when it is neither in a window nor set aside as an icon in the
icon area, you must start it from its file name.
You use the MS-DOS Executive window, which is available either as an icon
or in a window. If it is not a window, you must first expand its icon into a
window.
To start Clock:
1. Select the Run command from the File menu in the MS-DOS Executive
window.
The MS-DOS Executive window displays a dialog box.
2. Type:
L

3. Select the Ok command button.

22-1

IIIII Using Clock
When you start Clock, it displays a window that contains a clock. Figure 22-1
shows the Clock window.

Clock

••

•

•
•

•
••

Figure 22-1

Clock Window

Setting the Clock
Clock displays the time from your hardware clock or the time you entered
when you started your workstation. You can reset the Clock from the Control
Panel.
Clock continues to show the correct time even if you shrink it into an icon.
When Clock is an icon, you can display the current time without using any
of the screen's workspace.

22-2

Chapter 23
Using Reversi

MS-Windows Reversi is a desktop application that is a game you play with
your workstation. To win Reversi, you try to finish the game with more
squares of your color on the board than the workstation has of its color.
This chapter describes how to:
• Start Reversi
• Follow the rules of Reversi
• Play Reversi
• Use Reversi's hints
• Start a new game of Reversi

Starting Reversi
To start Reversi when it is neither in a window nor set aside as an icon in the
icon area, you must start it from its file name.
You use the MS-DOS Executive window, which is available either as an icon
or in a window. If it is not a window, you must first expand its icon into a
window.
To start Reversi:
1. Select the Run command from the File menu in the MS-DOS Executive
window.
The MS-DOS Executive window displays a dialog box.
2. Type:
EIJE!?SI

23-1

IIIII Using Reversi
3. Select the Ok command button.
When you start Reversi, it displays a window that contains the Reversi game.
Figure 23-1 shows the Reversi window.

Revel'si

Figure 23-1

•

Reversi Window

With a black and white screen, your squares are white; the workstation's
squares are black. The following sections describe how to play Reversi using
the black and white screen.

Rules of the Game
The rules of Reversi are:
• You try to turn black squares white by trapping them between two
white squares. To trap a black square, the three squares must form a
straight line: horizontal, vertical, or diagonal.
• If you can trap a black square, you must do so.
• If you cannot move, select the Pass command from the Game menu.
• When neither you nor the workstation can move, the game is over.
The one with the most squares wins.

23-2

Using Reversi

IIIII

Playing Reversi
To play Reversi:
1. Select one of the four skill levels from the Skill menu.
Skill levels range from Beginner, the easiest, to Master, the hardest. The
higher the skill level, the longer your workstation spends calculating its
moves.
2. Point or press the arrow keys to move to a gray square.
The mouse cursor displays as a cross when you can make a move.
3. Click on the mouse button or press the spacebar to make your move.
4. Wait for the workstation to make its move.
The mouse cursor may change to an hourglass while the workstation
calculates its move.

Reversi Hints
You can ask Reversi for hints. When you use the Hint command from the
Game menu, Reversi shows you where it would move if it had your turn.
You can accept the hint or move somewhere else.

Starting a New Game
You can start a new game at any time, even in the middle of the current
game.
To start a new game, use the New command from the Game menu.

23-3

Chapter 24
Introducing MS-Paint

This chapter describes:
• MS-Paint
• Preliminary information
• Paint definitions

Defining MS-Paint
MS-Paint is a drawing tool designed for use with MS-Windows. With MS-Paint,
you can create, enhance, save, and print artwork.
MS-Paint helps you create art that best suits your needs. Whether you create
flow charts or freehand illustrations, you can find all the tools you need on
MS-Paint's tools and shapes palette. Special commands such as Zoom In,
Copy, and Invert let you enhance your work. You can transfer text and graphics from other programs to MS-Paint for alteration and enhancement, or create MS-Paint graphics to use in other applications such as Cardfile.
You don't need to memorize complex commands or instructions. With MSPaint, you can create art quickly. Although MS-Paint is designed for use with
a mouse, you can use it with the keyboard. For more information on using
the keyboard, see Appendix F.

Preliminaries
Before using MS-Paint, you should become familiar with your workstation, its
operating system, and MS-Windows.

24-1

IIIII Introducing MS-Paint
Definitions
The following definitions are helpful for learning MS-Paint:
• The canvas is the area available for a drawing. It matches the maximum
printable surface area of your printer or display device. Figure 24-1
shows an MS-Paint canvas for a printer in portrait mode.

Paint - HORSU1SP'

_______

•

______ _

Icanvas
Figure 24-1

MS-Paint Canvas

Figure 24-2 shows an MS-Paint canvas that is displayed on your screen.
This canvas is called the MS-Paint window.

24-2

Introducing MS-Paint

Current status box
Tool
i Paint pattern
I Tools and shapes palette

Punt - HORSE.MS
I

IIIII

Title. bar
I Menu bar
i

l--~

Brush shape
Drawing window

Figure 24-2

MS-Paint Window

• The drawing window frames the portion of a canvas that is displayed on
the screen.
• The title bar contains the title of your canvas.
• The menu bar contains the names of MS-Paint's command menus.
• The tools and shapes palette contains the implements for drawing and
refining your artwork.
• The current status box shows the tool, paint pattern, brush shape, and
line width that MS-Paint uses when you draw.
• The mouse cursor selects menus, commands, tools, and shapes. The
mouse cursor changes shape in the drawing area whenever you select a
tool or a shape.

24-3

Chapter 25
MS-Paint Tools
and Shapes Summary

This chapter describes:
• The functions of MS-Paint's tools
• The functions of MS-Paint's shapes
This chapter shows the icons for the tools and shapes that are located in the
tools and shapes palette. You use these icons to follow the procedures in
Chapter 26 and Chapter 27.

25-1

IIIII MS-Paint Tools and Shapes Summary
Tools
~ Selection

1+1

Defines a rectangular area
for editing. .... ..

Slides the canvas under the
drawing window.

Rectangle

I" 1

Scroll

1"-."/..
L-J Line

I_f Brush
!

Selection
Net

Defines a nonrectangular
area for editing. /~

./r'l,~ . .

Paints in the current pattern.

Pencil

Draws a thin line .

,L.J
.
"-----------/

ITI

[i]

Text

Enters text in the selected
font, size, and style.

TOY
~ COMPANY
ANTIQUE

Eraser
Erases the features of a drawing along the pointer path.

I~I Fill
Fills an enclosed area with
the current pattern.

1fi:'1 Airbrush

1001

Curve

Creates a curved line.

25-2

3-D

Displays axes to follow when
creating 3-D drawings.

Sprays paint in the current
pattern.

MS-Paint Tools and Shapes Summary

IIIII

Shapes

IDI

10 1Oval

Box

Draws an oval.

Draws a box with square
corners.

-:-(~n

Gl:!-0
1

rcr

Rounded

Draws a box with rounded
corners.
~/1I1I1I1I1I1I1I1/1/l11I1"1J1I1I/~

- -"".

Circle

Draws a circle.

Draws shapes that are closed
with a straight line upon
release of the mouse button.

~11""I""I""""t"/j

101

Freehand

~ Polygon

Box

-:-

16.1 Polygon
Draws a polygon.

25-3

Chapter 26
Getting Started
With MS-Paint

This chapter contains the information you need to:
• Start MS-Paint
• Draw with MS-Paint
• Save a canvas
• Use MS-Paint's palettes
• Print a canvas
• Finish MS-Paint

Starting MS-Paint
To start MS-Paint when it is neither in a window nor set aside as an icon in
the icon area, you must start it from its file name.
You use the MS-DOS Executive window, which is available either as an icon
or in a window. If it is not a window, you must first expand its icon into a
window.
To start MS-Paint:
1. Select the Run command from the File menu in the MS-DOS Executive
window.
The MS-DOS Executive window displays a dialog box.
2. Type:
p~\ I NT

26-1

IIIII Getting Started With MS-Paint
3. Select the Ok command button.
MS-Paint creates an untitled canvas and opens the drawing window
over it.
Before you begin drawing, if you intend to print your canvas, select the For
Printer command from the Options menu. If this command is not selected,
you will not be able to print any of your screens. The canvas is intended for
the printer that is the default when you create the canvas.
You can print on other printers, but the output may look different.
Select the For Screen command from the Options menu if you have no
printer, no printer is selected, you only want to display the drawing, or you
want to transfer the canvas to other MS-Windows applications.
Once you select a For Printer or For Screen command, you cannot change the
setting unless you use the New command from the File menu.

Drawing
You draw by selecting the drawing tools from the tools and shapes palette.
The default tool, the Pencil, draws thin lines for sketches. The Brush paints
an area with the current pattern. You erase segments of your drawing with
the Eraser.

26-2

Getting Started With MS-Paint

IIIII

Drawing With the Pencil
To use the Pencil:
1. Select the Pencil from the tools and shapes palette if it is not the current tool.
The Pencil is displayed in the current tool status box.
2. Drag the Pencil within the drawing window to sketch.
Figure 26-1 shows an example of the Pencil drawing Old Man Winter.
Pencil cursor

Figure 26-1

Drawing With the Pencil

26-3

IIIII Getting Started With MS-Paint
Drawing With the Brush
To draw with the Brush:
1. Select the Brush from the tools and shapes palette.
The Brush is displayed in the current tool status box.
2. Drag the mouse cursor within the drawing window to draw.
Figure 26-2 shows an example of the Brush giving Old Man Winter dark hair.
Brush cursor

Figure 26-2

26-4

Drawing With the Brush

Getting Started With MS-Paint

IIIII

Using the Eraser
You erase mistakes and parts of the drawing that you no longer want with the
Eraser.
To use the Eraser:
1. Select the Eraser from the tools and shapes palette.
The Eraser is displayed in the current status box.
2. Drag the mouse cursor within the drawing window to erase.
Figure 26-3 shows the Eraser erasing some of Old Man Winter's hair.
Eraser cursor

Figure 26-3

Using the Eraser

26-5

IIIII Getting Started With MS-Paint
Saving a Canvas
The Save As command saves the contents of your canvas.
To save your canvas:
1. Select the Save As command from the File menu.
A dialog box prompts you to name your canvas. The text box is empty
when your canvas is untitled.
Figure 26-4 shows the Save As dialog box.

Save File As:
I

C:\windows

I ( $iIVi! )
(Cancel )
Text box

Insertion p oint

Figure 26-4 Save As Dialog Box
2. Type a name for your canvas. MS-Paint adds the file extension .MSP if
you don't provide one.
3. Select the Save command button.
MS-Paint writes the contents of your canvas to your disk.
Once you have created MS-Paint files that have the file extension .MSP, you
can start MS-Paint by double-clicking on the file name in the MS-DOS Executive window. This loads both MS-Paint and the file.

26-6

Getting Started With MS-Paint

IIIII

Using MS-Paint's Palettes
To specify patterns, line widths, and brush shapes in MS-Paint, select options
from the Palette menu.
For example, to change the current MS-Paint pattern:
1. Select the Patterns command from the Palette menu.
The pattern palette is displayed in the drawing window and highlights
the current pattern.
Figure 26-5 shows the patterns palette.
PaInt - (untitled)

•

•••• ~mmDrm~
D r:::::::l~r71717IrTTlrmlWiJ~m
I.:.:w:JliiiiiiiiaiJrlULiJWI.U.I~ll..lJI~

• • mm[!]D~~

D[]]§§Drltl~

Patterns palette

Figure 26-5

Current pattern

Patterns Palette

2. Select the pattern you want.
The pattern palette vanishes, and the new pattern is displayed in the
current pattern status box.
Once a palette is displayed on the screen, you must make a selection before
you can return to your canvas. If you decide not to change the selection,
select the item currently highlighted.

26-7

IIIII Getting Started With MS-Paint
Printing a Canvas
To print an MS-Paint canvas:
• Your primer must be connected and turned on.
• The For Printer command from the Options menu must be selected
when you start MS-Paint, indicating that the printer is connected.
To print your canvas, select the Print command from the File menu. MS-Paint
prints the canvas on the printer.

Finishing MS-Paint
The System menu's Close command finishes an MS-Paint session and closes
the drawing window.
To finish an MS-Paint session:
1. Select the Close command from the System menu.
If your canvas has changed, MS-Paint displays a dialog box.
2. Specify whether you want to save the changes before quitting.
When MS-Paint quits, you are returned to the applications directory in MSWindows.

26-8

Chapter 27
Creating a Drawing

This.chapter describes how to:
• Add shapes, text, and patterns to your canvas
• Use MS-Paint's selection tools
• Use several of MS-Paint's editing commands

Drawing a Box
To draw a box:
1. Select the Box tool from the tools and shapes palette.
The Box is displayed in the current status box.
2. Point to the drawing window.
The mouse cursor is displayed as a cross.
3. Hold down the mouse button to mark a corner, then drag the cross
diagonally to create the box.

27-1

11111

Creating a Drawing

Figure 27-1 shows a box with the Box mouse cursor.

-I-

IBox cursor
Figure 27-1

Box

Drawing Other Shapes
Table 27-1 describes how to use the tools that draw other shapes.
Table 27-1

Tools for Drawing Shapes and How to Use Them

Tool

Procedure

Line

Drag to draw straight line segments.

3-D

Drag along the axes that create shapes with a three-dimensional appearance.

Curve

Draw a line segment, then click to the side of it. MS-Paint turns the
segment into a curve.

Airbrush

Drag to spray paint in the current pattern.

Rounded Box,
Circle, Oval

Drag to draw the shape.

Freehand
Polygon

Drag to draw. MS-Paint closes the image with a straight line when
you release the mouse button.

Polygon

Click to mark the corners of the image. MS-Paint draws the lines.
Double-click on the final corner.

27-2

Creating a Drawing

IIIII

Adding Text
The Text tool adds text to a drawing. The text's display is determined by the
selected commands from the Font and FontSize menus.
To add text:
1. Select the Text tool from the tools and shapes palette.
The Text tool is displayed in the current tool status box.
2. Point to the drawing window.
3. Click to mark where you want your text to begin.
4. Type the desired text.
Figure 27-2 shows the heading LEGEND, which labels a legend box.

LEGEND

Figure 27-2

Box with Text

27-3

IIIII Creating a Drawing
Adding Patterns
The Fill and Filled Box tools add symbolic patterns to a drawing.

Drawing a Filled Box
To create a filled box:
1. Select the Patterns command from the Palette menu.
2. Select a pattern for the filled box.
The pattern is displayed in the current status box.
3. Select the Filled Box tool from the tools and shapes palette.
The Filled Box is displayed in the current status box.
4. Draw a box.
The pattern fills the box when you release the mouse button.
Figure 27-3 shows a filled box that is drawn and labeled to represent rain.

LEGEND

Wjrain
Figure 27-3

27-4

Filled Box

Creating a Drawing

IIIII

Filling a Shape
To fill a shape:
1. Select the Patterns command from the Palette menu.
2. Select a pattern to fill the shape.
The pattern is displayed in the current status box.
3. Select a tool from the tools and shapes palette to draw the shape. For
example, you can select the Box or the Polygon tools.
The tool is displayed in the current status box.
4. Draw a shape.
5. Select the fill tool from the tools and shapes palette, place the tip of
the pouring paint in the empty shape, and click on the mouse.
The pattern fills the shape when you release the mouse button.
Figure 27-4 shows a box that is labeled and filled to represent hail.
Fill cursor

LEGEND

hail
Figure 27-4

Filling a Shape

27-5

11111

Creating a Drawing

Editing a Selection
You can edit a selection of a drawing. The following sections describe how
to select part of a drawing, and how to edit with special effects and in detail.

Making a Selection
To edit a drawing, you must define areas of your canvas with the Selection
Rectangle and the Selection Net tools.
To select an area of a drawing:
1. Select the Selection Rectangle tool or the Selection Net tool from the
tools and shapes palette.
2. Drag the cursor to enclose a selection of your drawing.
The selected area is enclosed within a box if you are using the Selection
Rectangle tool. The selected area is enclosed within a net if you are
using the Selection Net tool.
Figure 27-5 shows a selected butterfly wing .

.________ .l

~~I_ection rectangle

I
....... -

'
........ -

Figure 27-5

27-6

...... I

~I:!
LI.

Selection Rectangle

Creating a Drawing

11111

Copying a Selection
Once you select an area of the canvas, you can copy it to the Clipboard,
leaving the original still displayed. After you paste the area back to the canvas, you can move it to where you want.
To copy a selection:
1. Select the Copy command from the Edit menu.
The selected area is copied to the Clipboard.
2. Select the Paste command from the Edit menu.
The Clipboard contents are copied to the canvas inside a Selection
Rectangle.
The mouse cursor changes to an arrow, indicating that you can drag the
selection.

3. Drag the Selection Rectangle inside the drawing window, then release
the mouse button.

Editing With Special Effects
The special effects commands from the Edit menu enhance a selected area of
your drawing.
For example, the Flip Horizontal command mirrors the selected area. For
descriptions of other special effects commands, see Chapter 26.
To mirror and paste a selection:
1. Select an area or object.
2. Select the Flip Horizontal command from the Edit menu.
The selected area, still enclosed in the Selection Rectangle, flips from
left to right.
3. Drag the selected area into position.
4. Move the cursor out of the Selection Rectangle, then click the mouse
button.
The Selection Rectangle disappears, and the copy is pasted to your
canvas.

27-7

IIIII Creating a Drawing
Figure 27-6 shows a butterfly wing that is selected and mirrored.
Click the mouse button outside the Selection Rectangle to paste the copied
wing in place.
Selected wing after Flip Horizontal

S""t~~ ~;-"-g-h
:

____~~~~:~~_

:I
:1
:I
:I

I
1
I
1

- .....-;1

Figure 27-6

'_ - - - - - - - - - - - - _: 1

I .......................... _I

Results of the Flip Horizontal Command

Editing in Detail
To perform detailed editing on a part of your drawing, use the Zoom In
command and the Pencil.
To edit a drawing in detail:
1. Select the Pencil, then click to mark where you want to edit.
The Pencil makes a mark at the point where you click.
The mark is white if you click on a black area; it is black if you click
on a white area.
2. Select the Zoom In command from the Options menu.
MS-Paint zooms in to where you last released the mouse button. This
view of the screen is called a zoomed-in drawing window.

27-8

Creating a Drawing

IIIII

3. Click to remove or add paint. Drag to make larger changes.
The results of your editing appear in the upper-left corner of your
canvas.
Figure 27-7 shows an example of editing in detail.
Zoomed-in drawing window

Palnt - CPBUTTER.t-1SP

Figure 27-7

•

Editing in Detail

4. When you are finished editing, select the Zoom Out command from the
Options menu.
The regular drawing window is displayed again.

27-9

IIIII

Creating a Drawing

Scrolling the Canvas
The Scroll tool can:
• Move the canvas under the drawing window
• Copy a selected area of a drawing to another part of the canvas
To scroll to a lower area of a canvas:
1. Select the Scroll tool from the tools and shapes palette and move the

tool to the bottom of the drawing window.
2. Drag the Scroll pointer upward.
The original area of the canvas scrolls up as the lower part of the canvas
is displayed.
The mouse cursor is displayed whenever MS-Paint adjusts the window
display.
Figure 27-8 shows a butterfly that is scrolled to reveal the lower part of the
canvas.

I Scroll cursor

Figure 27-8

27-10

Scrolling the Canvas

Chapter 28
MS-Paint
Command Summary

The MS-Paint commands that help you create, illustrate, and edit your canvasses are displayed in menus. You access menus through the menu bar near
the top of the MS-Paint window.
This chapter describes the command menus in the order they are displayed
in the menu bar:
• File
• Edit
• Font
• FontSize
• Style
• Palette
• Options

File Menu
The File menu commands create, save, and print your canvasses. Figure 28-1
shows the File menu commands. Table 28-1 describes the commands.

28-1

IIIII

MS-Paint Command Summary

tiew

Open.
Save

Saue As.
Pt·int
Figure 28-1
Table 28-1

File Menu

File Menu Commands and Descriptions

Command

Description

New

Clears the drawing window, then opens a new canvas. The status of
the selected tool, pattern, brush shape, and line width is
unchanged.

Open

Opens the drawing window over a previously created canvas. The
status of the selected tool, pattern, brush shape, and line width is
unchanged.
A dialog box prompts you to either select a title from the list box
or type the title of the canvas you want.

Save

Saves the current canvas on disk under the existing name. This
command prompts you for a name if the file is untitled.

Save As

Saves the current canvas on disk. You can save either new, untitled
canvasses or a new version of a canvas under a different name. The
original version remains unchanged.

Prints the canvas. The Print command is disabled if you have not
installed a printer through the Set-Up program or on the Control
Panel, or if you selected the For Screen command from the Options
menu.

Both the Open and New commands let you save any changes to the current
canvas before proceeding.

28-2

MS-Paint Command Summary

IIIII

Edit Menu
The Edit menu commands let you edit a canvas. Figure 28-2 shows the Edit
menu commands. Table 28-2 describes the commands .

Undo

."'1 1

!~.~;:

,~:r"':

ErCS2
Cut
Copy
PCSt2
Cl2cr

:}~

F:;?
•

b ....

l Y·I~

..~: .~A

I ilV2rt
TrCC2 Ed92S
F lip Horizontcl
Flip V2rt; co l
Figure 28-2

Edit Menu

Except for the Erase, Undo, and Paste commands, all of the Edit menu commands require that you first select what you want to edit. The Selection
Rectangle or the Selection Net tools select an area. The Paste command is
disabled if the Clipboard is empty.

28-3

IIIII

MS-Paint Command Summary

Several commands in the Edit menu are disabled until you select an area for
editing.
Table 28·2

Edit Menu Commands and Descriptions

Command

Description

Undo

Cancels the most recent drawing action or series of editing actions
performed on a selected area. Selecting Undo a second time restores
these actions.

Erase

Erases the contents of the drawing window.
You can also double-click on the Eraser to erase the drawing
window.

Cut

Removes selected material from the canvas, and places it on the
Clipboard.

Copy

Copies selected material to the Clipboard.

Paste

Copies the Clipboard contents into a selection box on the drawing
window. The items you paste remain selected (and movable) until
you click outside the selected area, make another selection with the
Selection Rectangle or the Selection Net, or begin to draw again.
You can paste the contents of the Clipboard as many times as YOll
want.

Clear

Erases the selected item from the drawing window.

Invert

Ch'lnges the appearance of the selected area. This command
changes a black area to white, and a white area to black.

Trace Edges

Traces the edges of the patterns, text, and shapes within a selected
area. This command acts on selections made with the Selection Rectangle tool.

Flip
Horizontal

Flips the selected area from left to right. This command acts on
selections made with the Selection Rectangle tool.

Flip Vertical

Flips the selected area from top to bottom. This command acts on
selections made with the Selection Rectangle tool.

28-4

MS-Paint Command Summary

11111

Font Menu
The Font menu contains the commands that select the text typeface. The Font
menu commands vary according to the fonts installed for your system.
You can change the typeface of a text sequence until you click again within
the drawing window or select another tool.

FontSize Menu
The FontSize menu sets the size of your text. The FontSize menu commands
vary according to the font sizes installed for your system.
You can change the font size of a text sequence until you click again within
the drawing window or select another tool.

Style Menu
The Style menu commands modify the appearance of text. Figure 28-3 shows
the Style menu commands. Figure 28-4 shows the Style menu typefaces.
Table 28-3 describes the other Style menu commands.
Plain is the default typeface.
You can change the style of a text sequence until you click again within the
drawing window or select another tool.

28-5

IIIII

MS-Paint Command Summary

I" Plain
Bold

FS
F6
F7
F8

Italic
Underline
Outline
Strikeout

"Align left
Align center
Align right
" Opaque
Tt'anspat'ent
Figure 28-3

Plain

Style Menu

Unaerline

Bold
Italic
Figure 28-4

28-6

StriKee~t
Style Menu Typefaces

MS-Paint Command Summary

Table 28-3

IIIII

Style Menu Commands and Descriptions

Command

Description

Align Left

Aligns rows of text using an invisible column in the drawing
window as a left margin. Your text moves to the right as you type.
This is a default setting.
Click on the text pointer to mark the location of the invisible
column.

Align Center

Centers text evenly on both sides of the invisible column.

Align Right

Aligns text using the column as a right margin. Your text moves to
the left as you type.

Opaque

Provides a solid white background for text. This is a default setting.

Transparent

Lets the current background pattern show through text.

Figure 28-5 shows examples of the Align Left, Align Center, and Align Right
commands.

I Invisible column
I

~lignea left
.

I
I

al1gne~ center
I

alignea right
I

1
I Text cursor

Figure 28-5

Example Align Commands

28-7

11111 MS-Paint Command Summary

Palette Menu
The Palette menu commands select:
• Paint patterns
• Line widths for shapes
• Brush shapes
Figure 28-6 shows the Palette menu commands.

Pcttl2rns . .. .
Linl2 Widths .. .
Brush Shcp~s .. .

Too ls . ..
Figure 28-6

Palette Menu

The Tools command selects MS-Paint's tools when they are concealed by
another drawing window.

28-8

MS-Paint Command Summary

IIIII

Options Menu
The Options menu commands:
• Control the alignment and placement of your drawings,
• Edit with greater detail
• Enhance the display of patterns in the patterns palette for the current
session
Figure 28-7 shows the Options menu commands. Table 28-4 describes the
commands.

.~?

ZOOM In
ZOOM Out

" ,.,

: '.)

vNo Grid
FinQ Grid
MCldiuM Grid
CocrsCl Grid
Edit PClttClrn . ..
",
:" :;;r'

p}'"1 n';~ ~(.
r· ~;t S:::t·~~n

Figure 28-7

Options Menu

28-9

IIIII

MS-Paint Command Summary

Table 28-4

Options Menu Commands and Descriptions

Command

Description

Zoom In

Zooms in on your canvas at the point where you last released the
mouse button. Zoom In also returns a zoomed-out drawing window
to its normal size.
MS-Paint's zoomed-in drawing window has a view finder in the
upper-left corner. You view the effects of magnified editing on your
canvas in this area.
You can also double-click on the Pencil to zoom in or return from a
zoomed-in drawing window to the normal drawing window.

Zoom Out

Displays the entire canvas with the current drawing window
outlined. Zoom Out also returns a zoomed-in drawing window to its
normal size.
You can also double-click on the Scroll tool to zoom out to the full
canvas or return from the full canvas to the normal drawing
window.

No Grid

Turns off any active grid. This is the default setting.

Fine Grid,
Medium Grid,
Coarse Grid

Lay an invisible grid on the drawing window. These commands let
you align shapes and lines.

Edit Pattern

Opens a dialog box to allow revision of the current MS-Paint
pattern.

For Printer

Informs MS-Paint that the canvas is targeted for the default
MS-Windows printer.

For Screen

Informs MS-Paint that the canvas is targeted for the screen.

28-10

Index

A
About command
1-7, 3-4, C-3, 18-10,
19-14
Access control information 34-3
changing defaults 34-4
displaying access defaults 34-27
setting defaults 34-26
Accessing
Network Terminal Services
VT240 emulator 16-13
remote files
34-1
Account information 34-3
Active window 2-6
Add command 19-5
Add dialog box 19-5
Add New Font command 8-6, 8-11
Add New Printer command 8-6, 8-7
Adding
cards in Cardfile
19-5
fonts 8-11
information from other applications
in Cardfile
19-13
notes in Calendar 20-12
patterns 27-4
printers 8-6, 8-7, 8-9
text 27-3
Airbrush 27-2
Alarm menu 20-6
Alarm 20-5
early ring 20-6
in Calendar 20-5
removing 20-7
setting the sound 20-6
turning off 20-6
Align Center command 28-7

Align command 28-7
Align Right command 28-7
All command 3-8
Alt key 6-2, 6-3
Alt/Prt Sc keys 7-7,7-9
Alt/Return keys 6-17
Alt/spacebar keys 6-2, 6-4
Alt/Tab keys 6-2, 6-7, 6-9, 7-6
Alt/Tab/Shift keys 6-2
ANSI command 32-6
APPEND command 32-7,34-11
Appending files 32-28, 34-11
Applications
closing 1-14
keyboard procedure 6-9
finishing
keyboard procedure 6-8
flashing title bar 6-18
loading
keyboard procedure 6-6
menus
1-8
messages 2-18,6-18
more memory C-15
multiple 2-2
PIF C-2
running standard 7-3
running
1-3
keyboard procedure 6-6, 6-8
three
2-5
two 2-4
shrinking standard 7-3
shrinking 1-14
special 7 -10
standard 7-1
closing windows 7-3

Index-l

IIIII Index
closing 7-4
finishing MS-Windows 7-5
multiple 7-5
outside windows 7-5, 7-6
running large 7 -10
transferring· information 7-7
keyboard procedure 7 -7
Arrow keys 6-2,6-4,6-6,6-8,6-10,
6-14
Arrow/Shift keys 6-3
ASCII 2-17, 7-9, B-3
files 34-6, 34-7
ASSEMBLE command 39-3
ASSIGN command 32-9
Asterisk
as a wildcard 30-9
ATIRIB command 32-11
Autodial command
19-21
Autodial dialog box 19-21
AUTOEXEC.BAT file 37-5
Automatic dialing
in Cardfile
19-21
Autotyping characters
VT220 emulator
enabling HOSTSYNC
13-4
to the host 13-4, 14-1
VT240 emulator
enabling HOSTSYNC
17-5
to the host 17-5

B
Backspace key A-6
BACKUP command 32-13
Batch files
creating 37 -2
replacement parameters 37-3
used with NFT 34-2
Batch processing 37-1
Binary file
34-6, 34-7
Box 27-1
BREAK command 1-3, 32-17
Brush 26-4
BUFFERS command 1-4
By Date command 3-8
By Kind command 3-8
By Name command 3-8
By Size command 3-8

Index-2

C
Calculator commands
Copy 21-4
Paste 21-4
Calculator
introducing 21-1
memory 21-3
starting 2 1-1
using 21-3
window 21-3
Calendar commands
Cancel 20-7
Controls 20-6
Copy 20-4
Cut 20-5
Date 20-9
Day Settings 20-10
Day 20-3
Delete 20-18
Mark 20-12
Month 20-8
New 20-13
Open 20-14,20-15
Paste 20-5
Print 20-17
Remove 20-18
Save As 20-16
Save 20-17
Special Time 20-11
Unmark 20-13
Calendar files 20-13
deleting 20-18
opening 20-13,20-14
saving changes 20-17
saving 20-15,20-16
viewing 20-15
Calendar
adding notes 20-12
alarm 20-5
early ring 20-6
removing 20-7
setting the sound 20-6
turning off 20-6
changing day settings 20-10
copying text 20-4
customizing 20-10

Index

deleting files 20-18
deleting text 20-5
editing in Day View 20-3
editing text 20-4
entering an appointment 20-3
introducing 20-1
marking dates 20-12
opening files 20-13,20-14
printing files
20-17
removing days 20-18
saving changes 20-17
saving files 20-15,20-16
selecting text 20-4
selecting times 20-3
special times 20-11
starting 20-1
unmarking dates 20-13
viewing appointments 20-7
viewing dates 20-8, 20-9
viewing different times 20-7
viewing files 20-15
window 20-3, 20-14
Cancel command 20-7
Canceling
commands
keyboard procedure 6-5
edits
in Cardfile
19-10
in Notepad
18-7
files
keyboard procedure 6-14
Canvas
definition 24-2
saving 26-6
scrolling 27 -10
zoomed-in E-l
Card files
19-14
deleting 19-19
file size
19-14
merging 19-20
opening 19-15
printing 19-19
saving changes 19-19
saving 19-18
viewing 19-17, 19-20
Card menu
19-5
Cardfile commands

IIIII

About
19-14
Add
19-5
Autodial
19-21
Copy 19-11, 19-12, 19-13
Cut 19-10, 19-11, 19-13
Delete
19-14
Du plicate
19-14
Find Next 19-12
Find
19-12
Go To
19-7
Index 19-7
List
19-20
Merge
19-20
New
19-15
Open
19-16, 19-17
Paste
19-10,19-11, 19-12, 19-13
Picture
19-13
Print 19-19
Restore
19-13
Save As 19-18
Save
19-19
Text
19-13
Undo
19-10
Cardfile
adding cards
19-5
adding information from other
applications
19-13
automatic dialing 19-21
canceling edits
19-10
changing index line
19-7
copying cards
1 9 -14
copying text 19-11
creating 19-3
deleting cards
19-14
deleting files
19-19
deleting text 19-10
editing text
19-8
finding text
19-12
formatting text
19-4
index line
19-3
insertion point 19-8
introducing
19-1
merging files
19-20
moving cards
19-7
moving text 19-10, 19-11
moving through files
19-5
opening files
19-15

Index-3

11111

Index

printing cards
19-19
printing files
19-19
restoring cards 19-13
saving changes
19-19
saving files
19-18
scroUing 19-6
selecting text
19-9
starting
19-1
typing text 19-4
viewing files
19-17, 19-20
window 19-3, 19-15
Change Directory command 3-9, 5-2
Changing
Cardfile index line
19-7
Country settings 8-25
cursor blink rate 8-5
date 8-4
day settings in Calendar 20-10
default printer 8-15
directories 5-1,5-3,32-18
double-click rate 8-5
drives 33-9
Keyboard settings 8-22
Mouse settings 8-24
PIFs C-15
Screen colors 8-20
time 8-3
VT220 settings
12-4
16-5
VT240 settings
WIN.INI 8-3
window size 2-9
Characters in file names 30-8
CHOIR command 32-18
Check disk 3-15
Checking disk for errors 32-19
CHKDSK command 32-19, C-9
CHKDSK.EXE 3-15
Clear command
18-7,28-5
Click on
action defined 1~3
Click
action defined
1-3
Clipboard 7-7,7-8, 18-5, 19-8,20-4,
21-4,27-7
defined 2-16
VT220 emulator 10-4
Clock

Index-4

introducing 22-1
setting 22-2
starting 22-1
window 22-2
Close command
1-7, 1-14,3-1 S,
4-13,7-3
application closing 1-14
keyboard procedure 6-9
Close Window on exit option C-12
Closing 1-14
applications
keyboard procedure 6-9
dialog box
keyboard procedure 6-11
windows
standard aplications 7-3
CLS command 32-21
Coarse Grid command 28-10
Comm type
starting the VT240 emulator
COMI
14-3
COM2
14-3
NTS
14-3
COMMAND command 32-22
Command files
submitting 34-28
Command line format 30-1
COMMAND. COM 3-14
Commands
common information 30-2
MS-DOS operating system
SETHOST 9-1
MS-Paint summary 28-1
operating system 32-1
special effects 27-7
Communications Port command 8-14
COMPARE command 39-6
Compose key A-3
Compose
industry standard 36-4
Composing characters A-I
Compose key A-3, A-6
compose sequence A-I
Ctrl/Alt procedure A-I, A-2
Ctrl/Alt/left-Shift procedure A-I,
A-2
diacritical marks A-4

Index
finishing A-6
restarting A-6
three-key compose sequence A-I,
A-3
two-key compose sequence A-I,
A-3, A-4
valid compose sequences A-6
Concatenating files
4-6
CONFIG.SYS commands
BREAK 1-3
BUFFERS 1-4
COUNTRY 1-5
DEVICE 1-6
FCBS 1-7
FILES 1-8
LASTDRIVE 1-9
SHELL 1-10
CONFIG.SYS
changing 1-2
commands 1-2
sample 1-11
what it is 1-1
Configuration Aide B-1
Configuration files
Actions Set-Up screen
VT220 emulator
13-1, 13-2
VT240 emulator 17-2
DEFAULT.220
VT220 emulator 13-1
DEFAULT.240
VT240 emulator
17-1
file names
VT220 emulator 13-2
VT240 emulator 17-2
Recall Set-Up Parameters
VT220 emulator
13-1, 13-2
VT240 emulator
17-1, 17-2
starting the emulator
14-3
VT220 emulator
13-1
VT240 emulator
17-1
Connecting
a network 33-4
a remote printer 33-7
a resource 33-6, 33-7
Connections command 8-7, 8-14
Control menu 4-10, 4-11
Control Panel menus

IIIII

Preferences 8-20
Setup 8-14,8-15
Control Panel
8-1, B-3
adding fonts
8-6
adding printers 8-6
changing country settings 8-20,
8-25
changing cursor blink rate
8-5
changing date 8-4
changing default printer 8-14,
8-15
changing double-click rate
8-5
8-20,
changing keyboard settings
8-22
changing mouse settings 8-20,
8-24
changing printer connections 8-14
changing printer port connections
8-14
changing screen colors 8-20
changing time 8-3
defined 8-1
deleting fonts 8-6
deleting printers 8-6
dialog box 8-3
in Cardfile
20-2
in Clock 22-2
running 8-1
window 8-3
CONTROL.EXE 8-2
Controls command 20-6
Copy command 2-17, 3-6,4-4, 4-5,
4-6,5-4,7-7,7-8, 18-5, 18-8, 19-11,
19-12, 19-13, 20-4, 21-4, 27-7, 28-4
COpy command 32-24, 34-14
Copying 2-16
in Cardfile
19-14
files from remote node
34-7
files to hard disk 31-10
files to remote node
34-8, 34-19
files
4-4, 4-5, 4-6
selection E-l
system files to hard disk 31-9
text
in Calendar 20-4
in Cardfile
19-11
in Notepad
18-8

Index-5

11111 Index

to the Clipboard 7-8
VT220 emulator 10-4
Country codes G-l
COUNTRY command 1-5
Country keyboards G-7
Country settings command 8-20, 8-25
Create command 28-1
Create Directory command 3-9, 5-4
Creating
batch file 37-2
card files
19-3
characters A-I
Compose key A-3
compose sequence A-I
Ctrl/Alt procedure A-I, A-2
Ctrl/Alt/left-Shift procedure
A-I, A-2
three-key compose sequence
A-I, A-3
two-key compose sequence A-I,
A-3, A-4
multiple copies E-1
PIFs C-4
Ctrl key E-1
Ctrl/Alt procedure A-I, A-2
Ctrl/Alt/left-Shift procedure A-I
Ctrl/Alt/Shift procedure A-2
Ctrl/Arrow keys 6-2
Ctrl/Break keys 6-2, 6-11
CTTY command 32-31
Current directory 3-3, 5-1, 30.4
Current status box 24-3
Cursor blink rate 8-5
Cursor 3-3
Curves F-2
Customizing
in Calendar 20-10
Cut command 2-17, 18-5, 18-8,
19-10, 19-11, 19-13,20-5,28-4

D
Data diskette 5-8
Data
ASCII 34-6, 34-7
binary 34-6, 34-7
Date command 20-9
DATE command 32-32
Day command 20-3
Day Settings command 20-10

Index-6

Day Settings dialog box 20-10
Day settings
changing 20-10
Day view 20-2, 20-9
DEBUG 39-1
DEBUG commands
ASSEMBLE 39-3
COMPARE 39-6
DUMP 39-8
ENTER 39-10
FILL 39-13
GO 39-15
HEX 39-17
INPUT 39-18
LOAD 39-19
MOVE 39-21
NAME 39-23
OUTPUT 39-26
PTRACE 39-27
QUIT 39-29
REGISTER 39-30
SEARCH 39-33
TRACE 39-35
UNASSEMBLE 39-37
WRITE 39-39
DecInfo section B-24
DecKeybd section B-22
DecLAT section B-21
DECnet-VAXmate
utilities NFT 34-1
Default printer 8-15
Definitions
canvas 24-2
current status box 24-3
drawing window 24-3
menu bar 24-3
mouse cursor 24-3
MS-Paint 24-2
terminal emulator 9-1
title bar 24-3
tools and shapes palette
24-3
DEL command 32-34
Delete command 3-6,4-4,4-6,5-7,
18-15,19-14,20-18
DELETE command 34-20
Delete Font command 8-6, 8-13
Delete Printer command 8-6, 8-10
Deleting files 4-6, 4-7
Deleting

Index

cards in Cardfile
19-14
files
in Calendar 20-1S
in Cardfile
19-19
in Notepad
IS-IS
fonts S-13
NFT files 34-20
text
in Calendar 20-5
in Cardfile
19-10
in Notepad
lS-7
Delimiters 30-2
Destination drive 30-3
DEVICE command 1-6
Devices
drivers
characteristics 29-1
logical 33-5
physical 33-5
section B-26
Diacritical marks A-4
Dialog box
check boxes
1-12
closing
1-12
command button
1-10
Cancel
1-12
default 1-12
keyboard procedure 6-11
Ok 1-12
Reset
1-12
defined 1-8
insertion point 1-11
keyboard procedure 6-10, 6-11
list box 1- 1 1
option buttons
1-11
keyboard procedure 6-10
System menu box 1-12
text box
1-10
DlR command 32-35
Directly Modifies option C-9
Directories 5-1
change listing 5-5
changing 5-1, 5-3
creating 5-4
current 3-3,5-1,30-4
defined 5-1, 30-4
deleting 5-7
displaying information 34-21
displaying multiple 5-6

11111

hierarchical 30-4
listing 3-3,5-1,5-5
MS-DOS Executive window 5-1
path name 5-1
printing listings 5-6
printing 5-6
root 30-4
structure 30-4
subdirectory 5-1
DIRECTORY command 34-21
Disconnecting
from a remote directory 33-12
from a remote printer 33-12
from a resource 33-12
DlSKCOPY command 32-37
DlSKCOPY.COM 3-15
Diskettes 5-S, H-1
data 5-S
formatting H-1
preparing 5-S, 5-9
system 5-9
using H-1
Disks 5-1
displaying 5-11
drive AS-II
drive H 5-11
naming 5-10
Displaying
disks 5-11
multiple directories 5-6
VT240 character attributes 16-1S
Fast Text Only mode
16-1S
VT240 line attributes
16-17
Fast Text Only mode
16-17
Text & Graphics mode
16-17
Double-click on
action defined
1-3
Double-click 3-15
rate S-5
Drag
action defined
1-3
Drawing 26-2
3-D 27-2
box 27-1
brush 26-4
circle 27-2
curve 27-2
curves F-2
eraser 26-5

Index-7

IIIII Index
filled box 27-4
lines F-2, 27-2
oval 27-2
pencil 26-3
polygons F-2
rounded box 27-2
shapes F-2
window 24-3
Drive icons 3-3
Drop-down menu
1-7
DUMP command 39-8
Duplicate command
19-14
E
Early ring text box 20-6
ECHO command 32-39
Edit menu
18-5, 18-13, 19-10,28-3
commands 28-3
Clear 28-5
Copy 28-4
Cut 28-4
Erase 28-4
Flip Horizontal 28-5
Flip Vertical 28-5
Invert 28-5
Paste 28-4
special effects 28-5
Trace Edges 28-5
Edit Pattern command 28-11
Editing
a selection 27-6
detailed 27-8
in day view
in Calendar 20-3
in Notepad 18-5
keys 36-1
PIF C-5
special effects 27-7
text
in Calendar 20-4
in Cardfile
19-8
EDLIN command 32-41
Emulators
comparison table 9-2, 10-1
ReGIS graphics
14-1
DECgraph
14-1
DECslide
14-1
SETHOST command 9-1
VT220 emulator 9-1

Index-8

VT240 emulator 9-1
End key 7-5
End Session command 3-9,3-15
ENTER command 39-10
Entering
appointments in Calendar 20-3
VT220 Set-Up
12-1
F3 (Set-Up)
12-2
Set-Up command
12-2
VT240 Set-Up
16-1
Erase command 28-4
ERASE command 32-42
Eraser 26-5
ESC key 6-2, 6-5
EXE2BIN command 32-43
EXIT command 32-45, 34-23
Exiting
MS-Windows 29-5
Set-Up selections
Exit VT240
16-9
standard applications 3-15
VT220 Set-Up
12-5
VT240 emulator 14-4
VT240 Set-Up
16-5
VT240
15-1
Ctrl/FlO
Exit key 15-1
Expand defined
1-3
Extensions section B-8
External commands
characteristics 29-1
with MS-Windows 29-2

F
Fast Text Only mode
viewing columns
16-17
Shift/left arrow 16-17
Shift/right arrow 16-17
FC command 32-46
FCBS command

1-7

FDISK command 32-49
File menu 3-4,3-5,3-6,4-4, 18-10,
18-12, 18-13, 18-14, 19-14, 19-16,
19-17,26-8,28-1
commands 3-6, 28-1
NEW 28-2
OPEN 28-2
Print 28-2
Save As 28-2

Index
Save 28-2
File names 6-6
characters in 30-8
illegal 30-8
keyboard procedure 6-8
File specifications
foreign 34-5
remote 34-5
FILES command 1-8
Files 4-1
appending 34-11
batch 3-13
canceling selected files 6-14
canceling selected 4-2
concatenating 4-6
copying 4-4, 4-5, 4-6, 34-14
defined 4-1
deleting 4-6,4-7,34-20
displaying contents 34-29
extension
defined 3-6
View menu 3-8
in Calendar 20-13
in Cardfile
19-14
in Notepad 18-10
keyboard procedure 6-14
listing 5-5
name 7-6
naming 4-1,30-7
printing 4-7, 34-25
renaming 4-12
selecting multiple 4-2
selecting 4-2
keyboard procedure 6-14, 6-15
starting the emulator
VT240
14-2
VT240CM1
14-2
VT240CM2
14-2
support 30-3
temporary 3-13
types of 34-6
FILL command 39-13
Filling a shape 27-5
Filters 38-3
Find command 18-9, 19-12
FIND command 32-50
Find dialog box 18-9, 19-12
Find Next command 18-9, 19-12
Finding text

IIIII

in Cardfile
19-12
in Notepad 18-9
Fine Grid command 28-10
Finishing
applications
keyboard procedure 6-8, 6-9
MS-DOS programs 3-15
MS-Paint 26-8
MS-Windows 3-15
standard applications 7-5
Flip Horizontal command 27-7, 28-5
Flip Vertical command 28-5
FONT command G-3, 32-53
Font menu
28-5
commands 28-5
Fonts section B-27
FontSize menu 28-5
commands 28-5
Fonts
adding 8-11
deleting 8-13
device 8-12
raster 8-11
stroke 8-11
vector 8-11
FOR command 32-56
FORMAT command 32-58
Format Data Disk command 3-9, 5-8
Formatting
diskettes H-1
text
in Cardfile 19-4
in Notepad 18-3
the hard disk 31-9
Freehand polygon 27-2
G
Get Info command 3-6, 4-4, 4-13
Getting help
for NIT 34-24
on-line information system 29-4
GO command 39-15
Go To command
in Cardfile
19-7
dialog box 19-7
GOTO command 32-61
GRAFTABL command G-3, 32-62
GRAPHICS command 32-63

Index-9

11111 Index

H
Hard disk
copying files to 31-10
copying system files 31-9
formatting 31-9
initializing 31-6
partition sizes 31-6
partitioning 31-6
preparing 31-1
repartitioning 31-10
setting drive type 3 1-2
setting start-up partition 31-8
what it is 31-1
HELP command 34-24
Help
Information System 29-4
HEX command 39-17
Hierarchical directory structure 30-4
High command 4-10
Highlight l-S, 3-3
Hints for Reversi 23-3
Home key 7-5
Hourglass 3-13,5-9
I
I/O activities 7-1
Jcon area 3-3
Icon command 1-7, 2-14
keyboard procedure 6-7, 6-9
Icons 2-14, 3-3
expanding 7 -6
names 2-3
shrinking
keyboard procedure 6-9
standard applications 7-3
IF command 32-66
Illegal file names 30-S
Image file
see Binary file 34-6
Index command 19-7
Index dialog box 19-3, 19-7
Index line
in Cardfile 19-3
Industry standard compose 36-4
Information System 1-4, 1-5
Initial Directory option C-7
Initializing hard disk 31-6
INPUT command 39-1S
Insertion point

Index-IO

in Cardfile
19-5
in Notepad
lS-5
Installation Aid C-1
Installation menu S-3, S-6
Internal commands
characteristics 29-1
with MS-Windows 29-3
International section B-1S
Invert command 2S-5

J
JOIN command

32-68

K
KB Desired C-S
KB Required C-S
Key diskette 3-1
KEYB command G-3,32-70
Keyboard labels
VT220 emulator 11-2
VT240 emulator 15-1
Keyboard procedure 6-1
canceling commands 6-5
canceling selected files 6-14
changing window sizes 6-16
closing applications 6-9
commands 6-4
copying E-1
creating multiple copies E-1
dialog box 6-10, 6-11
closing 6-11
features 6-1
finishing applications 6-S
loading applications 6-6
menus 6-4
moving windows 6-17
multiple windows 6-16
recelvmg messages 6-1S
removing menus 6-5
running applications 6-7, 6-S
scrolling 6-12, E-1
standard applications 7-4
selecting commands 6-4
selecting files 6-14, 6-15
shrinking icons 6-9
size box 6-16
Size command 6-16
switching windows 6-16
transferring information 7-7

Index

using MS-Paint F-1
Zoom command 6-17
Keyboard setting command 8-20,
8-22
Keyboards
country 11-1, 15-1
VT220 emulator 11-2
VT240 emulator 15-1
Keys
Alt/F11
VT240 emulator 17-4
Alt/F12
VT240 emulator 17-5
Alt/Prt Sc 7-7,7-9
AIt/Return 6-17
AIt/spacebar 6-2, 6-4
AIt/Tab/Shift 6-2
AIt/Tab 6-2,6-7,6-9,7-6
Alt 6-2, 6-3
Arrow/Shift 6-3
Arrow 6-2,6-4, 6-6, 6-8, 6-10,
6-12,6-14,7-4
backspace A-6
Compose A-3, A-6
Ctrl/Arrow 6-2
Ctrl/Break 6-2,6-11
Ctrl E-1
End 7-5
ESC 6-2,6-5
function keys
Ctrl/F10
15-3
Ctrl/F2
15-3
Ctrl/F5
11-3, 15-3
FlO (Exit)
15-3
F11 (ESC)
11-3, 15-3
F12 (BS)
11-3, 15-4
F13 (LF)
11-3, 15-4
F2 (Print Screen)
11-2, 15-3
F3 (Set-Up)
11-3, 15-3
F4 (data/Talk)
11-3
F4 (Data/Talk)
15-3
F5 (Break)
11-3, 15-3
Shift/F2
15-3
Shift/F5
11-3, 15-3
VT220 emulator 11-2
VT240 emulator 15-2
Home 7-5
Line feed
34-9
Page Down (Pg Dn)
7-5

11111

Page Up (Pg Up) 7-4
Return/Shift 6-3
Return 6-2,6-6,6-8,6-10,6-11
Shift/Ctrl F-2
Shift/Next
VT240 emulator
16-13
Shift/Prev
VT240 emulator
16-13
Shift/Tab 6-10, F-2
Shift 4-2,6-2, A-3, E-1
Shitf/Prt Sc 6-18
spacebar 6-2, 6-9
Tab 6-3,6-10,8-4, F-2
VT240 emulator
arrow keys
16-4
Next screen 16-4
Previous screen
16-4
Select 16-4
Word Char 5-3, 6-3
L
LABEL command 32-72
LASTDRIVE command 1-9
LCOUNTRY command G-4,32-74
Leaving the VT220 emulator 10-4
Close command 10-4
Icon command 10-4
Left mouse button 8-24
Lines
drawing F-2
List command 19-20
Listing
file names 5-5
remote network connections 33-8
Load command 3-6, 3-10,6-6
LOAD command 39-19
Loading applications
keyboard procedure 6-6
Local files
copying to a remote node 34-8,
34-19
providing access 34-1
Logical devices 33-5
Long command 3-8
Low command 4-10
M
Make System Disk command
Making a selection 27-6

3-9, 5-9

Index-II

11111 Index

Mark command 7·7,20·12
Marking
information 7·7
dates in Calendar 20·12
Match Case command 18·9
MDRIVE command 32·76
Medium Grid command 28·10
Memory Requirements option C·8
Memory 2·2,7·1,7·10, C-2, C·8,
C·15
in Calculator 21·3
Menu bar 3·3, 24·3
Menus
Alarm 20·6
Card 19·5
Control 4·10,4.11
drop·down
1· 7
18·5, 18·13, 19·10,28·3
Edit
File 3·5,4·4, 18·10, 18·12, ,18·13,
18·14, 19·14, 19·16, 19·17,26·8,
28·1
Font 28·5
FontSize 28·5
Installation 8·3, 8·6
MS·Paint 28·1
Options 20·10, 28·9
Palette 26· 7, 28·8
Preferences 8·3, 8·20
Priority 4·10
Search
18·9, 19·7, 19·12
selecting
keyboard procedure 6·4
Setup 8·3,8·14
Show 20·9
Special menu 3·4
Special 3'9
Style 28·5
System menu 3·4
System 3·4, 7·7, 18·10, 19·14,
26·8
View menu 3·4
View 3·7
Merge command 19·20
Merge dialog box 19·20
Merging files in Cardfile
19· 20
Messages 40·1
applications 2·18
MKOIR command 32·78
MODE command 32·79

Index· 12

Month command 20·8
Month view
in Calendar 20·8
MORE command 32·90, 38·3
Mouse
actions defined
click
1·3
double·click
1·3
drag 1·3
point
1·3
cursor 24·3
settings command 8·20, 8·24
MOVE command 39·21
Move command
1· 7
keyboard procedure 6· 7, 6·17
Moving
cards in Cardfile
19· 7
text
in Cardfile
19·10, 19·11
in Notepad
18·8
through card files
19·5
windows 2·6
MS·DOS commands 3·14
ANSI 32·6
APPEND 32·7
ASSIGN 32·9
ATTRIB 32·11
BACKUP 32·13
BREAK 32·17
CHOIR 32·18
CHKDSK 32·19
CLS 32·21
COMMAND 32·22
COPY 32·24
CTTY 32·31
DATE 32·32
DEL 32·34
OIR 32·35
OISKCOPY 32·37
ECHO
32~39
EDLIN 32·41
ERASE 32·42
EXE2BIN 32·43
EXIT 32·45
FC 32·46
FOISK 32·49
FIND 32·50
FONT G·3, 32·53
FOR 32·56

Index
FORMAT 32-58
GOTO 32-61
GRAFfABL G-3, 32-62
GRAPHICS 32-63
IF 32-66
JOIN 32-68
KEYB G-3, 16-21,32-70
VT240 emulator 16-10
LABEL 32-72
LCOUNTRY G-4,32-74
MDRIVE 32-76
MKDIR 32-78
MODE 32-79
MORE 32-90
PATH 32-93
PAUSE 32-95,37-1
PERMIT 32-97, 33-17
PRINT 32-98
PROMPT 32-102
RECOVER 32-104
REM 32-106,37-1
REN 32-107
RESTORE
32-108
RMDIR 32-110
SELECT G-4, 32-111
SET 32-115
SET HOST 9-1
SHARE 32-117
SHIFT 32-118
SORT G-4, 32-120
SUBST 32-123
SYS 32-125
TIME 32-127
TYPE 32-128
VER 32-130
VERIFY 32-131
VOL 32-132
MS-DOS Executive window 3-1,3-2,
18-12, 19-16,20-14
changing directories 5-2, 5-3
components 3-2, 3-3
CONTROL.EXE 8-2
creating directories 5-4
cursor 3-3
deleting directories 5-7
directories 5-1
disk drives
5-11
diskettes 5-8
displaying disks 5-11

displaying multiple directories
drive icons 3-3
first window
1-2
highlight 3-3
icon area 3-3
icons 3-3
listing directories 3-3
menu bar 3-3
naming disks 5-10
path name 3-3,5-1
path 3-3
preparing disks 5-8
printing directory listings 5-6
scroll bars 3-3
size box 3-3
System menu box 3-3
title bar 3-3
work area 3-3
MS-DOS operating system 3-16
WIN.INI
VT220 emulator 13-2
MS-DOS programs 3-14
MS-Paint commands
Align Center 28-7
Align Right 28-7
Align
28-7
Clear 28-5
Coarse Grid 28-10
Copy 27-7, 28-4
Create 28-1
Cut 28-4
Edit Pattern 28-11
Erase
28-4
Fine Grid 28-10
Flip Horizontal 27-7,28-5
Flip Vertical
28-5
Invert 28-5
Medium Grid 28-10
New 28-2
No Grid
28-10
Opaque 28-7
Open 28-2
Paste 27-7,28-4
Patterns 27-4, 27-5
Print 28-1, 28-2
Save As 28-2
Save 28-1,28-2
special effects 28-5
Trace Edges 28-5

IIIII
5-6

Index-13

IIIII Index
Transparent 28-7
Undo 28-4
Zoom In 27-8, 28-10
Zoom Out 27-9, 28-10
MS-Paint 24-1,26-1
MS-Windows commands
About 1-7,3-4, C-3
Add New Font 8-6, 8-11
Add New Printer 8-6, 8-7
All 3-8
By Date 3-8
By Kind 3-8
By Name 3-8
By Size 3-8
Change Directory 3-9, 5-2
Close 1-7,3-15,4-13,6-9,7-3
VT220 emulator 10-4
Communications Port 8-14
Connections 8-7, 8-14
Copy 2-17, 3-6, 4-4, 4-5, 4-6, 5-4,
7-7, 7-8
VT220 emulator 10-4
Country settings 8-20, 8-25
Create Directory 3-9, 5-4
Cut 2-17
Delete Font 8-6,8-13
Delete Printer 8-6, 8-10
Delete 3-6, 4-4, 4-6, 5-7
End Session 3-9, 3-15
Format Data Disk 3-9, 5-8
Get Info 3-6, 4-4, 4-13
High 4-10
Icon
1-7,2-14,6-7,6-9
VT220 emulator 10-4
Keyboard settings 8-20, 8-22
Load 3-6,3-10,6-6
Long 3-8
Low 4-10
Make System Disk 3-9, 5-9
Mark

(-(

VT220 emulator 10-4
Mouse settings 8-20, 8-24
Move
1-7,6-7,6-17
Network Terminal Services 8-14
New C-5
Partial 3-8, 5-5
Paste 2-17, 7-7, 7-8
VT220 emulator 10-4
Pause 4-11

Index-14

Print 3-6,4-4,4-7,5-6,8-15
Printer 8-14,8-15
Programs 3-8
Rename 3-6, 4-4, 4-12
Resume 4-11
Run 3-6,3-12,3-14, 5-6,6-8,7-6,
8-2, C-4
configuration files
13-2
VT220 emulator 10-2
VT240 emulator 14-2
Screen colors 8-20
selecting
keyboard procedure 6-4
Set Volume Name 3-9, 5-10
Short 3-8
Size
1-7,2-9,2-12,6-16
Terminate 4-11
Zoom
1-7, 2-13, 2-14,6-17
MS-Windows 3-15
eXiting 29-5
finishing 3-15
standard applications 7-5
initialization file
18-1
MS-DOS Executive window 18-1,
18-12, 19-1, 19-16,20-1,20-14,
21-1,22-1,23-1
restarting 3 -16
returning 7-6
using external commands with
29-2
using internal commands with
29-3
MSDOS.EXE 5-6

N
NAME command 39-23
Naming files 30-7
NET CLEAR command 33-13
NET CONTINUE command 33-11
NET DEFINE command 33-13
NET HELP command 33-4
NET LIST command 33-14
NET PAUSE command 33-10
NET PRINT command 33-9
NET START LAT command 33-15
NET TEST command 33-15
NET TIME command 33-16
NET USE command 33-6
NET.EXE 3-14

Index

Network commands
NET CLEAR 33·13
NET CONTINUE 33·11
NET DEFINE 33·13
NET HELP 33·4
NET LIST 33·14
NET PAUSE 33·10
NET PRINT 33·9
NET START LAT 33·15
NET TEST 33· 15
NET TIME 33·16
NET USE 33·6
Network File Transfer (NFT) utility
34·1
Network Terminal Services command
8·14
Network Terminal Services
MSNET.INI
16·13
VT220 emulator 12·9, 12·10
VT240 emulator 14·3, 16·10,
16· 11
Network
changing drives 33·9
connecting 3·15, 33·4
directory 33·7
remote printer 33· 7
resource
33·6
disconnecting 3· 15
from remote directory 33· 12
from remote printer 33· 12
from resources 33·1 2
listing remote connections 33·8
logical devices 33·5
physical devices 33·5
printing a file
33·9
specifying device names 33·5
temporarily disconnecting 33· 1 0
what a network is 33·2
New command C·5, 18·11, 19·15,
20·13,23·3,28·2
NFT commands
APPEND 34· 11
COpy 34·14
DELETE 34·20
DIRECTORY 34·21
EXIT 34·23
HELP 34·24
PRINT 34·25
SET 34·26

IIIII

SHOW 34·27
SUBMIT 34·28
TYPE 34·29
using 34·8
NFT qualifiers
/NOCONVERT 34· 7
for COPY 34· 14
for DELETE 34·20
for DIRECTORY 34·21
for HELP 34·24
for PRINT 34·25
for SUBMIT 34·28
NFT 34·1
abbreviating
commands 34·9
qualifiers 34·9
exiting from
34·2, 34·23
getting help 34·24
starting 34·2
using long commands 34·9
No Grid command 28· 1 0
Nonstream file system 34· 7
Notepad commands
About
18·10
Clear 18·7
Copy 18·5, 18·8
Cut
18·5, 18·8
Delete
18· 15
Find Next 18·9
Find 18·9
Match Case
18·9
New 18·11
Open command 18· 13
Open
18·12
Paste
18·5, 18·8
Print
18·15
Save As
18·14
Save
18·15
Select All
18· 7
Time/Date
18· 13
Undo
18·7
Notepad files
18· 1 0
deleting 18· 15
file size
18· 1 0
opening files
18· 11
opening 18· 11
printing 18· 15
saving changes
18· 15
saving
18· 14

Index· 15

IIIII Index
viewing
IS-13
Notepad window IS-II
Notepad B-3
canceling edits
IS-7
copying text
IS-S
deieting files
IS-15
deleting text
IS-7
editing
IS-5
finding text
IS-9
formatting text
IS-3
insertion point
IS-5
introducing
IS-1
moving text
IS-S
opening files
IS-II
printing files
IS-15
saving changes
IS-15
saving files
IS-14
scroll bars
IS-4
scrolling
IS-4
selecting text
IS-6, IS-7
starting
IS-1
time log file
IS-13
typing text
IS-2
viewing files
IS-13
window
IS-2
Num Lock 6-12

o
Opaque command 2S-7
Open command
IS-12, IS-13, 19-16,
19-17,20-14, 20-15, 2S-2
Open dialog box
IS-12, IS-13,
19-16, 19-17,20-14,20-15
Opening
files
in Calendar 20-13,20-14
in Cardfile
19-15
in Notepad
IS-II
Operating system
commands 32-1
Options menu 20-10, 2S-9
commands 2S-9
Coarse Grid 2S-10
Edit Pattern 2S-11
Fine Grid 2S-10
Medium Grid 2S-10
No Grid 2S-10
Zoom In 2S-10
Zoom Out 2S-10

Index-16

OUTPUT command

39-26

p
Page Down (Pg Dn) key 7-5
Page Up (Pg Up) key 7-4
Palette menu 26-7, 2S-S
commands 2S-S
Palettes 26-7
Partial command 3-S, 5-5
Partitioning hard disk 31-6
Pass command 23-2
Password 34-3
Paste command 2-17, 7-7, 7-S, lS-5,
IS-S, 19-10, 19-11, 19-12, 19-13,
20-5, 21-4, 27-7, 2S-4
Pasting 2-16
PATH command 32-93
Path name 3-3,5-1,30-5
changing directories 5-3
Paths 3-3, 30-5
used with external commands 30-7
Patterns command 27-4, 27-5
Patterns
adding 27-4
Pause command 4-11
PAUSE command 32-95, 37-1
PERMIT command 32-97, 33-17
Physical devices 33-5
Picture command 19-13
PIF section B-13
PIF 7-2
changing C-l 5
Close Window on exit option C-12
closing standard applications 7-4
contents C-13
creating C-4
customized C-2
default settings C-13
defined C-l
Directly Modifies Memory option
7-10
Directly Modifies option C-9
editing C-S
editor C-3
getting help C-3
Initial Directory option C-7
KB Desired C-S
KB Required C-S
Memory ReqUirements option C-S

Index 11111
options C-5
Program Name option C-6
Program Parameters option C-6
Program Switch option 7-6, C-II
Program Title option C-6
running applications C-2
Screen Exchange option C-I2
standard applications 7 -2
Pipes 38-3
Playing Reversi 23-3
Point
action defined 1-3
Polygon F-2
freehand 27-2
Pop-up program 7-11
Ports section B-16
Preferences menu 8-3
commands
Country settings 8-20, 8-25
Keyboard settings 8-20, 8-22
Mouse settings 8-20, 8-24
Screen Colors 8-20
Screen colors 8-20
Print command 3-6, 4-4, 4-7, 5-6,
18-15, 19-19,20-17, 28-1, 28-2
default printer 8-15
PRINT command 32-98, 34-25
Print dialog box 20-17
Print queue 4-9
Printer command 8-14,8-15
Printer connections 8-14
Printer driver files 8-7
Printers
adding 8-6, 8-7, 8-9
removing 8-10
Printing
cards in Cardfile
19-19
default printer 4-8
directory listings 5-6
files 4-7,33-9
in Calendar 20-17
in Cardfile 19-19
in Notepad 18-15
graphics mode 4-11
in MS-Paint 26-8
MS-DOS files 34-25
print queue 4-9
screens 6-18
Priority menu 4-10

Program Information Editor window
C-4
Program Name option C-6
Program Parameters option C-6
Program Switch option C-11
Program Title option C-6
Programs command 3-8
PROMPT command 32-102
Prompts
NIT 34-2, 34-9
operating system symbol 30-2
Prt Sc key 36-4
PTRACE command 39-27

Q
Question mark
as a wildcard
QUIT command

30-9
39·29

R
Recall Set-Up Parameters
Actions Set-Up screen
VT220 emulator 13-3
VT240 emulator 17-3
Recalling
Set-Up files
VT220 emulator 13-2
VT240emuiator 17-2
settings
VT220 emulator 13-3
VT240 emulator 17-3
Receiving characters from a host
session logging 13-3,13-4,17-4
RECOVER command 32-104
Redirecting output 38-2
REGISTER command 39-30
REM command 32·106, 37-1
Remote files
accessing 34-1
copying to a local node 34-7
Remove command 20-18
Remove dialog box 20-18
Removing
days in Calendar 20-18
menus
keyboard procedure 6-5
printers 8-10
REN command 32-107
Rename command 3-6,4-4,4-12

Index-I 7

IIIII Index
Renaming files 4-12
Repartitioning hard disk 31-10
Reserved words 30-2
Resources 7 -2
Restarting MS-Windows 3-16
Restore command 19-13
RESTORE command 32-108
Restoring cards in Cardfile
19-13
Resume command 4-11
Return key 6-2,6-6,6-8,6-10,6-11
Return/Shift key 6-3
Returning to MS-Windows 7-6
Reversi commands
New 23-3
Pass 23-2
Reversi window 23-2
Reversi
hints 23-3
introducing 23-1
playing 23-3
rules 23-2
starting new games 23-3
starting 23-1
Right mouse button 8-24
RMDIR command 32-110
Root directory 30-4
Rules for Reversi 23-2
Run command 3-6, 3-12, 3-14, 5-6,
7-6, 8-2, C-4
keyboard procedure 6-8
Running applications
file name 3-11,3-13
Running
applications C-2
keyboard procedure 6-6,6-7,
6-8
Control Panel 8-1
multiple standard applications 7-5
standard applications
large 7-10
outside windows 7-5

S
Save As command 18-14, 19-18,
20-16,28-2
Save As dialog box 18-14, 19-18,
20-16
Save command
18-15, 19-19, 20-17,
28-1,28-2

Index-i8

Save Set-Up Parameters
Actions Set-Up screen
Vf220 emulator 13-3
VT240 emulator 17-2
Saving
changes
in Calendar 20-17
in Cardfile
19-19
in Notepad 18-15
files
in Calendar 20-15
in Cardfile
19-18
18-14
in Notepad
Set-Up files
Vf220 emulator 13-2
Vf240 emulator 17-2
settings
VT220 emulator 13-2
Vf240 emulator 17-2, 17-3
Scratch pad 20-4, 20-12
Screen colors command 8-20
Screen Exchange option C-12
Screens
printing 6-18
Scroll arrow 1-6
Scroll bars 1-5,3-3, 18-4
Scroll box 1-6, 19-6
Scrolling E-1, 27-10
defined
1-5
in Calendar 20-3,20-7
in Cardfile
19-6
in Notepad
18-4
keyboard procedure 6.12
mouse procedure
1-5
standard applications 7-4
keyboard procedure 7-4
Vf220 emulator window 10-3
Vf220 keys
Ctrl/Find 10-3
Clrl/Nexi
10-3
CtrljPrev 10-3
Ctrl/Select 10-3
SEARCH command 39-33
Search For text box
18-9
Search menu
18-9, 19-7, 19-12
Select All command 18-7
SELECT command G-4, 32-111
Selecting

Index

command buttons
keyboard procedure 6-11
commands
keyboard procedure 6-4
default printer 8-15
files 4-2
Keyboard procedure 6-14
keyboard procedure 6-15
information for transfer 7-7
menus
keyboard procedure 6-4
multiple files 4-2
text
in Calendar 20-4
in Cardfile
19-9
in Notepad 18-6, 18-7
times
in Calendar 20-3
Selection Net 27-6
Selection Rectangle 27-6, 28-5
Selection
copying E-l
editing 27-6
making 27-6
Serial communications
integral modem
VT220 emulator 12-10
Integral Modem
VT240 emulator 16-11
Modem Control
VT220 emulator 12-10
VT240 emulator 16-11
VT220 emulator 12-9, 12-10
VT240 emulator 16-10, 16-11
Server
what it is 33-3
SET command 32-115, 34-26
Set Volume Name command 3-9, 5-10
Set-Up screens
current selection settings
VT220 emulator 12-2
menu bar
VT220 emulator 12-2
status section
VT220 emulator 12-2
title bar
VT220 emulator 12-2
VT220 emulator
Actions 12-6, 16-7

IIIII

Communications 12-9, 16-10
Display 12-12, 16-14
General
12-14, 16-19
Keyboard 12-17, 16-22
Printer 12-20, 16-26
Tabs
12-22, 16-28
Telephone
12-25, 16-31
Set-Up selections
Disconnect Delay
VT240 emulator 16-13
Answerback Concealed
VT220 emulator 12-20
Answerback String
VT220 emulator 12-20
VT240 emulator 16-25
Answerback
VT240 emulator 16-25
Auto Answerback
VT220 emulator 12-20
VT240 emulator 16-25
Auto Repeat
VT240 emulator 16-26
Auto Wrap
VT220 emulator 12-14
VT240 emulator 16-16
Background
VT220 emulator 12-14
VT240 emulator 16-16
Blink
VT220 emulator 12-14
Break
VT220 emulator 12-19
VT240 emulator 16-24
Caps Lock
VT240 emulator 16-26
Clear All Tabs
VT220 emulator 12-23
VT240 emulator 16-29
Clear Communications
VT220 emulator 12-8
VT240 emulator 16-9
Clear Display
VT220 emulator 12-8
VT240 emulator 16-9
Columns
VT220 emulator 12-13
VT240 emulator 16-16
Cursor Keys
VT220 emulator 12-19

Index-19

11111 Index

VT240 emulator 16-24
Cursor Style
VT220 emulator 12-14
VT240 emulator 16-16
Data Bits and Parity
vT220 emulator
12-12
VT240 emulator 16-13
Disconnect Delay
VT220 emulator 12-12
Exit VT240
VT240 emulator 16-9
Font Size
VT220 emulator 12-14
Keyclick
VT240 emulator 16-26
Keypad Mode
VT220 emulator 12-19
VT240 emulator 16-24
Line mode
VT220 emulator 12-15
Line Mode
VT240 emulator 16-21
Local Echo
VT220 emulator 12-15
VT240 emulator 16-21
MO-M3 degrees of gray
VT240 emulator 16-16
Manually Set Tabs
VT220 emulator 12-23
VT240 emulator 16-29
Margin Bell
VT220 emulator 12-19
VT240 emulator 16-24
Modem Answer
VT220 emulator 13-1
VT240 emulator 17-1
Monochrome
VT240 emulator 16-16
Multinational Character Set
VT220 emulator 12-17
VT240 emulator 16-21
Multinational Mode
VT220 emulator 12-15
VT240 emulator 16-22
Network Communications Port
VT240 emulator 16-12
Network Terminal Services
VT220 emulator 12-12
New Line

Index-20

VT220 emulator 12-15
VT240 emulator 16-21
Port/Network
VT220 emulator 12-11
Print Extent
VT220 emulator 12-22
VT240 emulator 16-28
Print File Name
VT240 emulator 16-28
Print Mode
VT220 emulator 12-22
VT240 emulator 16-28
Print Size
VT220 emulator 12-22
Print Terminator
VT240 emulator 16-28
Printer Type
VT240 emulator 16-28
Recall Set-Up Parameters
VT220 emulator 12-8
VT240 emulator 16-9
Receive· File
VT220 emulator 12-9
Reset Terminal
VT220 emulator 12-8
VT240 emulator 16-9
Save Set-Up Parameters
VT220 emulator 12-8
VT240 emulator 16-9
Send File
VT220 emulator 12-9
Set 8 Column Tabs
VT220 emulator 12-23
VT240 emulator 16-29
Set Default Set-Up Parameters
VT220 emulator 12-8
VT240 emulator 16-9
Set Tab Intervals
VT240 emulator 16-29
Set Tab Interval
VT220 emulator 12-23
Shift Lock
VT240 emulator 16-26
Show Status
VT240 emulator 16-9
Speed
VT220 emulator 12-12
VT240 emulator 16-13
Stop Bits

Index
Vf220 emulator 12-12
Vf240 emulator 16-13
Telephone Numbers
17-1
VT220 emulator 13-1
Terminal Emulation
Vf220 emulator 12-17
VT240 emulator 16-22
TerminalID
Vf220 emulator 12-17
Text & Graphics Video Mode
VT240 emulator 16-16
Text Cursor
VT220 emulator 12-14
VT240 emulator 16-16
To MS-DOS
Vf240 emulator 16-9
Transmit = Receive
VT240 emulator 16-13
User Defined Keys
VT220 emulator 12-17
Vf240 emulator 16-22
User Features
Vf220 emulator 12-17
VT240 emulator 16-22
Video Mode
Vf240 emulator 16-16
Warning Bell
Vf220 emulator 12-19
Vf240 emulator 16-24
XOFF Point
Vf220 emulator 12-12
Vf240 emulator 16-13
Setting
Clock 22-2
hard disk drive type 31-2
hard disk start-up partition 31-8
tabs manually
VT220 emulator 12-23
Vf240 emulator 16-29
Setup menu 8-3
commands
Communications Pon 8-14
Connections 8-14
Network Terminal Services 8-14
Printer 8-14, 8-15
Shapes 27-2
drawing F-2
filling 27-5
functions 25-3

IIIII

selecting F-2
summary 25-3
SHARE command 32-117
SHELL command 1-10
SHIFT command 32-118
Shift key 4-2,6-2, A-3, E-1
Shift/Ctrl keys F-2
Shift/Tab 6-10, F-2
Short command 3-8
SHOW command 34-27
Show menu 20-9
Shrinking
description
1-14
Size box 2-11,2-12,2-14,3-3
keyboard procedure 6-16
Size command 1-7, 2-9, 2-12
keyboard procedure 6-16
SORT command G-4, 32-120, 38-3
Source drive 30-3
Spacebar 6-2, 6-9
Special applications 7 -10
Special effects 28-5
commands 28-5
editing 27-7
Special menu 3-4, 3-9
Change Directory 5-2
commands 3-9
Special Time command 20-11
Special Time dialog box 20-11
Special times
in Calendar 20-11
Specifying Vf220 configuration files on
startup
13-2
Spooler window 4-10
Spooler 4-8, 4-9
Control menu 4-10, 4-11
Priority menu 4-10
Starting the emulator
login information
Vf220 emulator 10-2
VT240 emulator 14-3
Vf220 emulator 10-2
Run command 10-2
VT220 icon
10-2
Vf240 emulator 14-2
command format
14-3
from the MS-DOS operating system
14-3
Run command 14-2

Index-21

IIIII Index
Starting
Calculator 21-1
Calendar 20-1
Cardfile
19-1
Clock 22-1
MS-Paint 26-1
new games in Reversi 23-3
Notepad 18-1
Reversi 23-1
standard applications
outside windows 7-6
Status section
autotyping
VT220 emulator 13-4
character set
VT240 emulator 16-10
communications
VT220 emulator 12-4
VT240 emulator 16-10
Insert/Replace modes
VT240 emulator 16-10
integral modem
VT220 emulator 12-4
VT240 emulator 16-9
keyboard
VT240 emulator 16-10
KEYB
VT240 emulator 16-10
printer
VT220 emulator 12-4
printing
VT240 emulator 16-9
receiving or sending files
VT220 emulator 12-4
VT240 emulator 16-9
telephone modes
VT220 emulator 12-4
VT240 emulator 16-9
VT220 emulator 12-4
\11'240 emulator
Show Status 16-9
Stream file system 34-6
Style menu 28-5
commands 28-5
Align Center 28-7
Align Right 28-7
Align 28-7
Opaque 28-7
Transparent 28-7

Index-22

Subdirectory 5-1
SUBMIT command 34-28
SUBST command 32-123
Support files
30-3
Switching
windows 2-6
keyboard procedure 6-16
SYS command 32-125
System diskette 5-9
System files
copying 31-9
System menu box 3-3, 3-4
double-clicking 3-15
System menu
1-14, 3-4, 7-7, 18-10,
19-14, 26-8
commands
About
1-7
Close
1-7, 1-14
Icon
1-7
Move
1-7
Size
1-7
Zoom
1-7

T
Tab key 6-3,6-10,8-4, F-2
Template 36-1
Temporarily disconnecting from the
network 33-10
Terminate command 4-11
Text command
19-13
Text 27-3
adding 27-3
files
18-11
in Notepad
18-2, 18-3
Tiling 2-2
TIME command 32-127
Time log file
18-13
Time/Date command 18-13
Title bar 3-3, 24-3
shrinking ~- D
Tools and shapes palette
24-3
Tools 27-2
Box 27-1,27-4
Fill 27-4
functions 25-2
Scroll 27-10
selecting F-2
Selection Net 27-6
Selection Rectangle
27-6

Index
summary 25-2
Text 27-3
TRACE command 39-35
Trace Edges command 28-5
Transferring information
applications 7-7
keyboard procedure 7 -7
windows 2-16
Transparent command 28-7
TYPE command 32-128,34-29
Typing text
in Cardfile
19-4
in Notepad 18-2

U
UNASSEMBLE command 39-37
Understanding Set-Up screens
VT220 emulator 12-2
VT240 emulator 16-1
Undo command 18-7, 19-10, 28-4
Unmark command 20-13
Unmarking dates in Calendar 20-13
Username 34-3
Using external commands
with MS-Windows 29-2
Using internal commands
with MS-Windows 29-3
Using MS-DOS Executive window 3-2
Using Set-Up
VT220 emulator 12-1
table information 12-5
with a mouse
12-5
VT240 emulator 16-1
table information
16-6
with a keyboard 16-4
Using Setup menu 8-14
Using special features
VT220 emulator 13-1
VT240 emulator 17-1
Using the emulator
VT220 emulator 10-1
keyboard
11-1
multiple sessions 10-2
VT240 emulator 14-1
Using the keyboard
with the VT220 emulator D-l
Alt/down arrow D-l
Alt/left arrow D-l
Altjright arrow D-l

IIIII

Alt/spacebar D-l
Alt/up arrow D-l
F3 (Set-Up) E-l
Next D-l
Prev E-l
right and left arrow E-l
up and down arrow E-l
Using the VT220 emulator
multiple sessions 10-2
Using VT220 System menu commands
10-3
About command 10-4
Copy command 10-4
Mark command
10-4
Paste command 10-4
Set-Up command 10-3
Using VT240 video modes
16-17
Fast Text Only 16-17
Text & Graphics mode
16-17
V
VER command 32·130
VERIFY command 32-131
View menu 3-4, 3-7, 3-8
commands 3-8
Viewing
appointments in Calendar 20-7
dates in Calendar 20-8, 20-9
files
in Calendar 20-15
in Cardfile
19-17, 19-20
in Notepad 18-13
times in Calendar 20-7
VOL command 32-132
Volume name 5-10
VT220 emulator keyboard
11-1, 11-2
VT240 double height/width
Fast Text Only 16-18
VT240 double width lines
Fast Text Only 16-18

W
Wildcards 5-5, 30-2, 30-8
asterisk 30-9
question mark 30-9
WIN.INI 7-11,8-1, B-1
adding printers 8-8
changing B-3
Colors section B-I0

Index-23

IIIII Index
DECLIT AA VAX HD91A
DecInfo section B-24
DecKeybd section B-22
DecLAT section B·21
Devices section B·26
Extensions section B-8
Fonts section B·27
International section B·18
naming printers 8·6
PIF section B·13
Ports section B·16
sections B·2
Windows section B-4
Windows section B·4
Windows 1·1
active 2·6
changing sizes 2·9, 6·16
closing
standard applications 7-3
enlargening 2·9
keyboard procedure 6-16
filling the screen 2-13
keyboard procedure 6-17
making smaller 2-12
keyboard procedure 6·16
moving 2-6
keyboard procedure 6-17
mulitple
keyboard procedure 6-16
multiple 2·2
receiving messages
keyboard procedure 6·18
shrinking 2-14
switching 1-1, 2-6
keyboard procedure 6-16
tiling 2-2
transferring information 2-16
Word Char key 5-3, 6-3
Work area 3·3
Workstation resources 7-2
WRITE command 39-39

Z
Zoom command 1-7, 2·13, 2-14,6-17
Zoom In command 27-8, 28-10
Zoom Out command 27·9, 28·10

Index-24

VAXmate user's
vo lunl€')

~uide?

Appendix A
Creating
Alternate Characters

This appendix describes how to:
• Use the CtrljAlt and CtrljAltjleft-Shift key sequences with any key that
has three or four keycap legends
• Create characters using:
- Three-key compose sequence
- Two-key compose sequence
• Alt numeric pad sequence
With the keyboard, you can create many alternate characters and accented
letters that do not exist as standard keys on your keyboard. This appendix
describes how to create alternate characters and accented letters.

Using Keys With Three or Four Legends
Some keys on the main keyboard have three or four keycap legends. Figure
A-I shows an example of a three legend key.

""".f.j'
'
'
\
!

= f'_

2: 1 3
............•
.

.4 $
14.,......... .

-..... .....•............. .
1\
i
_a_.) 1.1.. .. _ ~

!~ ~=:.J jV·~ ~

Figure A-I

Three Legend Key

A·I

IIIII Creating Alternate Characters
For more information about which country keyboards have three or four legend keys, see Appendix G.
To generate the desired key legend, use CtrI/Alt or the CtrI/Alt/left-Shift key
sequence, depending on the country keyboard:
• Type 1 country keyboards: U.S./United Kingdom (U.K.)
• Type 2 country keyboards: French, German, Spanish, Italian, SwissFrench, Swiss-German, and Hebrew
• Type 3 country keyboards: Danish, Norwegian, Swedish, Finnish, and
Canadian

Type 1 Country Keyboards
On Type 1 keyboards, only the 3 key has three legends.
On the U.S. keyboard, to display the # sign, press Shift/3. To display the £
sign, press the CtrI/Alt/3 key sequence.
On the U.K. keyboard, to display the £ sign, press Shift/3. To display the #
sign, press the CtrI/Alt/3 key sequence.

Type 2 Country Keyboards
On Type 2 keyboards, one or more keys contain three characters; however,
the third character is always located in the lower-right corner of the key.
To display the third character, press CtrI/Alt and the key.

Type 3 Keyboards
On Type 3 keyboards, one or more keys contain three legends; some contain
four.
Some characters on the multilegend keys are duplicated on different keys.
When these characters are on the right-hand side of the key, they function as
the U.S./U.K. keyboard keys. When you run U.S. software, you can use these
keys to simulate a U.S. keyboard. (All the other keys have their characters in
the same position as the U.S./U.K. keyboard.)
To display the character in the lower-right corner, press CtrI/Alt and the key.
To display the character in the upper-right corner, press the CtrI/AIt/leftShift sequece and the key.
For more information about country keyboard layouts, see Appendix G.

A-2

Creating Alternate Characters

IIIII

Using Compose Sequences
You can create and display alternate characters and accented letters that do
not exist as standard keys on your keyboard by using a compose sequence.
The compose sequence consists of typing either a three-key sequence or a
two-key sequence.
NOTE

You can only create compose sequences on applications designed
for MS-Windows. This sequence does not work for standard
applications that run in a window.
With the three-key sequence, you use the Compose key, located at the top
left of your keyboard. With the two-key sequence, you do not use the Compose key.
In both the three-key and the two-key sequences, to select an uppercase
character or symbol, press the Shift key before you press the keyboard
character.
Table A-2 list all valid compose sequences. Different countries use different
keyboards. Therefore, the resultant compose characters listed in column 1
can be created in several ways, according to your keyboard:
• Use a standard key, if available on the keyboard.
• Use a two-key compose sequence.
This is available only if the nons pacing diacritical mark, initiating a
two-key compose sequence, is available on the keyboard and is defined
by the keyboard's nationality.
• Use a three-key compose sequence.
This is available on all keyboards.
You cancel a compose sequence by pressing the backspace key.

A-3

IIIII Creating Alternate Characters
Using the Two-Key Compose Sequence
The two-key sequence can be used on all keyboards having a nonspacing
diacritical mark that initiates a two-key compose sequence. Nonspacing diacritical marks are available on all keyboards except the U.S.jU.K. keyboards.
The diacritical marks that initiate a two-key compose sequence vary among
the keyboards according to the nationality of the keyboard. Only the diacritical marks associated with the nationality of the keyboard initiate the two-key
compose sequence. For example, pressing the umlaut key on a German keyboard initiates a two-key compose sequence, while pressing the tilde key
does not, even though it is on the keyboard. This is because the umlaut is a
German language diacritical while the tilde is not. To see which diacritical
marks are available according to the keyboard's nationality, see Appendix G.
Table A-2 lists all valid two-key compose sequences.
To use the two-key compose sequence:
1. Locate in Column 1 of Table A-2 the character you want to create and
verify from Column 2 that the character can be created using the twokey sequence.
2. Press the nonspacing key with the diacritical mark shown in Column 2.
This is not displayed on the screen.
3. Type the second character shown in Column 2.
The composed character is displayed.
The characters in a two-key compose sequence must by typed in the order
shown in Table A-2.
If you type an invalid compose sequence, the keyboard bell rings once, and

the compose sequence is terminated. Check the table carefully and repeat
the steps to compose a character.

A-4

Creating Alternate Characters 11111

Using the Three-Key Compose Sequence
The three-key sequence can be used on all keyboards. Table A-2 lists all valid
three-key compose sequences.
To use a three-key sequence:
1. Locate the character you want to create in Column 1 of Table A-2.
2. Press the Compose key.
3. Type the two characters from Column 3 that correspond to the character you want to create.
The characters you type after pressing the Compose key are not displayed. After you type the two characters, the composed character is
displayed at the cursor.
Output characters are case dependent.
The order in which you enter required characters does not matter unless
otherwise indicated in Table A-2.
If you type an invalid compose sequence, the keyboard bell rings once, and
the compose sequence is terminated. If this happens, check the table care-

fully and repeat the steps to compose a character.
If you use a diacritical mark in a three-key sequence, it is treated as its

equivalent character. Table A-I describes the mark and its equivalent
character.
Table A-I

Diacritical Mark in a Three-Key Sequence

Diacritical Mark

Equivalent Character

Dieresis (umlaut mark)

Double Quote II

Acute accent

Apostrophe'

Grave accent

Single quote'

Circumflex accent

Circumflex character ~

Tilde mark

Tilde character -

Ring mark

Asterisk • or degree sign

A-5

IIIII Creating Alternate Characters
Finishing or Restarting a Compose Sequence
If you enter the compose mode by mistake, or to end the compose sequence,

press the backspace key and exit from the compose mode.
If you press the Compose key during a compose sequence, a new three-key
sequence is started from that point. The previous sequence is ended.
NOTE

Table A-2 contains all possible compose sequences for applications
that run under MS-Windows. However, no single application can
create all of these compose characters. There are two different sets
of compose characters. An application can use only one set of
compose characters at a time.
Applications use either the International Standards Organization
(ISO) Latin-1 character set or the DEC Multinational Character Set
(DEC MCS). Both sets contain all of the compose sequences except
those listed with a single asterisk C) or a double asterisk (") in
Column 1. A single asterisk C) identifies the compose characters
in the ISO Latin-1 character set only, while a double asterisk C')
identifies the compose characters in the DEC MCS set only.
For standard applications that run outside a window, use the
MS-DOS operating system to use compose sequences.
Table A-2

Valid Compose Sequences

Character

Two-Key
Sequence

Three-Key Sequence

(number sign)

@ (commercial at)

[ (opening bracket)

\ (backslash)

1< or II

1 (closing bracket)

{ (opening brace)

I (vertical line)

: (broken vertical bar) ,

: I or I/

l (closing brace)

A-6

Creating Alternate Characters
Table A-2

Valid Compose Sequences (cont.)
Two-Key
Sequence

Character

Three-Key Sequence

« (angle quotes left)

» (angle quote right)

NBSP (No Break Space) •

(sp)(sp) (Two spaces)

j (inverted !)

i, (inverted ?)

(

degree sign)

® (reg. trademark) •

11111

(cent sign)

c/ or cI

£ (pound sign)

1- or 1=

" (general currency)

Y (yen sign)

y- or y=

- (soft hyphen) •
.. (macron sign) •
!1 (micro sign)

, (logical NOT sign)

-, (order sensitive)

± (plus/minus sign)

X (multiply sign)

-7-

(divide sign)
1)

(superscript 2)

21'

1 (superscript
2

-: (order sensitive)

3 (su perscri pt 3)
~

(paragraph sign)

§ (section sign)

!p
so or s!

~ (feminine ordinal)
Q

(masculine ordinal)

• ( middle dot)

A-7

11111 Creating Alternate Characters

Table A-2

Valid Compose Sequences (cont.)

Character

Two-Key
Sequence

Three-Key Sequence

1/4 (fraction one-quarter)

14 (order sensitive)

(fraction one-half)

12 (order sensitive)

1/2

3/4 (fraction three-quarters) •

34 (order sensitive)

13 (German sharp s)

(cap Icelandic Eth) •

-D

" (sm Icelandic Eth) •

-d

(j) (0 slash)

~ (0 slash)

p (cap Icelandic Thorn) •

TH (order sensitive)

p (sm Icelandic Thorn) •

th (order sensitive)

- (tilde character)

- (sp)

. (grave accent)

(sp)

. (sp)

, (apostrophe)

, (sp)

, (acute accent) •
A

(circumflex character)
(double quote)

(sp)

.. (dieresis) •

(sp)

dieresis (sp)
1111

, ( cedilla) •

A (A grave)

it (a grave)

A (A acute)

a (a acute)

a (a circumflex)
A (A tilde)

a (a tilde)

A-8

Creating Alternate Characters
Table A-2

IIIII

Valid Compose Sequences (cont.)

Character

Two-Key
Sequence

Three-Key Sequence

A (A umlaut)

a (a umlaut)

A (A ring)

'A or 'A

A' or N (degree sign)

a (a ring)

a' or a' (degree sign)

JE (AE ligature)

AE (order sensitive)

<e (ae ligature)

ae (order sensitive)

<:: (C cedilla)

( c cedilla)

E(E grave)

e (e grave)

E(E acute)

e (e acute)

E (E circumflex)

E/\

e (e circumflex)

/\e

e/\

E (E umlaut)

liE

e (e umlaut)

lie

i (I grave)

i (i grave)

i (I acute)

i (i acute)

I (I circumflex)

/\1

1/\

i (i circumflex)

i' (I umlaut)
i" (i umlaut)

N (N tilde)
Ii (n tilde)

A-9

IIIII Creating Alternate Characters
Table A-2

Valid Compose Sequences (cont.)

Character

Two-Key
Sequence

Three-Key Sequence

b (0 grave)

-0

o (0 umlaut)

6 (0 umlaut)

o (0 grave)
6 (0 acute)
6 (0 acute)

6 (0 circumflex)

o (0 circumflex)
6 (0 tilde)
6 (0 tilde)

(E (OE ligature)

(order sensitive)
re (oe ligature) ..

oe
(order sensitive)

U (U grave)

u (u grave)

U (U acute)

u (u acute)

U (U umlaut)

ii (u umlaut)

Y (Yacute) •

y (yacute) .
Y (Y umlaut) ..
y (y umlaut)

U (U circumflex)

u (u circumflex)

A-IO

Creating Alternate Characters 11111

Alt Numeric Pad Sequence
To use the Alt numeric pad seqeunce:
1. Press and hold down the Alt key.
2. Press three numeric keypad number keys.
3. Release the Alt key.
The numbers act as an index for the application's currently selected character set.
For example, to compose an uppercase C cedilla and the currently selected
font is STn (IBM):
1. Press the Alt key.
2. Press 1, 2, and 8 on the numeric keypad.
3. Release the Alt key.
An uppercase C cedilla is composed.
If the currently selected font is ISO Latin-I, the output for ALT 1,2,8 is not a

displayable character, and the output is displayed as a solid block. To produce an uppercase C cedilla when the ISO font is selected, you must type
1,9,9 while holding down the Alt key.
The output for this compose sequence is not remapped from STn to ANSI.

A-ll

AppendixB
Information About
the WIN.INI File

This chapter describes the WIN.INI file, which contains some applications
and settings for many MS-Windows features and applications. MS-Windows
checks the WIN .INI file and uses these settings each time you start
MS-Windows or an MS-Windows application.
NOTE

You rarely need to change the WIN.INI file. The Configuration
Aide creates the WIN.INI file on the key diskette. This appendix
provides the instructions primarily for special system
customization. The settings in your WIN.INI can vary from those
shown here.
You should print a copy of the WIN.INI file before you change it, using the
Print command from the MS-DOS Executive window.
MS-Windows searches for the WIN.INI file in the directory from which you
start MS-Windows. If MS-Windows does not find the WIN.INI file in that
directory, MS-Windows searches the directories given in the path.
You can place comments in the WIN.INI file by making the first nonspace
character a semicolon (;). Comments cannot contain equal signs.

B-1

11111 Information About the WIN.lNI File

Table B-1 describes the sections of the WIN.lNI file that affect MS-Windows
settings.
Table B-1 Sections of the WIN_INI File
Section

Setting

Windows

Controls the loading of the spooler.
Sets double-click speed.
Sets cursor blink rate.
Specifies the file extensions listed in the MS-DOS Executive
window with the Programs command.
Defines the name for the null port.
Starts applications as icons.
Starts applications in windows.
Defines default printer device.
Swaps the action of the mouse buttons.

Extensions

Starts an application when you select a file with the specified
file extension.

Colors

Specifies the shades of gray in the MS-Window's display screen.

PIF (Program
Information File)

Defines swap disk and swap size.
Specifies program information entries for applications used
with MS-Windows.

Ports

Defines the communication ports you can use.

International

Defines MS-Windows for operation in foreign countries.

DecLAT

Redirects the communications ports to a network terminal service.

DecKeybd

Sets the keyboard operation settings.

DecInfo

Defines the location of the on-line Information System.

Devices

Defines the output devices recognized by MS-Windows.

Fonts

Defines the display fonts MS-Windows can use.

B-2

Information About the WIN.INI File

11111

Changing the WIN .INI File
Before you change the WIN.INI file, you should be familiar with MS-Windows
and MS-Windows applications such as Notepad.
To change the WIN.INI settings, use:
• The MS-Windows Control Panel
This is the preferred method for making changes, because MS-Windows
edits the file for you. Any changes made with the Control Panel take
effect immediately.
• The Notepad application to edit the WIN.INI file
Any changes made with an editor do not take effect until MS-Windows is
restarted.
NOTE

You can use any text editor that produces an ASCII file to edit the
WIN.INI file. Do not use any editors that include special
formatting characters in addition to the standard ASCII formatting
commands.
Edits made with a text editor do not take effect until MS-Windows
is restarted.
The following sections describe the sections of the WIN.INI file.

B-3

IIIII In/ormation About the WIN.lNI File
Windows Section
Purpose

The Windows section contains settings that take effect when MS-Windows is
started.
NOTE

In the Windows section, you change some settings with the
Control Panel and some with an editor. To change the double-click
speed, cursor blink rate, default device, and swap mouse button
settings, use the Control Panel. To change the programs, load, run,
spooler, and null port settings, use Notepad.
Format
[windows]
spooler=setting
DoubleClickSpeed=speed
CursorBlinkRate=speed
programs=list
NullPort=port
load=list
run-list
device=name,driver,port
SwapMouseButtons=setting

Where:

spooler=setting
Determines whether the spooler is used when printing. The setting
can be:
Yes

The spooler is used when printing.

The spooler is not used when printing.

DoubleClickSpeed=speed
Sets the speed in milliseconds for the double-click operation of the
mouse. Speed can be 0 to 65535 ms.

B-4

IIIII

Information About the WIN.INI File

CursorBlinkRate=speed
Sets the speed in milliseconds for the cursor blinking action. Speed can
be 0 to 65535 ms.
programs=list
Specifies the files displayed in the MS-DOS Executive window when you
select the Programs command from the View menu. The list contains
the file extensions without the period. Separate the file extensions with
spaces.
N ullPort=port
Defines the name for the null port to a specified port. The Control
Panel, Spooler, and other applications use this port when an output
device is installed, but is not connected to any port.
load=list
Starts the specified applications as icons when you start MS-Windows.
The list contains the application file names as they are displayed in the
MS-DOS Executive window without the file extension. (For example,
Calculator is CALC, because CALC.EXE is the application file name.)
Include a space between the file names. MS-Windows first searches the
current drive, the directory, then the path. Otherwise, specify a path
name.
To start the MS-DOS Executive window as an icon when you first start
MS-Windows, you must specify another application to start in a window.
Use run= to start an application in a window and to start the
MS-Executive window as an icon.
You can also start an application as an icon and open a file for that
application by adding the file name and the file extension to the load
setting.
To use this option, you must define the application in the Extensions
section of the WIN.INI file.
For example, DOTHIS.TXT starts Notepad because .TXT is in the Extensions section, starting the Notepad application.

B-5

IIIII In/ormation About the WIN.lNI File
run=list
Starts the specified applications in windows when you start
MS-Windows. You list the file names exactly as they are displayed in the
MS-DOS Executive window without the file extension.
When you specify an application to start in a window when you start
MS-Windows, the MS-Executive window automatically starts as an icon.
Include a space between the file names. MS-Windows first searches the
current drive, the directory, then the path. Otherwise, specify a path
name.
You should not specify a file name either for a special application or
for an application that uses a large amount of memory; otherwise, you
will enter an endless loop when you exit from the application.
You can arrange windows by using spaces to designate windows within
the same column, and commas to designate a new column.
You can start an application and open a data or text file in a window
when you start MS-Windows by adding the file name and the file extension in the run setting. To use this option, you must define the application in the Extensions section of the WIN.INI file.

device=name,driver,port
Defines the default printer ( or plotter):
name

Is the name of the default device. You must also specify
this default device in the Devices section.

driver

Is the file containing the device's printer file name without the file extension.

port

Is the port to which the device is connected. You must
also specify this port in the Ports section.

SwapMouseButtons=setting
Swaps the functions performed by the left and right mouse buttons.
Setting can be:

B-6

The left mouse button controls the mouse functions. This is
the default.

Yes

The right mouse button controls the mouse functions.

IIIII

In/ormation About the WIN.INI File

Windows Section Example
The following Windows section:
• Enables the spooler when printing.
• Sets the mouse double-click speed to 900 ms.
• Sets the cursor blink rate to 550 ms.
• Specifies that files with the .COM, .EXE, and .BAT file extensions are
displayed in the MS-DOS Executive window when you use the Programs
command.
• Specifies None as the null port.
• Using no file specifications, starts Notepad and Calculator as icons, and
starts Notepad with the text file ONGOING.TXT.
• Statts Clock in the first window of the first column, Calculator in the
second window of the first column, Notepad in the first window of the
second column, and Notepad with the file specification
K\MEMOS\ONGOING.TXT in the second window of the second
column .
• Sets the default printer to a DIGITAL LA75, which is connected to the
LPTl: port.
• Does not switch the left and right mouse buttons.

Example
[window51
5pooler=ye5
DoubleClickSpeed=900
Cur50rBlinkRate=550
program=com exe bat
NullPort=None
load=notepad calc ongoing. txt
run=clock calc,notepad K:\memo5\ongoing.txt
device=LA75DEC,LA75,LPT1:
SwapMou5eButton5=No

B-7

IIIII Information About the WIN.INI File
Extensions Section
Purpose
In the Extensions section, you can specify file extensions that let you start an
. applicaHon and open a me in a single operation. When yQU select a file with
the specified extension, MS-Windows starts the application and opens the file
in one step.
NOTE
To change the Extensions section, use the Notepad application.

Format
[exten5ion51
exten5ion=application[parameterl

Where:

extension

Is the file extension that starts the application.

application

Is the name of the application that is started. You must include the application's extension (.EXE).

parameter

Is the name and extension of the file (optional) for the application to open. You can use a caret C') to represent any
file with that extension (for example, J\ • TXT) . Then you can
select any file with the specified extension, and MS-Windows
starts the application with that file.

B-B

Information About the WIN.lNI File 11111

Extensions Section Example
The following Extensions section:
• Starts the Notepad application when you specify a file containing a .TXT
file extension. Notepad opens the file.
• Starts the Notepad application when you specify a file containing an
.INI file extension. Notepad opens the file.
• Starts the MS-Paint application when you specify a file containing an
.MSP file extension. Paint opens the file.

Example
[extensions]
txt=notepad.exe A.txt
ini=notepad.exe A.ini
msp=paint.exe A. msp

B-9

IIIII In/ormation About the WIN.INI File
Colors Section
Purpose
The Colors section specifies the shading for various components of the
MS-Windows screen.
NOTE

To change the Colors section, use the Control Panel. Set your
screen to have contrasting text and background colors. Otherwise,
your screen could look blank.

Format
[color5]
component=redvalue greenvalue bluevalue

Where:

component
Specifies the component of the MS-Windows screen. The component
can be:

B-JO

Window

Is the nontextual background of the window
work area.

WindowText

Is the textual display in the window work area.

Scrollbar

Is the scroll bar.

ActiveTitle

Is the background of the active title bar.

InactiveTitle

Is the background of the inactive title bar.

TitleText

Is the application title's text.

WindowFrame

Is the set of lines that form the frame of the window and the nontextual part of the application's
title background.

Is the nontextual background of the menu area.

MenuText

Is the textual display in the menu area.

Background

Is the icon area and screen background.

Information About the WIN.INI File

11111

redvalue
Is a number that specifies the intensity of red used. The number can be

o to 255.
greenvalue
Is a number that specifies the intensity of green used. The number can
be 0 to 255.

bluevalue
Is a number that specifies the intensity of blue used. The number can
be 0 to 255.
NOTE

Because you have a monochrome screen, the redvalue, greenvalue,
and bluevalue settings affect the gray scale of the MS-Windows
components. The low end of the gray scale is 0, and the high end
of the gray scale is 255. Therefore, if all three settings are 0
(setting=O 0 0), the color is black. If all three settings are 255
(setting=255 255 255), the color is white. Settings between 0 and
255 produces varying shades of gray.

Colors Section Example
The following Colors section:
• Sets the nontextual background of the window work area to white.
• Sets the textual display in the window work area to black.
• Sets the scroll bar to a shade of gray.
• Sets the active title bar background color to black .
• Sets the inactive title bar background color to a shade of gray.
• Sets the application title to white.
• Sets the lines that form the frame of the window and the nontextual
part of the application's title background to black.
• Sets the nontextual background of the menu area to white.
• Sets the textual display in the menu area to black.
• Sets the icon area and screen background to a shade of gray.

B-11

IIIII In/ormation About the WIN.INI File
Example
[color5]
Window=255 255 255
W-i nd-owTex-t-O -0- 0

Scrollbar=192 192 192
ActiveTitle=O 0 0
InactiveTitle=128 128 128
TitleText=255 255 255
WindowFrame=O 0 0
Menu=255 255 255
MenuText=O 0 0
Background=128 128 128

B-12

In/ormation About the WIN.INI File

IIIII

PIF Section
Purpose
The PIF section lists the information that MS-Windows uses to swap programs
to disk. MS-Windows uses the swap area to swap applications that cannot
operate in a window. Two settings (SwapDisk and SwapSize) determine
where MS-Windows swaps an application and the minimum swap space.
The PIF section creates a program information entry for standard applications
used in a window. MS-Windows uses the program information entry rather
than a program information file (PI F). The preferred method is to create a
PIF. For more information on PIFs, see Appendix C.
NOTE

To change the PIF section, use Notepad.

Format
[pH 1
swapdisk=setting
swapsize=setting
program=memory

Where:
SwapDisk=setting
Is the disk to which MS-Windows swaps the application. The setting
can be:
Swaps to the first fixed disk on the system. This is the
default.
dry

Swaps to that drive. Drv is any valid drive letter.

Disables swapping.

NOTE

Do not set a diskette drive as the swap disk.

B-13

IIIII Information About the WIN.INI File
SwapSize=setting
Is the amount of memory MS-Windows uses to swap an application. The
setting can be:

Is the amount of memory based on the size of the first application that MS-Windows swaps. You should start the largest
application first. This is the default.

size

Is the reserved minimum amount of memory in Kbytes that
MS-Windows uses to swap applications. When you determine
the size, consider the application size, the space for screen
exchange, the space for screen switching, and 2K bytes of
overhead for saving information about the application's current state.

progra01=01e01ory
Is the application name for which you want to create a program information entry. Memory is the amount of memory in Kbytes required to
start the application. See the application documentation to find the
memory requirements for the application.
When memory is 1, it indicates a special application.
MS-Windows assumes the following default settings for a program information entry:

B-14

Program Title

File name without extension

Initial Directory

None

Parameters

None

Memory Required

Specified to the right of the equal sign

Memory Desired

Same as memory required

Screen Exchange

Text

Program Switch

Text

Directly Modifies

None

Close Window on Exit

Information About the WIN.INI File

IIIII

PIP Section Example
The following PIF section:
• Sets the swap disk to the default.
• Sets the swap size to the default.
• Creates a program information entry for COMMAND.COM with a 32K
byte memory requirement.

Example
[pif]
5wapdi5k=?
5wap5ize=O
command.com=32

B-15

IIIII In/ormation About the WIN.lNI File
Ports Section
Purpose

The Ports section lists the available communication ports for a workstation
and-defines-the default modes or settings. The Ports section can include up
to eight entries.
NOTE

To change the Ports section, use the Control Panel.
Format
[ports]
port:=baudrate,parity,wordlength,stopbits,[retry]
filename.PRH=

Where:

port:
Is the name of the available port. Port can be LPTl:, LPT2:, LPT3:,
COMl:, or COM2:.
If the port is COMl: or COM2:, you must specify in order the:

baud rate

Is the port's baud rate.

parity

Is the parity setting: 0 (odd), e (even), or
n (none).

word length

Is the length of a word, in bits.

stop bits

Is the number of stop bits.

retry

Controls continuous retry on a timeout. This option is used if the port is used only for a serial
printer. If you leave this option blank, the current setting does not change.
The retry options are:
p

which enables continuous retry on a tim out
which disables continous retry on a timeout

B·16

In/ormation About the WIN.lNI File

IIIII

filename.PRN=

Sends printer output to a file rather than to a printer device.
MS-Windows prints the information in the file name you specify. You
must include the .PRN file extension. MS-Windows overwrites the file
with each print job.

Ports Section Example
The following Ports section:
• Defines the LPTl: communication port.
• Defines the LPT2: communication port .
• Defines the COMl: communication port with 9600 baud rate, no parity
check, 8 bit word length, 1 stop bit, and enabled retry.
• Defines the COM2: communication port with 2400 baud rate, no parity
check, 8 bit word length, 1 stop bit, and disabled retry.
• Defines OUTPUT.PRN as a file for printer output.

Example
[ports]

LPT1: ..
LPT2:=
COM1:-9600,n,8,1,p
COM2:-2400,n,8,1

OUTPUT.PRH-

B-17

IIIII Information About the WIN.lNI File
International Section
Purpose
The imernationai section teUs MS-Windows how to display dates, times, dollar amounts, and other items in countries other than the United States.
NOTE

To change the International section, use the Control Panel.

Format
[intlJ
dialog-5etting
itemname-5etting

Where:

dialog=setting
Allows changes to the Ir.ternational section through the Control Panel.
The setting can be:
Yes

Enables the international dialog box.

Disables the international dialog box.

itemname
Is the item you want to set. The setting can be:
iCountry

Defines the country code.

iDate

Defines the format for the date where:

o for month-day-year
1
2
iCurrency

Defines the format for currency where:

o
1
2
3

B-I8

for day-month-year
for year-month-day

for currency symbol prefix, no separation
for currency symbol suffix, no separation
for currency symbol prefix, 1 character
separation
for currency symbol suffix, 1 character
separation

In/ormation About the WIN.INI File

iDigits

Defines the number of significant decimal digits in
the currency.

iTime

'Defines the format for the time where:

o
1
iLzero

IIIII

for 12-hour clock
for 24-hour clock

Defines the use of leading zeros where:

o
1

for no leading zeros
for leading zeros

s1159

Defines trailing string from 0:00 to 11:59.

s2359

Defines trailing string from 12: 00 to 23: 5 9.

sCurrency

Defines currency symbol.

sThousand

Defines thousands separator.

sDecimal

Defines decimal separator.

sDate

Defines date separator.

sTime

Defines time separator.

sList

Defines list separator.

International Section Example
The following International section:
• Allows changes to the International section through the Control Panel.
• Defines the country as the U.S.
• Defines a month-day-year date format.
• Defines a 0 currency symbol prefix with no separation for the currency
format.
• Defines two significant decimal digits in the currency .
• Defines a 12-hour clock.
• Defines the use of no leading zeros.
• Defines an AM to be attached to time from 0:00 to 11:59.
• Defines a PM to be attached to time from 12:00 to 23:59.

B-19

IIIII In/ormation About the WIN.INI File
• Defines $ as the currency symbol.
• Defines , as thousand separator.
• Defines . as decimal separator.
• D~fines / as date separator.
• Defines: as time separator.
• Defines , as list separator.
Example
[intl]
dlelog"'ye5
iCountry-1
10ete-O
lCurrency-O
iOigi h-2
i Time-O
lLzero-O
5115S"AM
5235S·PM
5Currency-S
5Thou5end-,
50eclmal-.
50ate-'
5Tlme-:
5L15t-,

B-20

Information About the WIN.INI File

IIIII

DecLAT Section
Purpose
The DecLAT section redirects the communication ports to a network terminal
service.
NOTE
To change the DecLAT section, use the Control Panel.
Format
CDecLATl
port=5ervice

Where:
port

Is the communication port that you want to redirect. Port can be
COM!: or COM2:. Service is the network terminal service to
which you want to connect. You do not have to specify a particular network terminal service.

DecLAT Section Example
The following DecLAT section:
• Defines the COMl: communication port. It is not redirected to any network terminal service.
• Defines the RANGER network terminal service to the COM2: communication port.
Example
[DecLATl

COM1:=
COM2:=RANGER

B-21

IIIII Information About the WIN.INI File
DecKeybd Section
Purpose
The DecKeybd section specifies the keyboard settings.
NOTE

To change the DecKeybd section, use the Control Panel.

Format
[DecKeybdl
keyclick=5etting
repeat=5etting
lock=5etting

Where:

keydick=setting
Specifies the volume of sound generated by the keyboard. The setting
can be from 0 to 3 where 0 is no volume and 3 is maximum volume.
The default is 2.

repeat=setting
Specifies whether the repeat key feature is used. The setting can be:

o Turns off the repeat key feature.
1

Turns on the repeat key feature.

lock=setting
Specifies the caps lock or shift lock feature of the keyboard. The setting
can be:

B-22

Sets the caps lock feature, which capitalizes the letters on the
keyboard when you press the Lock key.

Sets the shift lock feature, which acts as if the Shift key is always
pressed.

Information About the WIN.INI File

IIIII

DecKeybd Section Example
The following DecKeybd section:
• Sets the key click to medium volume.
• Turns on the repeat key feature.
• Sets the caps lock feature.
Example
[DecKeybdl
keyclick=2
repeat=1
lock=O

B-23

IIIII In/ormation About the WIN.IN! File
Declnfo Section
Purpose

The DecInfo section specifies to MS-Winoows the location of the on-line
Information System files. You should not need to change any of these
settings.
NOTE

To change the DecInfo section, use the Notepad application.
Format
[Declnfol
DBpath=pathname
DBname=databa5e
BMpath=pathname

Where:
DBpath

Specifies the location of the on-line Information System
database files by the specified path name.

DBname

Specifies the name of the on-line Information System
database.

BMpath

Specifies the location of user specific information regarding
the on-line Information System by the specified path name.
For example, the Bookmark file contains information specific
to you.

B-24

In/ormation About the WIN.lNI File

IIIII

Declnfo Section Example
The following DecInfo section:
• Defines the location of the on-line Information System data files as drive
H in the DECAPP subdirectory.
• Defines the name of database as INFOUSER.
• Defines the location of your specific information regarding the on-line
Information System as drive I.

Example
[Declnf9]
DBpath=H:\DECAPP
DBname=II'IFDU5ER
BMpath=I:\

B-25

IIIII In/ormation About the WIN.lNI File
Devices Section
Purpose
The Devices section identifies a workstation's output devices, the printer
files, and the port connections.
NOTE
To change the Devices section, use the Control Panel.

Format
[device51
device=driver,port[,portl

Where:

device

Is the name of the output device where:
driver

Is the file name of the device's printer driver.

port

Is the name of the communication port or print file to
which the device is connected (optional). Port can be
LPTl, LPT2, LPT3, COMl, or COM2. If a device is not
currently connected, the port should be the port specified in the NullPort setting of the Windows section.

Devices Section Example
• Defines the DIGITAL LN03 printer as connected to the null port and to
the LPT3:communication port.
• Defines the IA75DEC printer as connected to the LPTl :communication
port.
• Defines the IBM Graphics printer as the null port.

Example
[device51
Digital LN03=LN03,None,LPT3:
LA7SDEC=LASO,LPT1:
IBM Graphic5=IBMGRX,None

B-26

Information About the WIN.INI File 11111

Fonts Section
Purpose
The Fonts section identifies one or more font types that MS-Windows applications can use for display.
NOTE

To change the Fonts section, use the Control Panel.

Format
[font5]
fontname=fontfile

Where:

fontname

Is the descriptive name of a font. The fontfile is the name of
the file containing the font resources. Do not use the file
extension.

Fonts Section Example
The following Fonts section:
• Defines the Courier font.
• Defines the Helvetica font.

Example
[font5]
Courier 8,10,12 (Set H3)=CDURC
Helv 8,10,12(SetH3)=HELVC

B-27

Appendix C
Program
Information Files

This appendix describes how to:
• Use Program Information Files (PIFs)
• Use the PIF editor
• Select PIF options
• Use default settings
• Decide what to put in a PIF
• Change PIFs
• Give applications more memory

Using Program Information Files
A program information file (PIF) is a file that contains information about a
standard application. It has the file extension .PIF. When you run a standard
application, MS-Windows looks for a PIF to configure the application.
PIFs for most popular standard applications are included with your
MS-Windows software package. During setup, the Installation Aide installs
PIFs in the PIF subdirectory to establish a PIF library. You probably will not
enter information into a PIF unless you use a standard application that does
not have a PIF.

C-l

IIIII Program In/ormation Files
NOTE

If you try to run a standard application that does not have a PIF,
MS-Windows automatically uses a set of default application
characteristics. MS-Windows displays a dialog box asking if it
should "Continue with default settings." You should create a PIF,
using the correct values from your application documentation.
If you run an application by selecting the file name of the application (files

that have the file extension .EXE, .COM, or .BAT), the PIF must have the
same file name and the file extension .PIF. For example, if you use dBASE II,
its application file name is DBASE.EXE, and its PIF must be DBASE.PIF.
You can also run an application by selecting its PIF in the MS-DOS Executive
window. This automatically loads and runs the application named in the PIF.
In this case, the PIF does not have to have the same file name as the
application.
The preferred method is to run a standard application by selecting its PIF.
This allows you to have customized PIFs, which are several PIFs containing
different settings for the same application. Therefore, you can customize an
application to the needs of different users, each with their own specific
MS-Windows environment.
For example, one version, APPLARGE.PIF, may need a large amount of memory for those that use all of its features, and a second version, APPSMALL.PIF,
may need less memory for those who use only a few of its features.
Additionally, each user can have customized values for the Program Parameters or Initial Directory fields in their PIFs. Customized PIFs must be in the
user's personal directory.
The PIF must be in your directory or in your path. It should be copied from
the PIF subdirectory to the directory from which you run the application.

C-2

Program Information Files

IIIII

In some cases, different applications use the same file name to start up.
Therefore, some PIFs can have names that differ from their applications. If
you are not sure which application a PIF works with, run the PIF editor and
open the PIF to see which application the PIF was designed for, then copy
the PIF to the appropriate drive and directory, and rename the file.
Some applications can have more than one .EXE, .COM, or .BAT file on their
disk. You need a separate PIF for each file.

Using the PIF Editor
To create or edit a PIF, use the PIF editor. For example, you can change the
application settings to increase the amount of memory available to the application or to set its initial directory.
To get on-line help about using the PIF editor:
1. Select the About command from the System menu.
A dialog box is displayed that lists topics about PIFs.
2. Select a topic from the list box.
3. Select the Help command button.
Information about the selected topic is displayed in the dialog box. You
may need to scroll to see all the information.
By using the command buttons in the dialog box, you can obtain information about other PIF topics.
When you finish using the PIF help feature, select the Cancel command
button.

C-3

11111

Program In/ormation Files

Creating a PIF
To create a new PIF:
I. Use the Run command in the MS-DOS Executive window to start the PIF
editor application. The file name of the PIF editor is PIFEDIT.EXE.
The Program Information Editor window is displayed. Screen C-I shows
the Program Information Editor window.

File
P,-ogralll Hallle:
P,-og,-alll Title:
Progralll Parallleters:
Initial Directory:

aa.J.',i"Mm,"p"Fi"uIM,n, ..
I
~I=============~

==============;

L . I_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

Nelllo,-y Requirements:

@IJ

Di,-ectly Nodifies

[2J Screen

Prog,-am S"litch
Screen Exchange
Close Hindm!1 on exit

Screen C-l

[.
"

@IJ
0 com
0 Cm12

KB ReQui,-ed

o Keyboard
Co Prevent @) Text
o Hone
Text
(~,

KB Desired

0 Nelllo,-y

r=, Graphics/Nultiple Text
() G,-aphics/Text

Program Information Editor Window

2. Type the file name of the application to be associated with the PIF in
the Program Name text box. Include the file extension (.EXE, .COM, or
.BAT).

3. Select the options or values that apply to the application. (For more
information, see the section "Selecting PIF Options" in this appendix.)
4. Select the Save command from the File Menu to save the new PIF.

C-4

Program Information Files

11111

To create another PIF, select the New command from the File Menu to reset
the PIF editor screen.

Editing PIFs
To edit an existing PIF:
1. Use the Run command in the MS-DOS Executive window to start the PIF
editor. The file name of the PIF editor is PIFEDIT.EXE.
2. Select the Open command from the File Menu.
3. Select the PIF you want to change from the list box or type the name of
the PIF in the text box.
4. Select the Open button.
5. Make the desired changes by selecting the PIF options you want.
6. Select the Save command from the File Menu to save the changes.

Selecting PIF Options
PIF options are organized into these categories:
• Program Name
• Program Title
• Program Parameters
• Initial Directory
• Memory Requirements
• Directly Modifies
• Program Switch
• Screen Exchange
• Close Window on exit

C-5

IIIII Program Information Files
Program Name
Every application (program) must have a file name assigned.
Type the path and file name of the application, including the file extension
.EXE, .BAT, or .COM. Eor example, DBASE.COM isa file for theappHcation
DBASE. What you enter is displayed in the MS-DOS Executive window
directory.
Program Title
You can enter a descriptive title for the application to help the user identify
it on the screen.
What you enter is displayed in the title bar of the window, if the application
runs in a window. This same title is also displayed above the icon of the
application when you highlight the icon in the icon area.
NOTE

The PIF editor lets you enter 37 characters in the text box;
however, only 29 characters are displayed in the title box.
Program Parameters
The Program Parameters option lets you pass information to an application
when you start it. In the Program Parameters text box, you can type either of
the following:
• Question mark
If you type a question mark, MS-Windows displays a dialog box when
you start the application. The dialog box prompts you for application
parameters. You can enter up to 126 characters in the dialog box; however, the application interprets no more than 126 characters. If you
enter more than 126 characters, MS-Windows does not beep to indicate
an error.

e Specific program parameters
If you type specific parameters, those application parameter values are

used every time the application is started. You can enter up to 37 characters in the Program Parameters text box.
You should not redirect input and output or use piping.
If your application requires no parameters, or if you are uncertain, leave this
option blank.

C-6

Program Information Files

IIIII

Initial Directory
If you have several directories, this option changes to a specific directory
when the application starts.
Type the drive and directory you want MS-Windows to change to when you
start the application. This directory is usually the location of the application's data files.
You can use the Initial Directory field and the Program Name field to make a
customized PIF for applications shared on a file server. In the Program Name
field, enter the drive and directory of the application. In the Initial Directory
field, enter the drive and name of your personal directory. (Complete the
other PIF fields as needed.) Make sure this customized PIF is in your personal directory.
When you select the customized PIF to run an application, MS-Windows copies the application from its drive and directory and starts it in your personal
directory where the data files are. The application can then use the data files.
When you close the application, the updated data files remain in your personal directory.
If the data files are in the same directory as the application, leave this option

blank. In this case, MS-Windows does not change the directory when you
start the application.

C-7

IIIII Program Information Files
Memory Requirements
Two fields for Memory Requirements allocate memory for your applications:
• KB Required

Type the minimum amount of memory required (in kilobytes) by your
application.
Memory requirements for your application should be in the application
documentation.
If you do not know how much memory is required, use the default
setting of 52K bytes.
If MS-Windows cannot provide the specified amount of memory, and if

no application is running other than the MS-DOS Executive application,
MS-Windows reduces its space requirements so that the application has
room to operate. In this case, you cannot switch back to MS-Windows
with the Alt/Tab keys; you must execute the application's Exit command, or its equivalent, to return to MS-Windows.
• KB Desired
Type the maximum amount of memory your application can use. Some
applications run better if you assign more memory.
The value entered in this field should at least equal the value entered in
the KB Required field. If the application allocates memory, you should
increase the value in the KB Desired field, and you may also need to
increase the value in the KB Required field.
If you enter zero (0), MS-Windows allocates all available MS-Windows

memory to the application.
If you leave this field blank, MS-Windows uses the default setting of

52K bytes.
CAUTION
You should not run the CHKDSK (Check Disk) utility program
from MS-Windows; otherwise, it can provide invalid messages
about memory availability. If you select the /F qualifier of
CHKDSK, you can destroy all data stored on your workstation
network disk.

C-8

Program In/ormation Files

11111

Directly Modifies
Some applications use workstation resources such that applications cannot
share them. Select any options that apply to your application:
• Screen
Select this box if the application writes directly to the screen (video
buffer) or if the application has a .BAT extension and uses redirected
I/O. Ail standard applications that display graphics write directly to the
screen.
Selecting this option gives the application exclusive access to the full
screen, rather than running it in a window. If you are uncertain, select
this option.
• Keyboard
Select this box if the application accesses the keyboard buffer. This
buffer saves keystrokes until they can be processed.
Selecting this option prevents the application from running in a window
(the application has exclusive access to the full screen) and prevents
returning to MS-Windows with AIt/Tab. If you are uncertain, do not
select this option.
• COM!
Select this box if your application accesses serial communications port
! (COM!). If you select this option, MS-Windows reserves COM! for
the application. When the application is running, MS-Windows cannot
run any other application using COM! until you stop running the first
application. Generally, you select this option only if you are running a
communications application.
Selecting this option prevents two applications from trying to access the
same communications port at the same time. Because only one application with the COM! option selected can be running at a time, only one
application attempts to access COM!.
Selecting this option also prevents the application from being swapped
to a disk. This type of application must remain in memory at all times.

C-9

IIIII Program Information Files
• COM2
Select this box if your application accesses serial communications port
2 (COM2). If you select this option, MS-Windows reserves COM2 for
the application. When the application is running, MS-Windows cannot
run any other appiicationusing COM2until you stop running the first
application. Generally, you select this option only if you are running a
communications application.
Selecting this option prevents two applications from trying to access the
same communications port at the same time. Since only one application
with the COM2 option selected can be running at a time, only one
application attempts to access COM2.
Selecting this option also prevents the application from being swapped
to a disk. This type of application can remain in memory at all times.
• Memory
Select this box only if your application loads and remains resident
(using a Terminate and Stay Resident system call). Many pop-up applications do this. These applications generally load and remain in memory,
and are activated while other applications are running. Generally, this
type of application must be loaded before MS-Windows. In this case,
you do not need a PIF for the application. If you are uncertain, do not
select this option.

C-IO

Program Information Files

11111

Program Switch

If your application uses the entire screen, these options determine whether
you can switch back to MS-Windows with Ait/Tab. If you are uncertain which
option to select, select Text.

• Prevent
Select this option to conserve memory for the application, or if you find
that the application does not switch to MS-Windows correctly. Selecting
this option means you can stop running the application only by executing its Exit command, or the equivalent command, to return to
MS-Windows. You cannot use the Alt/Tab procedure to return to
MS-Windows.
• Text
Select this option if your application works in text mode only, or if it
runs in text and graphics modes, and you want to conserve memory.
When you select this option, MS-Windows reserves 4K bytes to save the
screen.
If you select this option, you can switch back to MS-Windows only
when your application is in text mode. If the application is in graphics
mode, MS-Windows beeps when you press the Ait/Tab keys, to let you
know it is not a valid action; you must execute the Exit command of the
application to return to MS-Windows.

• Graphics/Multiple Text
Select this option if your application works in graphics mode. If you
select this option, MS-Windows allocates extra memory (64K bytes) for
you to switch back to MS-Windows when the application is in text or
graphics mode.
Due to extensive memory requirements, program switching is not supported for applications using IBM EGA high-resolution color modes.

C-ll

IIIII Program Information Files
Screen Exchange

These options let you specify the kind of data exchange between applications
that require exclusive access to the screen.
You press Alt/Prt Sc to copy information into the Clipboard. This requires
MS-Windows to allocate memory to save the screen image in the Clipboard.
Text screens generally do not require much memory (2K bytes). However,
graphics screens can require up to 64K bytes of memory. You should select
options with this in mind.
If you are uncertain which option to select, select Text.

• None
Select this option to prevent screen exchange and conserve memory.
• Text
Select this option to allocate memory to copy text screens. If your
application runs in a window, you can select this option.
• Graphics/Text
Select this option to allocate memory to copy text and graphics screens.
Close Window On Exit

Select this option to close the standard application window when you execute the application's Exit command, or its equivalent.
When you exit from some standard applications, they display information in
the window for you to look at or copy. Do not select this option, because the
window closes automatically, and the information is not displayed on the
screen long enough for you to read it.

C-12

Program Information Files

11111

Using Default Settings
If you run an application, and MS-Windows cannot find a PIF, MS-Windows

uses the following settings:
• Program Title: The application file name is displayed in the title bar.
• Initial Directory: You stay in your current directory.
• Memory Required: S2K bytes
• Memory Desired: All available memory
• Directly Modifies: Screen
• Program Switch: Prevent
• Screen Exchange: Text

Deciding What to Put in a PIF
How an application is displayed on the screen depends on:
• How the application uses workstation resources and hardware
• How the application is configured
• The amount of memory reserved for the application
If MS-Windows cannot run a standard application in a window, it runs the

application outside a window, and the application uses the entire screen.
Use the following guidelines to help determine whether your standard application can run in a window:
• Does the application write directly to the screen (video buffer)?
Many standard applications write directly to the screen instead of using
DOS or other system conventions to display information (such as ANSI
calls). These applications cannot run in a window. You must select the
Directly Modifies screen option if your application writes to the screen.
• Does the application display graphics?
Standard applications that display bit-mapped graphiCS (not characterbased) write directly to the screen and cannot run in a window.

C-l3

IIIII Program In/ormation Files
• Does the application provide an installation option for running under
different screen conventions?
Standard applications that support ANSI screen drivers can run in a window.
• How much memory does the application require?
If the memory requirements of the standard application and

MS-Windows together exceed the amount of available memory, the
application cannot run in a window. MS-Windows "steps aside" and
gives the application the maximum amount of memory available.
• Does the application use the alarm?
Applications that use the alarm function of the real-time clock must run
outside MS-Windows. At the minimum, you should select the Directly
Modifies keyboard option.
For standard applications that run in a window, MS-Windows does not
support the following ANSI escape sequences:
Cursor Position Report
Set Mode
- Keyboard Reassignment
Set Graphics Renditions subsets:
Faint on
Italic on
Rapid blink on
Subscript
Su perscri pt
Select the Directly Modifies screen option in the PIF for any application
that uses these.
To experiment, run the application without setting the Directly Modifies
screen option. If the application writes information outside its window, or
you see unexpected results on the screen, edit the PIF and select the Directly
Modifies screen option.

C-14

Program In/ormation Files

IIIII

Changing PIFs
Generally, you do not have to change the information in the PIFs. However,
to change any parameters for a particular application by editing a PIF, you
can tailor the performance characteristics of its application.
For example, to give Lotus 1-2-3 the maximum amount of available memory
in your workstation, change the amount in the KB Required and KB Desired
options to 640K bytes and select None for the Screen Exchange option and
Prevent for the Program Switch option. Close all other applications except
for the MS-DOS Executive, then run the application.
Some applications provide an option to install and run the application with
an ANSI device driver (ANSI.SYS). If the application offers this option, you
can usually run it in a window.
Since the application can now run in a window, you must alter the PIF. You
should cancel the Directly Modifies Screen option. (Do this for all related
.COM or .EXE files included in the application.)
If you run an application, and it does not load properly or is not operating as

expected, check your PIF settings. You may need to increase the memory
requirements of the application.

Giving Applications More Memory
When you run a standard application, MS-Windows allocates memory based
on the settings in the PIF of the application. MS-Windows allocates memory
for screen exchange (copying the screen) and for program switching (switching between the application and MS-Windows).
You can reduce the memory requirements for an application by selecting
options that require less memory:
• The Screen Exchange Text option
• The Screen Exchange None and the Program Switch Prevent options

C-15

AppendixD
Using a Keyboard With
the VT220 Emulator

This appendix covers in table format the keys that can be used with the
VT220 emulator. It is assumed that you know:
• How to use MS-Windows keyboard techniques
• The purpose of the actions you want to take as explained in the VT220
emulator chapters
Table D-I lists the keys used with the VT220 emulator and their functions.
NOTE

To access and use the arrow keys with the VT220 emulator you
must press the Alt/spacebar keys. The first time you press this key
combination, you get the Set-Up System menu. To access the arrow
keys, type this key combination a second time.
Table D-I

Keys and Their VT220 Emulator Functions

Key

VT220 Emulator Function

AIt/right arrow
AIt/left arrow

When used after pressing Alt/spacebar, it moves the highlight right or left to the next Set-Up settings.

Alt/spacebar

The first time you use this key combination, you get the
Set-Up System menu. To access the arrow keys, type the
key combination a second time.

AIt/up arrow
AIt/down arrow

Moves the highlight up or down within a Set-Up dropdown menu.

Used in Set-Up to display the next Set-Up screen from the
menu at the top of the screen.

D-l

11111 Using a Keyboard With the VT220 Emulator
Table D-l

Keys and Their VT220 Emulator Functions (cont.)

Key

VT220 Emulator Function

Used in Set-Up to display the previous Set-Up screen from
the menu at the top of (he screen.

Right arrow
Left arrow

Moves the cursor right or left in the tab column display.

F3 (Set-Up)

Enters or exits Set-Up.

Up arrow
Down arrow

Sets or resets a tab stop in Set-Up.

D-2

AppendixE
Special Key
Actions for MS-Paint

This appendix describes how to use the Ctrl and Shift keys with the mouse to
enhance or restrict some of MS-Paint's functions.

Using the Ctrl Key: Copying a Selection
To copy a selection with the Ctrl key:
1. Hold down the Ctrl key.

2. Drag the selection.
MS-Paint creates a copy of the selection; the original remains in place.

Using the Shift Key: Creating Multiple Copies
To make multiple copies with the Shift key:
1. Hold down the Shift key.

2. Drag a selection.
MS-Paint makes copies of the selection where the mouse cursor was dragged.

Using the Shift Key: Scrolling a Zoomed-In Canvas
To scroll a zoomed-in canvas with the Shift key:
1. Hold down the Shift key in the zoomed-in drawing window.
2. Drag.
MS-Paint scrolls the canvas.

E-1

AppendixF
Using MS-Paint
With the Keyboard

This appendix describes how you can use the keyboard to:
• Select tools and shapes
• Draw lines and shapes
• Draw curves
• Draw polygons
• Use the fill tool
• Make selections
• Move selections
• Copy and move selections
• Make multiple copies of a selection
• Scroll
• Zoom in, zoom out, and erase by using the Return key
You must select the proper tool before performing the sequence.

F-l

11111 Using MS·Paint With the Keyboard

Selecting Tools and Shapes
To select from the tools and shapes palette, press (Tab/Shilt/Tab ) .
To move the highlight and select a tool or shape, you can also hold down the
Shift/etr! keys and press an arrow key.

Drawing Lines and Shapes
To draw with the Pencil, Line, Freehand Polygon, Brush, Air Brush, 3-D, and
Shapes tools:
1. Hold down the spacebar.
2. Press an arrow key in the direction you want to draw.
3. Release the spacebar to finish drawing.

Drawing Curves
To draw a curve:
1. Hold down the spacebar.
2. Press an arrow key in the direction you want to draw.
3. Move the cursor to one side of the line, and press the spacebar to mark
the peak of the curve.
4. Release the spacebar to draw the curve.

Drawing Polygons
To draw a polygon:
1. Mark each corner with the spacebar and the arrow keys.
MS·Paint draws the lines, connecting each corner.
2. Press the Return key at the final corner to close the polygon.

F-2

Using MS-Paint With the Keyboard

IIIII

Using the Fill Tool
To fill a shape:
1. Press an arrow key to move the cursor over the shape.
2. Press the spacebar.
The interior is filled.

Making a Selection
To select an area of the canvas:
1. Hold down the spacebar.
2. Press the arrow keys to indicate the area to be selected.
3. Release the spacebar.

Moving a Selection
To move a selection:
1. Press an arrow key to move the cursor into the Selection Rectangle or
netted area.
2. Hold down the spacebar.
3. Press an arrow key until the selection is moved where you want it.

Copying and Moving a Selection
To move a copy of a selection:
1. Hold down Ctrl/spacebar.
2. Press an arrow key.

P-3

11111 Using MS-Paint With the Keyboard

Making Multiple Copies
To make multiple copies of a selection:
1. Hold down Shift/spacebar.
2. Press an arrow key to move the selection.
Multiple copies are made where the arrow key moves.

Scrolling
To scroll the screen:
1. Hold down the spacebar.
2. Press an arrow key.
To scroll a zoomed-out canvas:
1. Hold down the spacebar.
2. Press an arrow key to move the outline of the drawing window.
When you return to the regular drawing window, the outlined selection
of canvas is displayed.
To scroll the canvas under a zoomed-in drawing window:
1. Hold down Shift/spacebar.
The Scroll cursor replaces the Pencil cursor during the scrolling action.
2. To scroll the canvas, move the Scroll cursor by pressing the arrow keys.

F-4

Using MS·Paint With the Keyboard

IIIII

Using the Return Key
You can use the Return key to zoom in, zoom out, and erase.

Zooming In
To zoom in:
I. Select the Pencil tooL
2. Press the spacebar to mark the target area lor editing.
3. Press the Return key to zoom in for editing.
,
4. Press the Return key again to return to the regular drawing window.

Zooming Out
To zoom out:
1. Follow the procedures for scrolling and press the Return key.
2. Press the Return key again to return to the regular drawing window.

Erasing
To erase the entire drawing window:
1. Select the Eraser tooL

2. Press the Return key.

F-5

Reader's Comments

VAXmate
User's Guide Volume 1
M-HD91A-TK

Your comments on this manual will help improve our product quality and usefulness.
Please indicate the type of reader you most closely represent.

o First-time user
o Application user

0 Programmer
0 Experienced user
0 Other (please specify) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

How would you rate this manual for:
Completeness of Information
Accuracy of Information
Easy to Read/Use
Usefulness of Examples
Number of Examples
Illustrations
Table of Contents
Index
Format
Binding Style
Print Quality

Excellent

Good

Fair

Poor

o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o

o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o

o
o

o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o

o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o

Did you find any errors in this manual? Please specify by page and paragraph.
Incorrect information:
Information left out:
Hard to understand:

What suggestions do you have for improving this manual? Attach a second sheet if
necessary.

Name _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _~Title _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _~
Company

Dept. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

Street
State/Country
Telephone

City
Postal/Zip Code_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _~
Date _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _~

Do Not Tear - Fold Hell! and Tape No Postage
Necessary
if Mailed in the
United States

BUSINESS REPLY MAIL
FIRST CLASS PERMIT NO.33 MAYNARD MASS.

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE

SOFTWARE PUBLICATIONS
200 FOREST STREET MR01-2 L 12
MARLBOROUGH, MA 01752

111"",11,11""11""1,11,1,,1,1,,1,1,,11,,,,,1,11
-

Do Not Tear - Fold H.II!